ME Min1

ANNAMACHARYA INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY AND SCIENCES RAJAMPET
ANNAMACHARYA INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY AND SCIENCES

RAJAMPET
(An Autonomous Institution)
ACADEMIC REGULATIONS (R20), COURSE STRUCTURE AND SYLLABI

For the students admitted to
B. Tech., Regular Four Year Mechanical Engineering Degree Programme from the
Academic Year 2020-21, B.Tech Honors and Minors
and
B. Tech., Lateral Entry Scheme from the Academic Year 2021-22
1
2
VISION AND MISSION OF THE INSTITUTION
Vision
We impart futuristic technical education and instil high patterns of discipline through our
dedicated staff who set global standards, making our students technologically superior and
ethically strong, who in turn shall improve the quality of life of the human race.
Mission
Our mission is to educate students from the local and rural areas and from other states so
that they become enlightened individuals, improving the living standards of their families,
industry and society. We provide individual attention, world-class quality of Technical
education and take care of character building.
3
4
ACADEMIC RULES AND REGULATIONS OF FOUR-YEAR B. TECH

MECHANICAL ENGINEERING REGULAR DEGREE PROGRAMME
APPLICABLE FOR THE STUDENT BATCHES ADMITTED FROM THE ACADEMIC YEAR 2020-21
APPLICABLE FOR THE STUDENTS (Lateral Entry) ADMITTED FROM THE ACADEMIC YEAR 2021-22
CONTENTS
1. Preamble
2. Application and Commencement
3. Eligibility for Admission
3.1 Admission into Engineering Under Graduation Programmes (Regular)
3.2 Admission into Second Year (Lateral Entry Scheme)
4. Medium of Instruction
5. B.Tech. Programme Structure
6. Programmes Offered by The Institute
7. Courses and Credit Structure
7.1 Types of Courses:
7.1.1 Foundation Courses
7.1.2 Professional Core Courses
7.1.3 Professional Core Electives
7.1.4 Open Electives
7.1.5 Massive Open Online Courses
7.1.6 Skill Oriented Courses / Skill Advanced courses
7.1.7 Mandatory Courses
7.1.8 Universal Human Value Courses
8. Evaluation Process
8.1 Internal Evaluation
8.1.1 Theory Internal Examinations
8.1.2 Assignments
8.1.3 Lab Internal Evaluation
8.1.4 Internal Evaluation of Mandatory Courses
8.1.5 Make-Up Internal Evaluation
8.1.6 Evaluation of Skill oriented / Skill advanced / Soft Skills course
8.2 End Evaluation
8.2.1 Theory End Evaluation
8.2.2 Lab End Examination
8.2.3 Supplementary Theory/Lab End Examinations
8.2.4 Challenge Evaluation, Revaluation and Recounting
9. Internship and Project Evaluation
9.1 Summer Internship/ Research Internship
9.2 Project Work
10. Curricular Framework for Honors Programme
5
11. Curricular Framework for Minor Programme

12 Attendance Requirements and Detention Policy
13. Minimum Academic Requirements and Award of the Degree
14. Semester Grade Point Average (SGPA) and Cumulative Grade Point Average (CGPA)
14.1 Computation of SGPA
14.2 Computation of CGPA
14.3 Grade Card
14.4 Conversion of SGPA into Percentage
15. Transcripts
16. Transitory Regulations
17. Readmission of Students
18. Minimum Instruction Days for A Semester
19. Student Transfers
20. Announcement of Results
21. General Instructions
6
1. PREAMBLE
Annamacharya Institute of Technology and Sciences (Autonomous), Rajampet, relentlessly aims to achieve
academic excellence by implementing new initiatives in teaching-learning and evaluation processes. Based
on the directions of the University Grants Commission (UGC), New Delhi, All India Council for Technical
Education (AICTE), New Delhi and Jawaharlal Nehru Technological University Anantapur (JNTUA)
Anantapuramu, the institute adopted AICTE and APSCHE model curriculum, with minor modifications to
match the needs, expectations, and skillsets of students of the region, in both the undergraduate and post-
graduate programmes offered from the academic year 2020-21.
2. APPLICATION AND COMMENCEMENT
 The regulations are quite comprehensive and include definitions of key terms, semester system,
credit system, grading system and other relevant details.
 The regulations detailed herein shall apply to all the regular under-graduate programmes offered by
the Institute.
 The regulations shall be applicable and come into force to the student batches admitted from the
academic year 2020-21 and Lateral Entry students admitted from the academic year 2021-22
 The Institute may revise, amend or change the regulations, scheme of examinations and syllabi,
from time to time, if found necessary and on approval by the Academic Council of the Institute,
keeping the recommendations of the BoS in view.
 Any or all such amendments shall be effective from such date and to such batches of students
including those already undergoing the programme, as may be approved through Academic Council
of the Institute.
 These regulations shall be called R20 Regulations.
3. ELIGIBILITY FOR ADMISSION
3.1 ADMISSION INTO ENGINEERING UNDER GRADUATION PROGRAMMES (REGULAR)
The eligibility criteria for admission into engineering under graduate programmes offered at AITS shall be as
prescribed by the Government of Andhra Pradesh. The criteria are given below:
 The candidate shall be an Indian National / NRI.
 The candidate should have completed 16 years of age as on 31st December of the academic year
for which the admissions are being conducted.
 The candidate should have passed the qualifying examination (10+2) or equivalent as on the date of
admission recognized by Board of Intermediate, Andhra Pradesh.
 Seats in each programme in the Institute are classified into two categories i.e., Category – A and
Category – B as per the GOs of Andhra Pradesh.
7
Category – A Seats
These seats shall be filled through counselling as per the rank secured by a candidate in the Common
Entrance Test (EAMCET) conducted by the Government of Andhra Pradesh and as per other admission
criteria laid down in the GOs.
Category – B Seats
These seats shall be filled by the Institute as per the GOs issued by the Government of Andhra
Pradesh from time to time
3.2 ADMISSION INTO SECOND YEAR (Lateral Entry Scheme)
A candidate shall be admitted into the third semester (II year I semester) based on the rank secured by the
candidate in the Engineering Common Entrance Test (ECET) by the Government of Andhra Pradesh and as
per other admission criteria laid down in the GOs.
4. Medium of Instruction
The medium of instruction shall be English for all the courses including their content delivery and
examinations, seminars, presentations and project evaluation as prescribed in the programme curriculum.
5. B.TECH. PROGRAMME STRUCTURE
The structure of the B.Tech. Programmes on offer at AITS are based on the Choice Based Credit System
(CBCS) as defined by the UGC and the curriculum / course structure as suggested by the AICTE and
APSCHE in its Model Curriculum.
Semester Scheme
 The B. Tech Programmes offered at AITS follow semester scheme pattern.
 The duration of a B. Tech. Programme shall be of 4 academic years for 4 year B. Tech programmes
and 3 academic years for 3 year B. Tech programmes in lateral entry scheme.
 Each academic year shall have 2 semesters i.e., odd and even semesters and shall be counted as first
semester, second semester, and third semester and so on up to eighth semester.
 Each semester shall consist of 16 weeks of academic work excluding internal examinations.
 Each semester is structured to provide credits totalling to 160 credits for the entire B.Tech. Programme.
 Each semester shall have Continuous Internal Evaluation (CIE) and Semester End Examination
(SEE) for both Theory and Lab courses.
 Each student is required to secure a total of 160 credits with a CGPA ≥ 5 for the completion of the UG
programme and the award of the B.Tech. Degree.
 A student after securing admission into a 4 year B.Tech Programme at AITS shall pursue and acquire
the B.Tech. degree in a minimum period of four academic years i.e., 8 semesters and a maximum
period of eight academic years i.e., 16 semesters starting from the date of commencement of I year I
8
semester, failing which the student shall forfeit the seat in B.Tech. Programme.
 A student after securing admission into a 3 year B. Tech Programme (Lateral Entry) at AITS shall
pursue and acquire the B.Tech. Degree in a minimum period of three academic years i.e., 6
semesters and a maximum period of six academic years i.e., 12 semesters starting from the date of
commencement of II year I semester, failing which the student shall forfeit the seat in B.Tech.
programme
6. PROGRAMMES OFFERED BY THE INSTITUTE
The following B. Tech. programmes are offered as specializations by the Institute from 2020-2021.
SNo Name of the Program Programme Code
1 Civil Engineering 01
2 Electrical and Electronics Engineering 02
3 Mechanical Engineering 03
4 Electronics and Communication Engineering 04
5 Computer Sciences and Engineering 05
6 Artificial Intelligence and Data Science 30
7 Artificial Intelligence and Machine Learning -
7. COURSES AND CREDIT STRUCTURE

Credit: A credit is a unit by which the course work is measured. It determines the number of hours of
instructions required per week. One credit is equivalent to one hour of teaching (Lecture/Tutorial) or two
hours of practical work/field work/project per week.
Academic Year: Two consecutive (one odd + one even) semesters constitute one academic year.
Choice Based Credit System (CBCS): CBCS provides choice for students to select from the prescribed
courses.
Each course is assigned certain number of credits based on following criterion
Semester
Type of Class
Periods per Week Credits
01 01
Theory 02 02
(Lecture/Tutorial) 03 03
04 04
02 01
Practical 03 1.5
04 02
Project Work / Internship - 16.5
Every course of the B. Tech. programme shall be offered by a specific section / department. The unique
codes of the section / department offering the courses are given in the Table.
9
Course offering Department Code

Basic Science Courses
Humanities and Social Science Courses C
including Management Courses
Civil Engineering 1
Electrical and Electronics Engineering 2
Mechanical Engineering 3
Electronics & Communication Engineering 4
Computer Science & Engineering 5
Artificial Intelligence and Data Science 30
Artificial Intelligence and Machine Learning -
Every B. Tech. Programme of study shall be designed to have theory and laboratory courses. In addition, a
student shall carry out internship, project, socially relevant project, and other mandatory courses as
prescribed in the curriculum of the Programmes.
7.1 Types of Courses:
TYPE OF DEPARTMENT OF
CODE
COURSES COURSE CATEGORY MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
Engineering Sciences ESC 24

Basic Sciences BSC 21
Foundation
Humanities & Social
Sciences and HSMC 10.5
Management
Core Professional Core PCC 51
Project (12)
Project PROJ 16.5
Internship (4.5)
Professional Elective PEC 15
Elective courses Open Elective
OEC 12
(including two MOOCs)
Mandatory
Mandatory MC -
Courses
Skill Oriented Courses SC 10
Total Credits 160
7.1.1 Foundation Courses

Engineering Science courses, Basic Science Courses and Humanities courses are termed as Foundation
Courses and are mostly offered at I and II Year.
10
7.1.2 Professional Core Courses

Professional Core Course is to be completed by all students of respective programme before they can move
on to the next semester.
7.1.3 Professional Core Electives
University Grants Commission has come up with the Choice Based Credit System (CBCS) in which the
students have a choice to choose from the prescribed courses, which are referred as Professional elective
and Open Elective courses. All the Professional and Open elective courses shall be offered for 3 credits.
Students have to register for a total of 5 professional core electives courses (PEC-1 to PEC-5) from the list
of track-wise professional elective course as prescribed in the course structure of the programme. The
following points are considered for a Professional Elective Course.
 Maximum strength of a class /section for each semester shall be 72.
 A course may be offered to the students, only if a minimum of 24 students (1/3 of the section
strength) opt for it.
 The selection of course based on the choice for students shall be on ‗first come first serve‘ through
on line and off line registration.
 The Head of the department or concerned shall decide, whether or not to offer such course keeping
in view the resources available in the department offering the course.
7.1.4 Open Electives
Choice Based Credit System (CBCS) is promoted in such a way that different open elective courses should
be offered by every department in engineering to other departments. This interdisciplinary of learning open
elective courses by other department students will have learning awareness and job-oriented benefits.
Students require the opportunity to choose any open elective course from different departments and apply
their knowledge to acquire jobs in that field of course. Learning and employment benefits are not only
through their own course subjects but also through open elective courses.
Every student shall earn prescribed credits by choosing one of the open elective courses from the list of
Open Electives given in the Curriculum. Further students from a particular program/branch can opt for one
Open Elective (OEC1) offered by their concerned department. However, one Open Electives (OEC2) is
inter-disciplinary and shall be offered by other branches.
Two Open electives (OEC3 & OEC4) are to be chosen from the repository of inter-disciplinary MOOCs
courses offered by NPTEL or any other recognized Institutions/Organization. Students shall consult their
class mentors before opting for an open elective course (MOOCs)
11
The following guidelines are pertaining to Open Elective Courses.

 Maximum strength of a class /section for each semester shall be 72.
 A course may be offered to the students, only if a minimum of 24 students (1/3 of the section
strength) opt for it. The minimum number of students is required to register the course to offer opted
course in the department.
 The selection of course based on the choice for students shall be on ‗first come first serve‘ through
on line and off line registration.
 The Head of the department or concerned shall decide, whether or not to offer such course keeping
in view the resources available in the department offering the course.
7.1.5 Massive Open Online Courses as Open Elective
 MOOCs (Massive Open Online Courses) are introduced to meet with the global requirements and to
inculcate the habit of self-learning and in compliance with the UGC guidelines
 A student shall be permitted to pursue up to a maximum of two electives courses under MOOCs
during programme. Each of courses must be of minimum 12 weeks in duration.
 Concerned departments shall declare the list of inter-disciplinary courses that a student can
pursue through MOOCs at the beginning of the corresponding semester.
 Students interested in pursuing MOOCs shall register for the course and submit this information at
their department office at the start of the corresponding semester.
 Course content for the selected MOOCs shall be drawn from the respective MOOCs offering Portal.
 Course progress shall be monitored by the Mentors designated by the HoD.
 Grade obtained through the evaluation of the MOOC shall be considered for the CGPA calculation.
 Three credits shall be awarded to the student upon successful completion of MOOC.
 In case a student fails to complete the MOOCs he/she shall re-register for the same with the same
provider, already offered that course. In case that provider discontinues to offer the course,
Institution shall conduct an offline examination in the same format, which student already appeared
in online examination, as per the MOOC syllabus.
7.1.6 Skill Oriented Courses
 There shall be 5 skill oriented course offered during 3 rd to 7th semester. Among the 5 skill oriented
courses, 4 courses shall focus on the basic advanced skills related to the domain courses and
remaining 1 shall be a soft skills course.
 Skill oriented / skill advanced courses carry 2 credits
 For skill oriented/skill advanced course, 1 theory and 2 practical hours may be allotted as per the
decision of concerned BOS.
12
 Out of the 5 skill courses 2 shall be skill-oriented courses from the same domain and shall be
completed in 2nd year. Of the remaining 3 skills course, 1 shall be necessarily be a soft skill course
and the remaining 2 shall be skill advanced courses either from the same domain or job oriented
skill course, which can be of inter-disciplinary nature.
 A pool of interdisciplinary job-oriented skill course shall be designed by a common Board of studies
by the participating departments and the syllabus along with the pre-requisites shall be prepared for
each of the laboratory infrastructure requirements,
 The student shall be given an option to choose either the skill courses being offered by the institute
or to choose a certificate course being offered by Industries/Professional Bodies/ APSSDC or any
other accredited bodies as approved by the concerned BOS.
 If a student chooses to take a certificate course offered by Industries/Professional Bodies/ APSSDC
or any other accredited bodies, in lieu of the skill advanced course offered by the department, the
credits shall be awarded to the student upon producing the course completion certificate from
Industries/Professional Bodies/ APSSDC as approved by the concerned BOS.
 If a student prefers to take a certificate course offered by external agency, the department shall
mark attendance of the student for the remaining courses in that semester excluding the skill
oriented course in all the calculations of mandatory attendance requirements upon producing a valid
certificate as approved by the concerned BOS, the student is deemed to have fulfilled the
attendance requirements of the course and acquire the credits assigned to the course.
 A committee shall be formed at the level of the institute to evaluate the grades/marks given for a
course by external agencies and convert to the equivalent marks/grades. The recommended
conversions and appropriate grades/marks are to be approved by the Academic Council
7.1.7 Mandatory Courses
 A student shall pursue mandatory courses as specified in the course structure of the B.Tech.
Programme.
 These courses are among the compulsory courses and do not carry any credits.
 A student has to secure 40 marks out of 100 in the Internal Examination, shall be necessary
requirement for the student to qualify for the award of Degree.
 Result of mandatory courses shall be declared with “Pass” or “Fail” performance in the
Comprehensive Marks Memo.
 No marks or letter grade shall be allotted.
 Attendance in the mandatory course shall be considered while calculating aggregate attendance.
13
7.1.8 Universal Human Values (UHV) Courses
 Universal Human Values-I shall be offered during the Student Induction Programme with no credits.
 Universal Human Values-II course carries 3 credits. The assessment is to provide a fair state of
development of the student, so participation in classroom discussions, self-assessment, peer
assessment etc. will be used in evaluation.
 A student has to secure 40% marks out of 100 in the CIE and SEE together to qualify for the award
of the degree. The distribution shall be 50 marks for continuous internal assessment and 50 marks
for semester end examination.
 Internal evaluation shall be conducted for the course during semester and shall be evaluated for 50
marks and distributions of marks as follows:
o Assessment by faculty mentor: 10 marks
o Self-assessment: 10 marks
o Assessment by peers: 10 marks
o Socially relevant project/Group Activities/Assignments: 20 marks
8. Evaluation Process
The performance of a student in each semester shall be evaluated course-wise with a maximum of 100
marks for both Theory and Lab Course.
 For a Theory course, the distribution shall be 30 marks for Internal Evaluation and 70 marks for End-
Examinations. The distribution is detailed in 8.1.1.
 For a Lab course, the distribution shall be 30 marks for Internal Evaluation and 70 marks End-
Examinations. The distribution is detailed in 8.1.3
 Project Work shall be evaluated for 200 marks. Mandatory courses with no credits shall be
evaluated for 100 marks.
8.1 Internal Evaluation
For a Theory Course, 30 marks are allotted for Internal Evaluation. Two Internal examinations (Theory
Internal Examinations) shall be conducted for a Theory Course during a semester and they shall be
evaluated for 30 marks of which 25 marks are given for Internal Examination and 5 marks for assignment.
For Lab Course, there shall be a continuous internal evaluation during the semester for 30 marks.
8.1.1 Theory Internal Examinations
Theory internal examination shall have Part A & Part B. In Part A, which is compulsory, five short answer
questions each of which carries one mark. There shall be no sub-questions or bits or fill-up the blanks. The
examination shall be conducted for 2 hours.
14
Part B shall contain three either type questions (Total six questions from 1 to 6). Each question shall carry 10
marks. 30 marks allotted for Part B shall finally be scaled down to 20 marks. The questions shall be set/
moderated such that the student can comfortably answer each question within the stipulated time.
Question paper pattern for Internal Examination (25 Marks) shall be as follows:
PART A: Five short answer questions - 5 x 1 = 5 Marks
PART B: 30 Marks (will be scaled to 20 marks)
(i) There shall be three questions with internal Choice i.e., ‗either‘ or ‗choice‘
(ii) The student shall answer three questions
First Theory Internal examination shall be conducted as per the syllabus of I & II units. The second internal
examination shall be conducted as per the syllabus of III, IV and V units. 80 % weightage for the best
performance and 20 % the other shall be considered.
For Example:
Marks obtained in I Internal examination: 19
Marks obtained in II Internal examination: 10
Final Internal Marks: (19x0.8) + (10x0.2) = 17.2
If the student is absent for any one Internal examination, the final internal marks shall be arrived at by
considering 80% weight age to the marks secured by the student in the appeared examination and zero to
the other.
For Example:
Marks obtained in first Internal: 0 (Absent); Marks obtained in second Internal: 18
Final Internal Marks: (18x0.8) + (0x0.2) = 14.4
Note: For some courses namely, Engineering Graphics and Engineering Graphics & Design, the distribution
of internal evaluation and external evaluation marks shall be 30 and 70 respectively.
Of the 30 internal evaluation marks, day-to-day performance of the student shall be evaluated for 20 marks
and internal examination carries 10 marks. Day-to-day work shall be evaluated by the teacher concerned
based on the exercises/submissions/assignments prepared in the class. Two internal examinations shall be
conducted in a semester for duration of 2 hours each for 10 marks with a weightage of 80% for better of the
two and 20% for the other. The sum of day-to-day work and the internal examination marks will be the final
internal evaluation for 30 marks for the subject. End examination shall be for 70 marks and is of 3 hours
15
duration. The question paper shall be with 5 questions, one question from each unit with internal choice. All
questions carry 14 marks each.
8.1.2 Assignment (Theory)
The assignment shall contain essay type questions/numerical problems etc.., the assignments is given by
the concerned class teacher for five marks from first two units. The second assignments shall give from rest
of the syllabus. The first assignment should be submitted before the conduct of the first internal examination,
and the second assignment should be submitted before the conduct of the second internal examination.
There shall be at least two assignments in a semester and performance of one best out of two assignments
to be considered.
8.1.3 Lab Internal Evaluation
Out of the 30 marks allotted for Lab Internal Evaluation, day-to-day performance of the student in the
laboratory shall be evaluated for 20 marks by the concerned laboratory teacher based on experimental
evaluation/record/viva. Two Lab Internal examinations shall be conducted for 10 marks by the concerned
teacher. Performance of one best out of two tests to be considered.
8.1.4 Internal Evaluation of Mandatory Courses
Mandatory courses are offered with no credits. However, a student has to complete Mandatory Courses in
order to be eligible for the award of the Degree. There shall be an Internal Examination for 100 marks. A
student shall be declared to have passed the mandatory course only when he/she secures 40% or more in
the internal examination. In case, the student fails, a supplementary examination shall be conducted.
8.1.5 Make-up Internal Evaluation
The student who has missed both the Theory Internal examinations will be permitted to appear for a Make-
up Internal examination in the event of his/her producing satisfactory evidences of medical ailment. One
Make-up internal test shall be conducted immediately after the II Internal examination in the same semester,
covering the total syllabus of FIVE Units in the respective course.
This Make-up examination will be given a weightage of 80%. Make-up tests shall be conducted outside the
working hours and there can be even two such examinations on a day.
Student absent for I Internal examinations with valid reasons he/ she should produce a supporting document
to the department within a week after completion of last internal examination. And the same student absent
for same subject in II Internal examination, he/ she should produce a supporting document to the department
immediately in order to giving the provision for makeup examination.
Make-up internal examinations are not for improvement of marks in Theory Internal examinations. There
shall be no make-up internal examinations for a Lab course.
16
8.1.6 Evaluation of Skill oriented / Skill advanced / Soft Skills course

Course type: Laboratory
Distribution of marks: 30:70
Evaluation Type: Internal Evaluation
A student is evaluated for a maximum of 100 marks with respect to skill oriented course / Skill advanced
courses / Soft skill course. The distribution of marks shall be 30 for internal evaluation and 70 for external
evaluation. For Internal Evaluation, day-to-day performance of the student in the laboratory shall be
evaluated for 30 marks by the concerned skill oriented course / Skill advanced courses / Soft skill course
class teacher based on experimental evaluation / discussions / results / reports. External evaluation is done
for 70 marks in a laboratory end semester examination conducted for 3 hours.
Note: Each skill oriented course / Skill advanced courses / Soft skill course will have its own
evaluation procedure and weightage.
8.2 End Evaluation
8.2.1 Theory End Evaluation
As specified in 8.0, Theory End Evaluation is done for 70 marks. End examination of theory subjects shall be
conducted at the end of semester. There shall be Regular and Supplementary End Examinations. Theory
End Examination shall be conducted for 70 marks and is of 3 hours duration.
Theory end examination shall have Part A & Part B. In Part A, which is compulsory, five short answer
questions each unit of which carries two marks shall be given. There shall be no sub-questions or bits or
fill-up the blanks.
Part B shall contain five either type questions (Total 10 questions with internal choice). 60 marks allotted for
Part B and each question shall carry 12 marks. There will be one question from each unit. The examination
shall be conducted for 3 hours.
Question paper pattern for Semester End Examination (70 Marks) shall be as follows:
PART A: 5 x 2 = 10 Marks
(i) There shall be one question from each unit

(ii) Part A is compulsory.
PART B: 5 x 12 = 60 Marks
(i) Five questions with internal choice will be given

(ii) There shall be one question from each unit with Internal Choice i.e., ‗either‘ or ‗choice‘
(iii) Sub questions may also be given.
17
8.2.2 Lab End Examination

As specified in 8.0, Lab End Evaluation is done for 70 marks, in the form a Lab End Examination that shall
be conducted for 3 hours in respective Laboratory. Each lab course will have its own evaluation procedure
and weightage.
8.2.3 Supplementary Theory/Lab End Examinations
 Supplementary examination shall be conducted along with regular semester end examinations.
 During Semester End Examinations of even semester, supplementary examinations of odd
semester shall be conducted and during semester end examinations of odd semester,
supplementary examinations of even semester shall be conducted.
 The same schedule is applicable to Supplementary Lab End Examinations. Supplementary
examination shall be conducted along with the next batch of students or separately.
 Advanced supplementary shall be conducted only for Final Year II semester Students in view of
their higher education pursuits and placement opportunities.
 In case of seminars and comprehensive viva-voce examinations, supplementary seminar /
comprehensive viva-voce will be conducted along with the next batch of students. If the next batch
of students is not available, a separate supplementary examination will be conducted.
8.2.4 Challenge Evaluation, Revaluation and Recounting
Students may visit Examination Section Webpage for Norms and Procedures for Challenge Evaluation,
Revaluation and Recounting of Answer Scripts. (Refer to Appendix II).
9.0 Internship and Project Evaluation
9.1 Summer Internship / Research Internship (Industry / Govt. / NGO / MSME / Online)
 A student shall carry a mandatory Internship for 2 months for 1.5 credits in 2nd year 2nd semester
during summer vacation and it is evaluated during 3rd year 1st semester. A student shall carry a
mandatory Industrial / Research Internship for 2 months for 3 credits in 3rd year 2nd semester during
summer vacation and it is evaluated during 4th year 1st semester.
 Two summer internships each with a minimum of 6 weeks duration. Done at the end of 2 nd and 3rd
year, respectively are mandatory. The internship can be done by the students at local industries,
Govt. Organizations, construction agencies, Industries, Hydel and thermal power projects and also
in software MNCs
 Evaluation of the summer internships shall be through the departmental committee. A student will be
required to submit a summer internship report to the concerned departments and appear for an oral
presentation before the departmental committee. The report and the oral presentation shall carry
40% and 60% weightages respectively.
18
 In the final semester, the student should mandatorily undergo internships and parallelly he/she
should work on a project with well-defined objectives. At the end of the semester the candidates
shall submit an internship completion certificate and a project report. A student shall also be
permitted to submit project report on the work carried out during the internship. The project report
shall be evaluated with an external examiner.
 The institute shall facilitate and monitor the student internship programs. Completion of internships
is mandatory, if any student fails to complete internship, he/she will not be eligible for the award of
degree. In such cases, the student shall repeat and complete the internship.
 There shall also be mandatory full internship in the final semester of the programme along with the
project work.
 For other details, please refer to Appendix I.
9.2 Project Work
Project work consists of a presentation of Abstract of the main project in the beginning of 8th Semester.
After selecting specific topic, the student shall collect the information and prepare a report, showing his/her
understanding of the topic and submit the same to the department before presentation. Project shall be
evaluated for a total of 200 marks. The technical presentation/report shall be evaluated by a committee
consisting of Head of the Department along with two senior faculty members of the Department. A student
shall acquire 12 credits assigned, if her/his report is declared Satisfactory by the committee based on
Rubrics set by the Department for evaluation.
Out of a total of 200 marks for the Project work, The internal evaluation shall be carried for 50 marks done
by a committee consisting of HOD, Project Supervisor and senior faculty member of the department and the
remaining 150 marks shall be awarded by a committee consisting of HOD, project Supervisor and an
External Examiner nominated by the Principal or Dean Academics. The internal evaluation shall be done on
the basis of two seminars conducted in a semester as per the academic calendar and stipulated rubrics. In
case, if a student fails in Project work, a re-examination shall be conducted within a month. In case he/she
fails in the re-examination also, he/she shall not be permitted register for viva voce examination. Further
such students shall re-appear as and when next year 8th semester supplementary examinations are
conducted.
10. Curricular Framework for Honors Programme
 Students of a Department/ Discipline are eligible to opt for Honors Programme offered by the
same Department/Discipline
 A student shall be permitted to register for Honors program at the beginning of 4 th semester
provided that the student must have acquired a minimum of 8.0 SGPA up to the end of 2 nd
19
semester without any backlogs. In case of the declaration of the 3 rd semester results after the
commencement of the 4th semester and if a student fails to score the required minimum of
8 SGPA, his/her registration for Honors Programme stands cancelled and he/she shall continue
with the regular Programme.
 Students can select the additional and advanced courses from their respective branch in which
they are pursuing the degree and get an honors degree in the same. e.g. If a Mechanical
Engineering student completes the selected advanced courses from same branch under this
scheme, he/ she will be awarded B.Tech (honors) in Mechanical Engineering.
 In addition to fulfilling all the requisites of a Regular B.Tech Programme, a student shall earn 20
additional credits to be eligible for the award of B.Tech (Honors) degree. This is in addition to the
credits essential for obtaining the Under Graduate Degree in Major Discipline (i.e. 160 credits).
 Of the 20 additional Credits to be acquired, 16 credits shall be earned by undergoing specified

courses listed as pools, with four courses, each carrying 4 credits. The remaining 4 credits must
be acquired through two MOOCs, which shall be domain specific each with 2 credits and with a
minimum duration of 8/12 weeks as recommended by the Board of studies.
 It is the responsibility of the student to acquire/complete prerequisite before taking the respective
course. The courses offered in each pool shall be domain specific courses and advanced
courses.
 The concerned BoS shall decide on the minimum enrolments for offering Honors program by the
department. If minimum enrolments criteria are not met then the students shall be permitted to
register for the equivalent MOOC courses as approved by the concerned Head of the department
in consultation with BoS.
 Each pool can have theory as well as laboratory courses. If a course comes with a lab
component, that component has to be cleared separately. The concerned BoS shall explore the
possibility of introducing virtual labs for such courses with lab component. (Model pool list is
enclosed in the end of the syllabus)
 MOOC courses must be of minimum 8 weeks in duration. Attendance will not be monitored for
MOOC Courses. Students have to acquire a certificate from the agencies approved by the BOS
with grading or marks or pass/fail in order to earn 4 credits. If the MOOC course is a pass/fail
course without any grades, the grade to be assigned will be as decided by the Academies
Council.
20
 The concerned BoS shall also consider courses listed under professional electives of the
respective B. Tech Programmes for the requirement of B.Tech (Honors). However, a student
shall be permitted to choose only those courses that he/she has not studied in any form during
the Programme.
 If a student drops or is terminated from the Honors programme, the additional credits so far
earned cannot be converted into free or core electives; they will remain extra. These additional
courses will find mention in the transcript (but not in the degree certificate). In such cases, the
student may choose between the actual grade or a "pass (P)‖ grade and also choose to omit the
mention of the course as for the following: All the courses done under the dropped Minors will be
shown in the transcript. None of the courses done under the dropped Minor will be shown in the
transcript.
 In case student fails to meet the CGPA requirement for Degree with Honors at any point after
registration, he/she will be dropped from the list of students eligible for Degree with honors and
they will receive regular B.Tech degree only, however, such students will receive a separate
grade sheet mentioning the additional courses completed by them.
 Honors must be completed simultaneously with a major degree Programme. A student cannot
earn Honors after he/she has already earned bachelor's degree.
11. Curricular Framework for Minor Programme
 a) Students who are desirous of pursuing their special interest areas other than the choses
discipline of Engineering may opt for additional courses in minor specialization groups offered by a
department other than their parent department. For example, if Mechanical Engineering student
select subjects from Civil Engineering under this scheme, he/she will get Major degree of
Mechanical Engineering with minor degree of Civil Engineering.
b) Student can also opt for Industry relevant tracks of any branch to obtain the Minor Degree, for
example, a B.Tech Mechanical student can opt for the industry relevant tracks like Data Mining
track, IOT track, Machine Learning track etc.
 The BOS concerned shall identify as many tracks as possible in the areas of emerging technologies
and industrial relevance/demand. For example, the minor tracks can be the fundamental courses in
CSE, ECE, EEE, CE, ME etc., or industry tracks such as Artificial Intelligence (AI), Machine
Learning (ML), Data Science (DS), Robotics, Electric Vehicles, and VLSI etc.,
 The list of disciplines / branches eligible to opt for a particular industry relevant minor specialization
shall be clearly mentioned by the respective BoS.
21
 There shall be no limit on the number of programs offered under Minor. The Institute can offer minor
programs in emerging technologies based on expertise in the respective departments or can explore
the possibility of collaborating with the relevant industries/agencies in offering the Programme.
 The concerned BoS shall decide on the minimum enrolments for offering Minor program by the
department. If a minimum enrolments criterion is not met, then the students may be permitted to
register for the equivalent MOOC courses as approved by the concerned Head of the department in
consultation with BoS.
 A student shall be permitted to register for Minors Programme at the beginning of 4th semester
subject to a maximum of two additional courses per semester, provided that the student must have
acquired 8 SGPA up to the end of 2 nd semester without any history of backlogs. It is expected that
the 3rd semester results may be announced after the commencement of the 4 th semester. If a
student fails to acquire 8 SGPA up to 3rd semester or failed in any of the courses, his/her registration
for Minors program shall stand cancelled. An SGPA of 8 has to be maintained in the subsequent
semesters without any backlog in order to keep the Minors registration active.
 A student shall earn additional 20 credits in the specified area to be eligible for the award of B.Tech
degree with Minor. This is in addition to the credits essential for obtaining the Under Graduate
Degree in Major Discipline (i.e. 160 credits).
 Out of the 20 credits, 16 credits shall be earned by undergoing specified course listed by the
concerned BoS along with prerequisites. It is the responsibility of the student to acquire/complete
prerequisite before taking the respective course. If a course comes with a lab component, that
component has to be cleared separately. A student shall be permitted to choose only those courses
that he/she has not studied in any form during the Programme.
 In addition to the 16 credits, students must pursue at least 2 courses through MOOCs. The courses
must be of minimum 8 weeks in duration. Attendance will not be monitored for MOOC courses.
Student has to acquire a certificate from the agencies approved by the BOS with grading or marks
or pass/fail in order to earn 4 credits. If the MOOC course is pass/fail course without any grades, the
grade to be assigned as decided by the Academic Council.
 Student can opt for the Industry relevant minor specialization as approved by the concerned
departmental BoS. Student can opt the courses from Skill Development Corporation (APSSDC) or
can opt the courses from an external agency recommended and approved by concerned BOS and
should produce course completion certificate. The Board of studies of the concerned discipline of
Engineering shall review such courses being offered by eligible external agencies and prepare a
fresh list every year incorporating latest skills based on industrial demand.
22
 A committee should be formed at the level of Institute / Department to evaluate the grades/marks
given by external agencies to a student which are approved by concerned BoS. Upon completion of
courses the departmental committees should convert the obtained grades/marks to the maximum
marks assigned to that course. The controller of examinations can take a decision on such
conversions and may give appropriate grades.
 If a student drops (or terminated) from the Minor Programme, they cannot convert the earned credits
into free or core electives, they will remain extra. These additional courses will find mention in the
transcript (but not in the degree certificate). In such cases, the student may choose between the
actual grade or a "pass (P)" grade and also choose to omit the mention of the course as for the
following:
o All the courses done under the dropped Minors will be shown in the transcript. None of the
courses done under the dropped Miner will be shown in the transcript.
 In case a student fails to meet the CGPA requirement for B.Tech degree with Minor at any point
after registration, he/ she will be dropped from the list of students eligible for degree with Minors and
they will receive B.Tech degree only. However, such students will receive a separate grade sheet
mentioning the additional courses completed by them.
 Minor must be completed simultaneously with a major degree Programme. A student cannot earn
the Minor after he/she has already earned bachelor's degree.
12. Attendance Requirements and Detention Policy
 A student shall maintain a minimum required attendance of 40 % in each subject and 75 % in
AGGREGATE of all the subjects in a semester.
 Shortage of attendance up to 10 % i.e., attendance between 65 % to 75 % in aggregate, may be
condoned by the Institute Academic Committee based on the rules prescribed by the Academic Council
of the Institute from time to time.
 A stipulated fee shall be payable towards condonation of shortage of attendance.
 Shortage of attendance below 65 % shall in no case be condoned. A stipulated fee shall be payable
towards condonation of shortage of attendance to the Institute as per following slab system
1stSlab: Less than 75 % attendance but equal to or greater than 70 % a normal condonation fee can
be collected from the student.
2ndSlab: Less than 70 % but equal to or greater than 65 %, double the condonation fee can be
collected from the student.
 Students whose shortage of attendance is not condoned OR who have not paid the stipulated fee OR
who have not cleared any other due to the Institute in any semester are not eligible to write the
Semester End Examination (SEE).
23
 Students, who do not meet the minimum required attendance of 65% in a semester, shall be detained in
that semester and their registration for that semester shall stand cancelled. They shall not be promoted
to the next semester.
 Students detained in a semester shall seek re-admission into that semester as and when offered.
 Academic regulations applicable to the semester in which re-admission is sought shall be applicable to
the re-admitted student.
 In case, there are any professional electives and /or open electives, the same may also be re-
registered, if offered. However, if those electives are not offered in the later semesters, then alternate
electives may be chosen from the same set of elective courses offered under that category.
Any student against whom any disciplinary action is pending shall not be permitted to attend semester
end examination (SEE) in that semester.
13. Minimum Academic Requirements and Award of the Degree
The following Academic Requirements have to be satisfied in addition to the attendance requirements
mentioned in section 10.
13.1 A student shall be deemed to have satisfied the minimum academic requirements and earned the
credits allotted to each theory and lab courses, and project if he secures not less than 35% of marks in the
end examination and a minimum of 40% of marks in the total of the internal and end examination marks
taken together. In case of mandatory courses, he/she shall secure 40% of the total marks.
13.2 A student admitted in 4 year B. Tech programme, shall be promoted from 4th to 5th Semester only if
he/she fulfills the academic requirements of securing a minimum of 50% credits from I year I and II-
Semesters, II year I and II-Semesters examinations conducted till that time. A student admitted in 3 year B.
Tech programme, shall be promoted from 4th to 5th Semester only if he/she fulfills the academic
requirements of securing a minimum of 50% credits from II year I and II-Semesters examinations conducted
till that time.
13.3. A student admitted in 4 year B. Tech programme, shall be promoted from 6th to 7th Semester only if
he/she fulfills the academic requirements of securing a minimum of 50% credits from I year I & II-Semesters,
II year I & II-Semesters and III year I & II-Semesters examinations conducted till that time.
A student admitted in 3 year B. Tech programme, shall be promoted from 6th to 7th Semester only if he/she
fulfills the academic requirements of securing a minimum of 50% credits from II year I & II-Semesters and III
year I & II-Semesters examinations conducted till that time. And in case a student is detained for want of
credits for particular academic year by sections 11.2 and 11.3 above, the student may make up the credits
through supplementary examinations and only after securing the required credits he/she shall be permitted
to join in the 5th semester or 7th semester as the case may be.
24
13.4 A student shall register and put up minimum academic requirement of all 160 credits and earn all 160
credits for the award of B. Tech degree
13.5 Students who fail to earn 160 credits as indicated in the course structure within eight academic years
from the year of their admission shall forfeit their seat in B.Tech. course and their admission shall stand
cancelled.
14. Semester Grade Point Average (SGPA) and Cumulative Grade Point Average (CGPA):
The performances of students in each of the courses in the Programme are expressed in terms of letter
grades based on an absolute grading system. We use 10-point grading system with letter grades. They are
given in the following table.
Grade Points
Marks Obtained Letter Grade Description
(GP)
≥90 A+ Outstanding 10
≥80 and ≤89.99 A Excellent 9
≥70 and ≤79.99 B Very Good 8
≥60 and ≤69.99 C Good 7
≥50 and ≤59.99 D Average 6
≥40 and ≤49.99 E Pass 5
<40 F Fail --
Absent in the exam(s) Ab Absent --
A student is eligible for the award of the B.Tech. Degree with the class as mentioned in the following table
CGPA Class
≥7.5 First class with Distinction
≥6.5 and <7.5 First Class
≥5.5 and <6.5 Second Class
≥5.0 and <5.5 Pass
For mandatory courses, student shall be awarded ―pass‖ or ―fail ―without any credit. This shall not be
counted for the computation of SGPA/CGPA
14.1 Computation of SGPA
The performance of each student at the end of each semester shall be indicated in terms of SGPA. The
SGPA shall be calculated as follows:
∑
∑
25
Where
= Number of credits allotted to a particular curse ‗i‘

= Grade point corresponding to the letter grade awarded to the course i
,2,….p represent the number of courses in a particular semester.
Note: SGPA is calculated and awarded to those students who pass all the courses in a semester.
14.2 Computation of CGPA
The performance of a student shall be obtained by calculating Cumulative Grade Point Average (CGPA),
which is weighted average of the grade points obtained on all courses during the course of study
∑
∑
Where
= Number of credits allotted to a particular semester ‘j’
= Grade point corresponding to the letter grade awarded to the semester j
,2,….m represent the number of semester of the entire programme.
14.3 Grade Card

The grade card issued shall contain the following
 The credits for each course offered in that semester
 The letter grade and grade point awarded in each course
 The SGPA and CGPA
 Total number of credits earned by the student up to the end of that semester
Example: - Computation /calculation of SGPA
Credits Grade point Credit point
Course name Letter grade
(C) (GP) (CP=C*GP)
Course 1 4 A 9 4x9=36
Course 2 3 A+ 10 3*10=30
Course 3 2.5 A+ 10 2.5*10=25
Course 4 1.5 C 6 1.5*6=9
Course 5 1 D 5 1*5=5
Total 12 105
Therefore, SGPA= 8.75

26
Example Illustration of CGPA

Semester 1 Semester 2 Semester 3 Semester 4 Semester 5
Credit: 20 Credit : 20 Credit : 22 Credit: 23 Credit : 22
SGPA : 8.75 SGPA : 8.25 SGPA : 7.89 SGPA : 8.21 SGPA : 7.86
Thus, CGPA =
Similarly, compute CGPA obtained at the end of 8th semester shall be the final CGPA secured by the
student for the entire programme.
14.4 Conversion of SGPA into percentage
In case of a specific query by students/employers regarding Semester Grade Point Average (SGPA)/
Cumulative Grade Point Average (CGPA) into percentage, the following formulae will be adopted for notional
conversion of CGPA into percentage.
Percentage = (CGPA - 0.50) * 10
14. Transcripts
After successful completion of the entire programme of study, a transcript containing performance of all
academic years will be issued as a final record. Duplicate transcripts will also be issued, if required, after
payment of requisite fee. Partial transcript will also be issued up to any point of study to a student on
request.
16. Transitory Regulations
Discontinued, detained, or failed candidates are eligible for readmission as and when the semester is offered
after fulfilment of academic regulations. Candidates who have been detained for want of attendance or not
fulfilled academic requirements or who have failed after having undergone the course in earlier regulations
or have discontinued and wish to continue the course are eligible for admission into the unfinished semester
from the date of commencement of class work with the same or equivalent subjects as and when subjects
are offered, subject to Section 2 and they will follow the academic regulations into which they are readmitted.
Candidates who are permitted to avail gap year shall be eligible for re-joining into the succeeding year of
their B. Tech from the date of commencement of class work, subject to Section 2 and they will follow the
academic regulations into which they are readmitted.
17. Readmission of Students
A student who has satisfied the minimum attendance requirement in any semester may repeat that
semester, after obtaining written permission from the Principal and cancelling the previous record of
attendance and academic performance (viz; internal evaluation and external evaluation marks) of the
semester or year. This facility may be availed by any student at the maximum twice for a 4 year B. Tech, and
only once by Lateral Entry student & PG student during the entire course of study.
27
18. Minimum Instruction Days for a Semester

The minimum instruction days including exams for each semester shall be 16 weeks.
19. Student transfers
Student transfers shall be as per the guidelines issued by the Government of Andhra Pradesh and the
affiliating University from time to time.
20. Announcement of results
 Results review committee comprising of University nominee, Principal, Dean Academics, Chairmen of
various boards of studies, Controller of Examinations and Deputy Controller of Examinations will monitor
the results and gives the permission for announcement of results.
 After review meeting results are loaded in to Institution website from which students can access their
results by entering Hall Ticket number. And also results in form of hard copy are available with
respective Heads of the departments.
21. General Instructions:
 The academic regulations should be read as a whole for purpose of any interpretation.
 Malpractices rules-nature and punishments are appended.
 Where the words "he", "him", "his", occur in the regulations, they also include "she", "her", "hers",
respectively.
 In the case of any doubt or ambiguity in the interpretation of the above rules, the decision of the
Principal/ Governing body is final.
 Any legal issues are to be resolved in Rajampet Jurisdiction.
 The Institute may change or amend the academic regulations or syllabi at any time and the changes or
amendments shall be made applicable to all the students on rolls with effect from the dates notified by
the Institute.
28
Appendix-I: Internship Guidelines

The Head of the Department will arrange internship for students in industries/organization after fifth semester or as per
AICTE/ affiliating University guidelines. Institutions may also device online system for arranging &managing
internships. The general procedure for arranging internship is given below:
Step 1: Request Letter/ Email from the office of HOD of the department should go to industry to allot various slots of 4-
6 weeks during summer vacation as internship periods for the students. Students request letter/profile/
interest areas may be submitted to industries for their willingness for providing the training.
Step 2: Industry will confirm the training slots and the number of seats allocated for internships via Confirmation Letter/
Email. In case the students arrange the training themselves the confirmation letter will be submitted by the
students in the office of Training & Placement through concerned department. Based on the number of slots
agreed to by the Industry.
Step 3: Students on joining Training at the concerned Industry / Organization, submit the Joining Report/ Letters /
Email.
Step 4: Students undergo industrial training at the concerned Industry / Organization. In-between Faculty Member(s)
evaluate(s) the performance of students once/twice by visiting the Industry/Organization and Evaluation
Report of the students is submitted in department office/TPO with the consent of Industry persons/ Trainers.
Step 5: Students will submit training report after completion of internship.
Step 6: Training Certificate to be obtained from industry.

Step 7: List of students who have completed their internship successfully will be issued by concerned Department.
For more details refer:
https://www.aicte-india.org/sites/default/files/AICTE%20Internship%20Policy.pdf
29
Appendix II: Norms and Procedures for Challenge Evaluation/Revaluation/Recounting

Revaluation / Recounting:
 The students who wishes to apply for Revaluation/Recounting of his/her answer-books(s) must
submit his/her application on the prescribed from together with the requisite fee to the Controller of
Examinations before expiry of 15 days excluding the date of the declaration of his/her examination
result. Application not received in the prescribed form or by the due date or without the requisite fee
shall be rejected.
 After Recounting / Revaluation, records are updated with changes if any and the student will be
issued a revised memorandum of marks. If there are no changes, the student shall be intimated the
same through a notice.
 No Revaluation / Recounting for Laboratory Examination.
 The students are informed to be more careful in furnishing the information while applying for
Recounting / Revaluation. The applications with insufficient information will be summarily rejected
and the student has to forfeit the amount paid in this connection.
Challenge valuation:
 Applications are invited from the students, who wish to apply for Challenge Valuation in the subjects
of the B.Tech Regular and Supplementary examinations
 The student will apply for Challenge valuation in a specified application and should be routed
through the HOD concerned.
 The students who have applied for the revaluation for a paper(s) of an examination are only eligible
for the Challenge Valuation of that paper(s) of that examination.
 A Fee of Rs. 10000/- (Ten Thousand Rupees Only) for each paper is to be paid within the last date
for challenge valuation.
 A Xerox copy of the answer script will be provided to the student on receipt of the payment of fee
and date and time of the valuation will be informed to the student, so that valuation will be done in
the presence of the teacher attended in support of the student nominated by the HOD concerned.
 The HOD concerned will nominate a teacher of the concerned subject to observe the valuation in
support of the student. This will be done on the request of the student.
 If the marks obtained in the challenge valuation are more than or equal to 15% of the maximum
marks with respect to the original marks obtained in the first valuation, then the marks obtained in
the Challenge valuation will be awarded to the student and the institute will pay back Rs 9,000 (Nine
thousands rupees only) to the student. If the student status changes from fail to pass, an amount of
Rs. 5000 will be refunded to the student. Otherwise there will not be any change in the result of the
student and original marks will be retained and the student will forfeit the fee paid.
 No Challenge valuation for Laboratory Examination
30
APPENDIX III: Rules for Disciplinary Action for Malpractices / Improper Conduct in Examinations
Malpractices identified by squad or special invigilators or invigilators
Punishments shall be given to the students as per the above guidelines. The case is to be referred to the
malpractice committee.
Malpractice committee
1. The Principal, Chairman
2. Dean, Academics, Member
3. Invigilator, Member
4. Subject expert, Member
5. Concerned Head of the Department, Member
6. Controller of Examinations, Member Secretary
Note:
Whenever the performance of a student is cancelled in any subject/subjects due to Malpractice, he
has to register for End Examinations in that subject/subjects consequently and has to fill all the
norms required for the award of Degree.
Nature of Malpractices/Improper conduct Punishment
If the candidate:
Possesses or keeps accessible in examination hall,
any paper, note book, programmable calculators,
Cell phones, pager, palm computers or any other
form of material concerned with or related to the
Expulsion from the examination hall and cancellation of the
1.(a) subject of the examination (theory or practical) in
performance in that subject only.
which he is appearing but has not made use of
(material shall include any marks on the body of the
candidate which can be used as an aid in the
subject of the examination)
Gives assistance or guidance or receives it from
Expulsion from the examination hall and cancellation of
any other candidate orally or by any other body
performance in that subject only of all the candidates
(b) language methods or communicates through cell
involved. In case of an outsider, he will be handed over to the
phones with any candidate or persons in or outside
police and a case is registered against him.
the exam hall in respect of any matter.
performance in that subject and all other subjects the
Has copied in the examination hall from any paper,
candidate has already appeared including practical
book, programmable calculators, palm computers
examinations and project work and shall not be permitted to
2. or any other form of material relevant to the subject
appear for the remaining examinations of the subjects of that
of the examination (theory or practical) in which the
semester/year. The Hall Ticket of the candidate is to be
candidate is appearing
cancelled and sent
to the University.
The candidate who has impersonated shall be expelled from
examination hall. The candidate is also debarred for four
consecutive semesters from class work and all University
examinations. The continuation of the course by the
candidate is subject to the academic regulations in
Impersonates any other candidate in connection connection with forfeiture of seat. The performance of the
7.
with the examination. original candidate who has been impersonated, shall be
cancelled in all the subjects of the examination (including
practical‘s and project work) already appeared and shall not
be allowed to appear for examinations of the remaining
subjects of that semester/year. The candidate is also
debarred for four consecutive semesters from class work and
31
all University examinations, if his involvement is established.
Otherwise, the candidate is debarred for two consecutive
semesters from class work and all University examinations.
The continuation of the course by the candidate is subject to
the academic regulations in connection with forfeiture of seat.
If the imposter is an outsider, he will be handed over to the
police and a case is registered against him.
performance in that subject and all the other subjects the
Smuggles in the Answer book or additional sheet or examinations and project work and shall not be permitted for
takes out or arranges to send out the question the remaining examinations of the subjects of that
4.
paper during the examination or answer book or semester/year. The candidate is also debarred for two
additional sheet, during or after the examination. consecutive semesters from class work and all University
connection with forfeiture of seat.
Uses objectionable, abusive or offensive language
in the answer paper or in letters to the examiners or
5. Cancellation of the performance in that subject only.
writes to the examiner requesting him to award
pass marks.
Refuses to obey the orders of the Chief
Superintendent/Assistant — Superintendent / any
officer on duty or misbehaves or creates
disturbance of any kind in and around the
examination hall or organizes a walk out or
instigates others to walk out, or threatens the In case of student of the college, they shall be expelled from
officer-in charge or any person on duty in or outside examination halls and cancellation of their performance in
the examination hall of any injury to his person or to that subject and all other subjects the candidate(s) has
any of his relations whether by words, either (have) already appeared and shall not be permitted to appear
spoken or written or by signs or by visible for the remaining examinations of the subjects of that
6.
representation, assaults the officer-in-charge, or semester/year. If the candidate physically assaults the
any person on duty in or outside the examination invigilator/officer-in-charge of the Examinations, then the
hall or any of his relations, or indulges in any other candidate is also debarred and forfeits his/her seat. In case
act of misconduct or mischief which result in of outsiders, they will be handed over to the police and a
damage to or destruction of property in the police case is registered against them.
examination hall or any part of the College campus
or engages in any other act which in the opinion of
the officer on duty amounts to use of unfair means
or misconduct or has the tendency to disrupt the
orderly conduct of the examination.
performance in that subject and all the other subjects the
examinations and project work and shall not be permitted for
Leaves the exam hall taking away answer script or
the remaining examinations of the subjects of that
7. intentionally tears of the script or any part thereof
semester/year. The candidate is also debarred for two
inside or outside the examination hall.
consecutive semesters from class work and all University
connection with forfeiture of seat.
10. Possess any lethal weapon or firearm in the Expulsion from the examination hall and cancellation of the
32
examination hall. performance in that subject and all other subjects the
examinations and project work and shall not be permitted for
semester/year. The candidate is also debarred and forfeits
the seat.
Student of the colleges expulsion from the examination hall
and cancellation of the performance in that subject and all
If students of the college, who is not a candidate for other subjects the candidate has already appeared including
the particular examination or any person not practical examinations and project work and shall not be
9. connected with the college indulges in nay permitted for the remaining examinations of the subjects of
malpractice or improper conduct mentioned in class that semester/year. The candidate is also debarred and
6 to 8. forfeits the seat. Person (s) who does not belong to the
College will be handed over to police and, a police case will
be registered against them.
performance in that subject and all other subjects the
Comes in a drunken condition to the examination candidate has already appeared including practical
11.
hall. examinations and project work and shall not be permitted for
semester/year.
Cancellation of the performance in that subject only or in that
subject and all other subjects the candidate has appeared
Copying detected on the basis of internal evidence,
12. including practical examinations and project work of that
such as, during valuation or during special scrutiny.
semester / year examinations, depending on the
recommendation of the committee.
If any malpractice is detected which is not covered in the above clauses 1 to 12 shall be reported to the University
13.
for further action to award suitable punishment.
33
Activities (Non-Credit) as per AICTE Guidelines

List of Activities
1. Physical and Health
1.1 Physical Activities: (a) Games and Sports, (b) Gardening (c) Tree Plantation (d) Yoga:
1.2 NCC/NSS: Standard procedure
2. Culture
2.1 Learning an art form: music, dance, theatre, painting, and other art forms
2.2 Heritage: Visit to museum, archaeology sites, cultural walks, tours, local traditions
2.3 Intangible Cultural Heritage: Festivals, Food ways, Local Games
3. Literature & Media
3.1 Literature, Cinema and Media: workshop, reading multiple news sources, analyse ads
3.2 Group reading: Group sits and each person reads aloud (if possible, with proper modulation) taking turns.
This if done properly for an hour one may complete 30-40 pages in an hour
4. Social Service
4.1 Social Awareness: Artisans-relates to engg., visit to hospitals, orphanages, police station, courts, trauma
centres, consumer forums
4.2 Social Service: teach in neighbourhood, adopt an underprivileged school, village stay / visit (NSS),
cleanliness drive, and skill transfer
5. Self-Development
5.1 Spiritual, Mindfulness & Meditation
5.2 Religion and Inter-faith: Reading of books on religious texts of different faiths by famous authors,
organizing lecture on interfaith issues covering philosophies and chronology and contemporary situations
world over at a given time
5.3 Human Values
5.4 Behavioural and Interpersonal skills: Motivational lectures, Group Discussions/activities, Case Study,
Games/Stimulation Exercises, Role-Playing, Mindfulness training.
5.5 Lectures: Areas could be from science, engineering, social sciences, arts or even politics.
6. Nature
6.1 Nature Club: bird watching, recognizing plants at institute/at home, recognizing local animals, appreciating
biodiversity
6.2 Environment Protection (non-credit course)
7. Innovation
7.1 Project based – Sc. Tech., Social, Design & Innovation: (a) Exposure to social problems (which are
amenable to technological solutions) (b) Design & Innovation (to address above problems)
First 3-weeks – Induction Program will have Physical activities (*), Learning an art form (*), Literature & Cinema,
Social Awareness (*) Lectures, Visits to local areas, Universal Human Values (*)
(*) It is the core part of Induction Program (Besides Familiarization to the College, Department and Branch career
opportunities)
After first 3 weeks (1st semester)
Based on student interest – the above may be continued
Universal Human Values Groups – Meet once a week with 1st year students with the same faculty mentor & senior
student guide.
Semester 2 to 4
Every student should register for some activity mentioned above in every semester. Spend 3-5 hours per week on the
activity.
1. Environment Science (mandatory non-credit course prescribed at 1/2 semester)
2. Life Sciences for Engineers (mandatory non-credit course prescribed at 3/4 semester)
3. Constitution of India (mandatory non-credit course prescribed at 5/6 semester)
4. Essence of Indian Traditional Knowledge (mandatory non-credit course prescribed at 5/6 semester)
For mandatory non-credit courses, these will be graded as Pass or Fail (P/F). Thus, the grades obtained will not affect
the grade point average. However, they will appear on the grade sheet.
Semester 5 to 8
Every student should register for some activity mentioned above in every semester. Spend 3-5 hours per week on the
activity. For activities, suitable registration system in case of the semesters will be developed.
34
STUDENT INDUCTION PROGRAMME (Zero Semester)
Induction programme for newly admitted students is conducted in line with AICTE/UGC Induction
programme policy, every year before the commencement of the first semester classes. The objective of the
Induction programme is to demystify what is expected of students in Intermediate level and to provide
adequate foundation in the core applied science subjects and English limited to moderate level so that
students do not face any difficulty when the classes commence.
The syllabus for the course is framed in such a way that equal importance is given to both Engineering
discipline and personality development which includes soft skills, sports and cultural Activities. The duration
of the induction programme is THREE weeks. The students are trained in Foundation courses, basics of
programming and English apart from other co-curricular and extra-curricular activities.
The objective of the Induction Programme is to work closely with the newly joined students in order to
facilitate the following:
 Make the students feel comfortable in the new environment
 Allow them to explore their academic interests and activities
 Reduce competition and make them work for excellence
 Promote bonding within them
 Build relations between teachers and students
 Give a broader view of life
 Build character
Course
Phase Name of the course Lecture Practical
Code
Regular Phase 20A501 Proficiency classes: Familiarity with a computer 2 2
Regular Phase 20AC01 Proficiency classes: English Communication Skills 2 2
Regular Phase 20A502 Basics of Programming and Lab 3 2
Regular Phase 20AC02 Foundation classes in Mathematics 3 0
Regular Phase 20AC03 Foundation classes in Physics 3 2
Regular Phase 20AC04 Foundation classes in Chemistry 3 2
Regular Phase 20AC05 Universal Human Values I 2 0
Regular Phase 20A301 Fundamentals of Engineering Drawing 1 0
Regular Phase - Physical education activities – Sports and Games 0 1
Non daily - Creative Arts
Non daily - Lectures by eminent personalities
Non daily - Visits to local area
Non daily - Extra-curricular activities
35
Department of Mechanical Engineering
COURSE STRUCTURE FOR B.TECH MECHANICAL ENGINEERING R20 REGULATIONS
Semester I (First year)

Sl. Course Hours per week Credits
Category Course Title
No. Code L T P C
1 BSC 20AC11T Algebra and Calculus 3 0 0 3
2 BSC 20AC14T Engineering Chemistry 3 0 0 3
3 HSM C 20AC15T Communicative English 3 0 0 3
4 ESC 20A311T Engineering Graphics 1 0 4 3
5 ESC 20A511T Problem solving through C Programming 3 0 0 3
6 BSC 20AC14L Engineering Chemistry Lab 0 0 3 1.5
7 HSM C 20AC15L Communicative English Lab 0 0 3 1.5
8 ESC 20A511L Problem solving through C Programming Lab 0 0 3 1.5
9 MC 20AC16T Environmental Science 3 0 0 0
Total credits 19.5
Category Credits
Basic Science courses 7.5
Engineering science courses 7.5
Humanities and social science 4.5
Total Credits 19.5
Semester II (First year)

No. Code L T P C
1 BSC 20AC21T Differential Equations and Vector Calculus 3 0 0 3
2 BSC 20AC24T Engineering Physics 3 0 0 3
3 ESC 20A321T Engineering M aterials 3 0 0 3
4 ESC 20A322T Engineering Graphics & Design 1 0 4 3
5 ESC 20A323T Engineering M echanics 3 0 0 3
6 BSC 20AC24L Engineering Physics Lab 0 0 3 1.5
7 ESC 20A321L Engineering M aterials Lab 0 0 3 1.5
8 ESC 20A326L Engineering & IT Workshop 0 0 3 1.5
Total credits 19.5
Category Credits
Basic Science courses 7.5
Engineering science courses 12
Total Credits 19.5
36
Semester III (Second year)

No. Code L T P C
Partial Differential Equations and Numerical
1 BSC 20AC31T 3 0 0 3
M ethods
2 ESC 20A235T Basic Electrical and Electronics Engineering 3 0 0 3
3 PCC 20A331T M echanics of Solids 3 0 0 3
4 PCC 20A332T M anufacturing Processes 3 0 0 3
5 PCC 20A333T Basic Thermodynamics 3 0 0 3
6 ESC 20A235L Basic Electrical and Electronics Engineering lab 0 0 3 1.5
7 PCC 20A331L M echanics of Solids Lab 0 0 3 1.5
8 PCC 20A332L M anufacturing Processes Lab 0 0 3 1.5
9 SC 20A334L Auto CAD 1 0 2 2
Total credits 21.5
Category Credits
Basic Science courses 3
Engineering science courses 4.5
Professional core Courses 12
Skill oriented course 2
Total Credits 21.5
Semester IV (Second year)

No. Code L T P C
1 BSC 20AC41T Probability and Statistics 3 0 0 3
2 PCC 20A341T Theory of M achines 3 0 0 3
3 PCC 20A342T Fluid M echanics and Hydraulic M achines 3 0 0 3
4 PCC 20A343T Design of M achine Elements-I 3 0 0 3
5 HSM C 20AC45T M anagerial Economics & Financial Analysis 3 0 0 3
6 PCC 20A341L Theory of M achines Lab 0 0 3 1.5
7 PCC 20A342L Fluid M echanics and Hydraulic M achines Lab 0 0 3 1.5
8 PCC 20A344L M achine Drawing lab 0 0 3 1.5
9 MC 20AC44T Life Sciences for Engineers 3 0 0 0
10 SC 20A545L Python Programming 1 0 2 2
Total credits 21.5
Internship 2 M onths (M andatory) during summer vacation
Category Credits
Basic Science Courses 3
Professional core Courses 13.5
Humanities and social science including M anagement courses 3
Skill oriented course 2
Total Credits 21.5
37
Semester V (Third year)

No. Code L T P C
1 PCC 20A351T
Applied Thermodynamics 3 0 0 3
2 PCC 20A352T
M achining Processes 3 0 0 3
3 PCC 20A353T
Design of M achine Elements-II 3 0 0 3
20A15ET
Water Resources and Harvesting
20A15FT
Disaster M anagement
20A25ET
Energy Auditing Conservation and M anagement
20A25FT
Electric Vehicles
20A45ET
Electronic Circuits & its Applications
20A45FT
Introduction to Communication Systems
20A55FT
Data Structures Using Python
4 OEC 20A55GT
Database M anagement System 3 0 0 3
Foundations of Artificial Intelligence and Data
20A305GT
Science
20A305HT M achine Learning
20AC5AT Literature and Life
20AC5BT Linear Algebra and Numerical Analysis
20AE5AT Human Resource M anagement
20AE5BT Intellectual Property Rights
20A35AT IC Engines
20A35BT Design of Transmission System
5 PEC 3 0 0 3
20A35CT Industrial M anagement
20A35DT Optimization Techniques
6 PCC 20A351L Thermal Engineering Lab 0 0 3 1.5
7 PCC 20A352L M achine Tools Lab 0 0 3 1.5
8 SC 20AC51L Professional Communication 1 0 2 2
9 MC 20AC52T Constitution of India 3 0 0 0
Summer Internship 2 M onths (M andatory) after
10 INTERN 20A354I 0 0 0 1.5
second year (to be evaluated during V semester)
Total credits 21.5
Category Credits
Professional core Courses 12
Professional Elective courses 3
Open Elective Course/Job oriented elective 3
Skill advanced course/ soft skill course 2
Summer Internship 1.5
Total Credits 21.5
38
Semester VI (Third year)

No. Code L T P C
1 PCC 20A361T Heat Transfer 3 0 0 3
2 PCC 20A362T M etrology & M easurements 3 0 0 3
3 PCC 20A363T CAD/CAM 3 0 0 3
20A36AT Automobile Engineering
20A36BT Design for M anufacturing
4 PEC 3 0 0 3
20A36CT Non-Destructive Testing
20A36DT Automation & Robotics
5 OEC 20A36ET MOOCs 3 0 0 3
6 PCC 20A361L Heat Transfer Lab 0 0 3 1.5
7 PCC 20A362L M etrology & M easurements Lab 0 0 3 1.5
8 PCC 20A363L CAD/CAM Lab 0 0 3 1.5
9 SC 20A564L Java Programming 1 0 2 2
10 MC 20AC63T Essence of Indian Traditional Knowledge 3 0 0 0
Total credits 21.5
Industrial/Research Internship (M andatory) 2 M onths during summer vacation
Category Credits
Professional core courses 13.5
M andatory course 0
Industrial/Research Internship (M andatory) 2 M onths -
Total Credits 21.5
39
Semester VII (Fourth year)

No. Code L T P C
20A37AT Operations Research
20A37BT Turbo M achinery
1 PEC 3 0 0 3
20A37CT Tribology
20A37DT Supply Chain M anagement
20A37ET Non-Conventional Sources of Energy
20A37FT Finite Element M ethods
2 PEC 3 0 0 3
20A37GT M odern M achining Processes
20A37HT M echatronics
20A37IT Power Plant Engineering
20A37JT M echanical Vibrations
3 PEC 3 0 0 3
20A37KT Production and Operations M anagement
20A37LT CNC and Adaptive Control
20A37M T Additive M anufacturing
20A37NT Entrepreneurship Development
4 OEC 3 0 0 3
20A37OT Total Quality M anagement
20A37PT Product Design and Development
5 OEC 20A37QT MOOCs (Interdisciplinary) 3 0 0 3
6 HSM C 20AC71T Universal Human Values II 3 0 0 3
7 SC 20A371L Refrigeration and Air Conditioning 1 0 2 2
Industrial/Research Internship 2 M onths
8 INTERN 20A372I (M andatory) after third year (to be evaluated 0 0 0 3
during VII semester
Total credits 23
Industrial/Research Internship (M andatory) 2 M onths during summer vacation
Category Credits
Humanities and Social Sciences 3
Industrial/Research Internship 3
Total Credits 23
Semester VIII (Fourth year)

No. Code L T P C
1 PROJ 20A381P Project work, seminar and internship in industry 0 0 0 12
Internship (6 months)
Total credits 12
40
Semester I (First year) - Service Subjects by ME

No. Code L T P C
1 ESC 20A312T Engineering Drawing (for CE, EEE & ECE) 1 0 4 3
2 ESC 20A313L Engineering & IT Workshop (for EEE) 0 0 3 1.5
3 ESC 20A314L Engineering Workshop (for CSE & AIDS) 0 0 3 1.5
Semester II (First year) - Service Subjects by ME

Sl. Category Course Course Title Hours per week Credits
No. Code L T P C
1 ESC 20A323T Engineering M echanics (for CE) 3 0 0 3
2 ESC 20A324T Engineering Drawing (for CSE & AIDS) 2 0 2 3
3 ESC 20A325T Basic M echanical Engineering (for CE) 3 0 0 3
4 ESC 20A326L Engineering & IT Workshop (for CE, M E & ECE) 0 0 3 1.5
Semester V (Third year) - OEC offered to CE, EEE & ECE by ME

No. Code L T P C
1 20A35ET Non-Conventional Sources of Energy
OEC 3 0 0 3
2 20A35FT Industrial M anagement & Entrepreneurship
Semester VII (Fourth year) - OEC offered to CSE & AIDS by ME

No. Category Code Course Title
L T P C
1 20A37RT Optimization in Engineering
OEC 3 0 0 3
2 20A37ST Industrial M anagement & Entrepreneurship
41
Department of Humanities and Sciences
Title of the Course Algebra and Calculus

Category BSC
Course Code 20AC11T
Year I B. Tech.
Semester I Semester
Branch CE, EEE, M E, ECE, CSE & AI&DS
Lecture Hours Tutorial Hours Practice Hours Credits

3 0 0 3
Course Objectives:
 This course will illuminate the students in the concepts of calculus and linear algebra
 To equip the students with standard concepts and tools at an intermediate to advanced level mathematics to
develop the confidence and ability among the students to handle various real world problems and their
applications
Unit 1 Matrices 10
Rank of a matrix by echelon form, Normal form, Solving system of homogeneous and non-homogeneous linear
equations, Eigen values and Eigen vectors and their properties.
Learning Outcomes: At the end of the unit, the student will be able to:
 Find the rank, Eigenvalues and Eigenvectors of a matrix (L1)
 Solve systems of linear equations(L3)
Unit 2 Quadratic forms of matrices 8

Cayley-Hamilton theorem (without proof), Finding inverse and power of a matrix by Cayley-Hamilton theorem,
Diagonalization of a matrix, Quadratic forms and nature of the quadratic forms, Reduction of quadratic form to
canonical form by orthogonal transformation.
 Apply Cayley-Hamilton theorem to find inverse and power of a matrix (L3)
 Identify special properties of a matrix, such as positive definite, etc., and use this information to
facilitate the calculation of matrix characteristics(L3)
Unit 3 Mean Value Theorems & Multivariable calculus 10

Taylor‘s theorem and M aclaurin's theorem (without proofs) – Simple problems.
Partial derivatives, total derivatives, chain rule, change of variables, Jacobian, maxima and minima of functions of
two variables, method of Lagrange multipliers for three variables.
 Translate the given function as series of Taylor‘s and M aclaurin‘s(L2)
 Find partial derivatives numerically and symbolically and use them to analyze and interpret the way a
function varies, and utilize Jacobian of a coordinate transformation to deal with the problems in change of
variables (L3)
 Acquire the Knowledge of maxima and minima of functions of several variables (L1)
Unit 4 Multiple Integrals 8

Double integrals, change of order of integration, change of variables (Cartesian to polar), areas enclosed by plane
curves, evaluation of triple integrals.
 Extend the definite integral to double and triple integrals in cartesian and polar coordinates(L2)
 Apply double integration techniques in evaluating areas bounded by region(L3)
42
Unit 5 Special Functions 8
Beta and Gamma functions and their properties, relation between beta and gamma functions, evaluation of
definite integrals using beta and gamma functions.
 Understand the properties of beta and gamma functions and its relations(L2)
 Utilize the special functions in evaluating definite integrals(L3)
Prescribed Textbooks:
1. B. S. Grewal, Higher Engineering M athematics, 44/e, Khanna Publishers, 2017.
2. Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering M athematics, 10/e, John Wiley & Sons,2011.
Reference Books:
1. B. V. Ramana, Higher Engineering M athematics, Mc Graw Hill Education.
2. George B. Thomas, M aurice D. Weir and Joel Hass, Thomas Calculus, 13/e, Pearson
Publishers,2013.
3. R.L. Garg Nishu Gupta, Engineering M athematics Volumes-I &II, Pearson Education
4. H. K. Das, Er. Rajnish Verma, Higher Engineering M athematics, S. Chand.
Course Outcomes:
At the end of the course, the student will be able to Blooms Level of Learning
1. Apply the knowledge to solve System of linear equations. L3
2. Develop the use of matrix algebra techniques that is needed by
L3
engineers for practical applications
3. Classify the functions of several variables which is useful in optimization L4
4. Solve important tools of calculus in higher dimensions and be familiar with 2-
dimensional, 3- dimensional coordinate systems L3
5. Understand the properties of beta and gamma functions and its relations L2
CO-PO Mapping:
PO10
PO11
PO12
PSO1
PSO2
PSO3
PO1
PO2
PO3
PO4
PO5
PO6
PO7
PO8
PO9
CO
20AC11T.1 3 3 - - - - - - - - - 3 - - -
20AC11T.2 3 2 - - - - - - - - - 3 - - -
20AC11T.3 3 3 - - - - - - - - - 2 - - -
20AC11T.4 3 3 - - - - - - - - - 2 - - -
20AC11T.5 3 3 - - - - - - - - - 2 - - -
43
Title of the Course Engineering Chemistry

Category BSC
Course Code 20AC14T
Year I Year
Semester I Semester
Branch CE & ME

3 0 0 3
Course Objectives:
 To acquaint the students with soft and hard water types and softening methods.
 To introduce the basic concepts of electrochemical cells
 To impart knowledge on corrosion and its significance.
 To familiarize the students with engineering materials, their properties and applications
Unit 1 Water Technology 9

Introduction –Hard and Soft water, Estimation of hardness by EDTA M ethod -Boiler troubles -scale and sludge, priming
and foaming, specifications for drinking water, Bureau of Indian Standards(BIS) and World health organization(WHO)
standards, Industrial water treatment – zeolite and ion-exchange processes, desalination of brackish water, reverse
osmosis (RO) and electro dialysis.
 list the differences between temporary and permanent hardness of water (L1)
 compare quality of drinking water with BIS and WHO standards. (L4)
 explain the working principles of different Industrial water treatment processes (L4)
Unit 2 Electrochemistry & Corrosion 11
Electrode potential, determination of single electrode potential –Nernst‘s equation, Reference electrodes - hydrogen and
calomel electrodes – electrochemical series and its applications – primary cell, dry or Leclanche cell – secondary cell,
lead acid storage cell, nickel-cadmium cell – lithium batteries (Lithium-M nO2). Fuel cells, Hydrogen-Oxygen fuel cell.
Corrosion: Definition – theories of corrosion, dry corrosion and electro chemical corrosion – factors affecting corrosion.
Corrosion controlling methods: Sacrificial and Impressed current cathodic protection, anodic and cathodic inhibitors
 apply Nernst equation for calculating electrode and cell potentials (L3)
 demonstrate the corrosion prevention methods and factors affecting corrosion (L3)
 compare different batteries and their applications (L4)
Unit 3 Polymers and Fuel Technology 10
Polymers: Introduction to polymers, functionality of monomers, M echanism of chain growth and step growth
polymerization. differences between thermoplastic and thermo setting resins, Preparation, properties and uses of PVC
and Bakelite
Fuels – Types of fuels, calorific value, determination of calorific value of a fuel using bomb calorimeter, numerical
problems based on calorific value. Liquid Fuels - refining of petroleum, fuels for IC engines, knocking and anti-knock
agents, Octane and Cetane values. Alternative fuels- propane, power alcohol
 list major chemical reactions that are used in the synthesis of polymers (L1)
 explain different types of polymers and their applications (L2)
 solve the numerical problems based on Calorific value(L3)
 explain different types of fuels and their applications (L4)
44
Unit 4 Advanced Engineering Materials 10
Composites- Definition, Constituents, Classification- Particle, Fibre and Structural reinforced composites, properties and
Engineering applications
Refractories- Classification, Properties, Factors affecting the refractory materials and Applications.
Lubricants- Classification, Functions of lubricants, M echanism, Properties of lubricating oils and Applications
Building materials- Portland Cement - constituents and manufacture. Setting and Hardening of cement.
 explain the constituents of Composites (L4)
 illustrate the functions and properties of lubricants (L4)
 enumerate the reactions at setting and hardening of the cement (L1)
Unit 5 Nano materials and Smart Materials 10

Nano M aterials: Introduction to Nano materials, chemical synthesis of nano materials by Sol-gel method,
Characterization of nano materials by XRD & SEM , Applications of nano materials in wastewater treatment,
lubricants, and engines.
Smart M aterials: Introduction – Types of smart materials-self healing materials. Shape memory alloys and Uses
of smart materials
 summarize the applications of SEM , in surface characterization (L4)
 outline the preparation of nanomaterials (L1)
 distinguish the principles of XRD and SEM (L4)
1. P.C. Jain and M . Jain, Engineering Chemistry, 17/e, Dhanapat Rai & Sons, 2018.
2. Shashi Chawla, A textbook of Engineering chemistry, 3/e, Dhanapat Rai & Co, 2015.
Reference Books:
1. O.G Palanna, Engineering Chemistry, 2/e, Tata M cGraw Hill Education Private Limited, 2017
2. B.S M urthy, P. Shankar, A textbook of NanoScience and NanoTechnology, University Press 2013
3. R. Bouhfid, A.K Qaiss, and M . Jawaid, Polymer Nanocomposite based Smart M aterials, Elsevier Woodhead
Publishing, 2020.
Course Outcomes:
1. compare different water analysis and water treatment methods L4
2. apply the principles of corrosion control and differentiate various cells L3
3. explain different types of polymers and fuels L4
4. explain the classification, properties and applications of engineering materials L2
5. analyze the properties and applications of nano materials and smart materials and L4
distinguish the principles of XRD and SEM .
CO-PO Mapping:
PO10
PO11
PO12
PSO1
PSO2
PSO3
PO1
PO2
PO3
PO4
PO5
PO6
PO7
PO8
PO9
CO
20AC14T.1 3 2 - - - - - - - - - 2 - - -
20AC14T.2 3 2 2 - - - - - - - - 2 - - -
20AC14T.3 3 2 - - - - - - - - - - - - -
20AC14T.4 3 2 2 - - - - - - - - - - - -
20AC14T.5 3 2 2 - - - - - - - - - - - -
45
Title of the Course Communicative English

Category HSM C
Course Code 20AC15T
Year I Year
Semester I Semester
Branch CE, M E, CSE & AI&DS

3 0 0 3
Course Objectives:
 To Facilitate effective listening skills for better comprehension of academic lectures and English spoken
by native speakers
 To focus on appropriate reading strategies for comprehension of various academic texts and authentic materials
 To Help improve speaking skills through participation in activities such as role plays,discussions and structured
talks/oral presentations
 To impart effective strategies for good writing and demonstrate the same in summarizing, writing well organized
essays
 To provide knowledge of grammatical structures and vocabulary and encourage their appropriate use in speech
and writing
Unit 1 9
Prescribed Lesson: On the Conduct of Life by William Hazlitt
Listening: Identifying the topic, the context, and specific pieces of information by listening to short audio texts and
answering a series of questions.
Speaking: Asking and answering general questions on familiar topics such as home, family, work, studies, and
interests; introducing oneself and others.
Reading: Skimming to get the main idea of a text; scanning to look for specific pieces of information.
Reading for Writing: Beginnings and endings of paragraphs - introducing the topic, summarizing the main idea
and/or providing a transition to the next paragraph.
Grammar and Vocabulary: Parts of Speech, Content words and function words; word forms: verbs, nouns,
adjectives and adverbs; nouns: countable and uncountable; singular and plural; basic sentence structures; simple
question form - wh-questions; word order in sentences.
Learning Outcomes
At the end of this unit, the student will be able to
 understand social or transactional dialogues spoken by native speakers of English and identify the
context, topic, and pieces of specific information (L1)
 ask and answer general questions on familiar topics and introduce oneself/others (L2)
 employ suitable strategies for skimming and scanning to get the general idea of a text and locate specific
information (L3)
 recognize paragraph structure and be able to match beginnings/endings/headings with paragraphs (L2)
 form sentences using proper grammatical structures and correct word forms (L4)
Unit 2 9
Prescribed Lesson: The Brook by Alfred Tennyson;
Listening: Answering a series of questions about main idea and supporting ideas after listening to audio texts.
Speaking: Discussion in pairs/small groups on specific topics followed by short, structured talks.
Reading: Identifying sequence of ideas; recognizing verbal techniques that help to link the ideas in a paragraph
together.
Writing: Paragraph writing (specific topics) using suitable cohesive devices; mechanics of writing - punctuation,
capital letters.
46
Grammar and Vocabulary: Cohesive devices - linkers, signposts and transition signals; use of articles and zero
article; prepositions.
Learning Outcomes
At the end of this unit, the student will be able to
 comprehend short talks on general topics (L1)
 participate in informal discussions and speak clearly on a specific topic using suitable discourse markers
(L3)
 understand the use of cohesive devices for better reading comprehension (L1)
 write well-structured paragraphs on specific topics (L4)
 identify basic errors of grammar/ usage and make necessary corrections in short texts (L2)
Unit 3 9
Prescribed Lesson: The Death Trap by Saki
Listening: Listening for global comprehension and summarizing what is listened to.
Speaking: Discussing specific topics in pairs or small groups and reporting what is discussed
Reading: Reading a text in detail by making basic inferences -recognizing and interpreting specific context clues;
strategies to use text clues for comprehension.
Writing: Summarizing, Paragraph Writing, identifying main idea/s and rephrasing what is read; avoiding
redundancies and repetitions
Grammar and Vocabulary: Verbs - tenses; subject-verb agreement; direct and indirect speech, reporting verbs
for academic purposes.
Learning Outcomes
At the end of the unit, the student will be able to
 comprehend short talks and summarize the content with clarity and precision (L1)
 participate in informal discussions and report what is discussed (L3)
 infer meanings of unfamiliar words using contextual clues (L3)
 write summaries based on global comprehension of reading/listening texts (L4)
 use correct tense forms, appropriate structures and a range of reporting verbs in speech and writing(L4)
Unit 4 9
Prescribed Lesson: Muhammad Yunus
Listening: M aking predictions while listening to conversations/ transactional dialogues without video; listening with
video.
Speaking: Role plays for practice of conversational English in academic contexts (formal and informal) - asking
for and giving information/directions.
Reading: Studying the use of graphic elements in texts to convey information, reveal trends/patterns/relationships,
communicate processes or display complicated data.
Writing: Writing structured essays on specific topics using suitable claims and evidence.
Grammar and Vocabulary: Quantifying expressions - adjectives and adverbs; comparing and contrasting; Voice -
Active & Passive Voice
Learning Outcomes
 infer and predict about content of spoken discourse (L2)
 understand verbal and non-verbal features of communication and hold formal/informal conversations (L1)
 interpret graphic elements used in academic texts (L3)
 produce a coherent paragraph interpreting a figure/graph/chart/table (L4)
 use language appropriate for description and interpretation of graphical elements (L3)
Unit 5 9
Prescribed Lesson: The Dancer with a White Parasol by Ranjana Deve
Listening: Identifying key terms, understanding concepts and answering a series of relevant questions that test
comprehension.
Speaking: Formal oral presentations on topics from academic contexts - without the use of PPT slides.
Reading: Reading for comprehension.
Writing: Letter Writing: Official Letters/Report Writing
Grammar and Vocabulary: Editing short texts –identifying and correcting common errors in grammar and usage
47
(articles, prepositions, tenses, subject verb agreement)
Learning Outcomes
 take notes while listening to a talk/lecture and make use of them to answer questions (L4)
 make formal oral presentations using effective strategies (L4)
 comprehend, discuss, and respond to academic texts orally and in writing. (L3)
 produce a well-organized essay with adequate support and detail (L4)
 edit short texts by correcting common errors (L3)
Prescribed Textbook:
1. Language and Life, Orient Black Swan (with CD).
Reference Books
1. English Grammar in Use: A Self Study Reference and Practice Book, Raymond M urphy, Fourth Edition,
Cambridge Publications
2. English Grammar and Composition, David Grene, M c M illan India Ltd
3. Bailey, Stephen. Academic writing: A handbook for international students. Routledge, 2014.
4. Chase, Becky Tarver. Pathways: Listening, Speaking and Critical Thinking. Heinley ELT; 2nd Edition, 2018.
5. Raymond M urphy‘s English Grammar in Use Fourth Edition (2012) E-book
6. Hewings, M artin. Cambridge Academic English (B2). CUP, 2012.
7. Norman Lewis Word Power M ade Easy- The Complete Handbook for Building a Superior Vocabulary (2014)
8. Speed Reading with the Right Brain: Learn to Read Ideas Instead of Just Words by David Butler
Course Outcomes:
At the end of the course, the s tudent will be able to Blooms Level of Learning
1. understand the context, topic, and pieces of specific information from social or L3
transactional dialogues spoken by native speakers of English
2. read, scan and skim texts such as literary forms, journalistic articles and L2
scientific readings for comprehension and retention
3. exhibit self-confidence and speak in formal and informal contexts L3
4. apply grammatical knowledge in speech and writing and formulate sentences L2
with accuracy
5. produce coherent and unified paragraphs with adequate support and detail L4
CO-PO Mapping:
PO10
PO11
PO12
PSO1
PSO2
PSO3
PO1
PO2
PO3
PO4
PO5
PO6
PO7
PO8
PO9
CO
20AC15T.1 - - - - - - - - - 3 - 2 - - -
20AC15T.2 - - - - - - - - - 3 - 2 - - -
20AC15T.3 - - - - - - - - - 3 - 2 - - -
20AC15T.4 - - - - - - - - - 3 - 2 - - -
20AC15T.5 - - - - - - - - - 3 - 2 - - -
48
Title of the Course Engineering Graphics

Category ESC
Course Code 20A311T
Year I B. Tech
Semester I Semester
Branch ME

1 0 4 3
Course Objectives:
 To enable the students with various concepts like Dimensioning, Conventions and standards related to working
drawing in order to become professionally efficient.
 To introduce fundamental concepts of curves used in engineering, projection of points, lines and planes.
 To impart and inculcate proper understanding of the theory of projections.
Unit 1 Introduction & Conic Curves Theory: 03

Practice Sessions: 03
Lettering – Geometrical constructions - Curves used in Engineering Practice: Conic Sections– General method only.
Special methods: Ellipse – Oblong method, Arcs of circle method, Concentric circles methods - Rectangle method and
Tangent method for Parabola - Rectangular Hyperbola.
Learning Outcomes: At the end of the unit, a student will be able to
 M ention the description of a diagram clearly and will be in a position to apply the knowledge of basics learned in
Geometrical Constructions wherever applicable (L1)
 Understands the concepts of Conic Sections (L2)
Unit 2 Cycloidal Curves& Involutes Theory: 02

Cycloid, Epicycloid and Hypocycloid (treatment of simple problems)
Involutes – Square, Pentagon, Hexagon and Circle.
 Understands the concept of Cycloidal Curves and the application of industry standards (L1)
 Understands the concept of Involutes and the application in industry standards (L2)
Unit 3 Orthographic Projections Of Points And Lines Theory: 03

Orthographic Projections of Points, Lines-Inclined to one reference plane and Inclined to both reference planes, Finding
the True lengths - Traces.
 Understand the Orthographic Projections of Points (L2)
 Understand the Orthographic Projections of Lines and are able to improve their visualization skills so that they can
apply these skills in developing the new products. (L3)
Unit 4 Projections Of Planes Theory: 02

Projections of regular Plane surfaces inclined to one reference plane and both reference planes.
 Understand Orthographic Projections of Planes (L2)
49
 Understand and is capable of analysing how a plane object‘s shape and size in real working environment is
changed while the plane is positioned in seeing in different directions orin different angles (L3)
Unit 5 Auxiliary Planes Theory: 02

Projection of lines and planes using auxiliary planes.
 Understands the Auxiliary Projections of Lines and Planes (L2)
 Apply the concepts learned through this topic in the situations where actual shape and size is to be identified for
sectioned parts (L3)
Prescribed Text Books:

1. Engineering Drawing, N.D. Bhatt, Charotar Publishers
2. Engineering Drawing, K.L. Narayana, P. Kanniah, Scitech Pub
Reference Books:
1. Engineering Drawing and Graphics, Venugopal/ New age.
2. Engineering Drawing, Johle, Tata M cGraw-Hill
3. Engineering Drawing, Shah and Rana, 2/e, Pearson Education
Course Outcomes:
1. Understands the concepts of Conic Sections for engineering curves ellipse, L1, L2
parabola and hyperbola.
2. Understands the concept of Cycloidal Curves, Involutes and the application of L1, L2
industry standards.
3. Students are capable to understand the Orthographic Projections of Points L1, L2, L3
and Lines and are able to improve their visualization skills so that they can
apply these skills in developing the new products.
4. Students are capable to understand and apply Orthographic Projections of L1, L2, L3
Planes wherever necessary.
5. Understands and becomes efficient in applying the concept of Auxiliary L1, L2, L3
Projections of Points, Lines and Planes in industrial applications.
CO-PO Mapping:
PO10
PO11
PO12
PSO1
PSO2
PSO3
PO1
PO2
PO3
PO4
PO5
PO6
PO7
PO8
PO9
CO
20A311T. 1 3 - - - - 3 2 - 1 2 - - - - -
20A311T. 2 3 - - - - 3 2 - 1 2 - - - - -
20A311T. 3 3 2 - - - 3 2 - 1 2 - - - - -
20A311T. 4 3 2 - - - 3 2 - 1 2 - - - - -
20A311T. 5 3 2 - - - 3 2 - 1 2 - - - - -
50
Department of Computer Science and Engineering
Title of the Course Problem Solving through C programming

Category ESC
Course Code 20A511T
Year I B. Tech
Semester I Semester

3 0 0 3
Course Objectives:
 Understanding the steps in problem solving and formulation of algorithms to problems.
 Develop programming skills as a means of implementing an algorithmic solution with appropriate control and
data structures.
 Develop intuition to enable students to come up with creative approaches to problems.
 Develop programs using pointers, structures and unions
 M anipulation of text data using files
Unit 1 Problem Solving and Introduction to C 9

Steps to solve problems, algorithm, Pseudo code, Flowchart with examples, Program Development Environments.
Introduction to programming: Programming languages and generations.
Introduction to C: Introduction, structure of C program, keywords, identifiers, Variables, data types, constants,
I/O statements, operators, precedence and associatively.
 Identify situations where computational methods and computers would be useful. (L2)
 Approach the programming tasks using techniques learned and write pseudo-code.(L2)
 Choose the right data representation formats based on the requirements of the problem. (L3)
 Write the program on a computer, edit, compile, debug, correct, recompile and run it.(L4)
Unit 2 Introduction to decision control statements and Arrays 9

Selective, looping and nested statements, jumping statements.
Arrays: Introduction, declaration of arrays, accessing and storage of array elements, searching (linear and binary
search algorithms) and sorting (selection and bubble) algorithms, multidimensional arrays, matrix operations.
Learning Outcomes: At the end of the unit, the student will be able to
 Use the comparisons and limitations of the various programming constructs and choose the right one for
the task in hand.(L3)
 Identify tasks in arrays with different techniques that are applicable and apply them to write programs.
(L2)
 Design and implement operations on both single and M ultidimensional arrays. (L4)
Unit 3 Strings and Functions 9

Strings: Declaration and Initialization, String Input / Output functions, String manipulation functions.
Functions: Types of functions, recursion, scope of variables and storage classes.
Preprocessor Directives: Types of preprocessor directives, examples.
 Implement and test the programs on strings using string manipulation functions. (L5)
 Analyze programming problems to choose when regular loops should be used and when recursion will
produce a better program (L4)
51
Unit 4 Pointers 9
Pointers: Understanding computer‘s memory, introduction to pointers, declaration pointer variables, pointer
arithmetic, pointers and strings, array of pointers, function pointers, dynamic memory allocation, advantages and
drawbacks of pointers.
 Identify tasks in which the dynamic memory allocation techniques learned are applicable and apply them
to write programs, and hence use computers effectively to solve the task. (L2)
 Design and develop Computer programs, analyzes, and interprets the concept of pointers and their
usage. (L6)
Unit 5 Structures and Files 9

Structures: Structure definition, initialization and accessing the members of a structure, nested structures, array of
structures, structures and functions, structures and pointers, self-referential structures, unions and enumerated
data types.
Files: Introduction to files, file operations, reading and writing data on files, error handling during file operations.
 Define derived data types and use them in simple data processing applications. (L2)
 Develop and test C programs for simple applications using files. (L5)

1. C Programming and Data Structures. B.A. Forouzan, R. F.Gilberg,Cengage learning, Indian edition.
2. C and Data Structures, E.Balaguruswamy, Tata M cGraw Hill.
3. Programming in C and Data Structures, J.R.Hanly, Ashok N. Kamthane and A. Ananda Rao, Pearson
Education.
Reference Books:
1. LET US C, Yeswanth Kanitkar, Ninth Edition, BPB Publication
2. Byron Gottfried, Schaum‘s‖ Outline of Programming with C‖, M cGraw-Hill.
3. Brian W. Kernighan and Dennis M . Ritchie, The C Programming Language, Prentice Hall of India.
4. A K Sharma ―Computer Fundamentals and Programming‖, 2nd Edition, University Press, 2018.
5. PradeepDey and M anas Ghosh, ―Programming in C‖, Oxford Press, 2ndEdition, 2017
6. ReemaTharaja ―Introduction to C Programming‖, Second Edition, OXFORD Press, 2015
Course Outcomes:
1. Formulate solutions to problems and represent those using L3
algorithms/Flowcharts.
2. Choose proper control statements and use arrays for solving problems. L3
3. Decompose a problem into modules and use functions to implement the L4
modules.
4. Apply and use allocation of memory for pointers and solve the problems related L3
to manipulation of text data using files and structures.
5. Develop the solutions for problems using C programming Language. L6
CO-PO Mapping:
PO10
PO11
PO12
PSO1
PSO2
PSO3
PO1
PO2
PO3
PO4
PO5
PO6
PO7
PO8
PO9
COs
20A511T.1 1 2 2 3 - 1 - - - - - - - - -
20A511T.2 3 3 3 3 3 - - - 1 - - - - - -
20A511T.3 3 2 1 2 1 - - - 1 - - 2 - - -
20A511T.4 2 3 2 2 3 - - - 1 - 1 2 - - -
20A511T.5 3 2 2 2 2 - - - 1 - - 2 - - -
52
Title of the Course Engineering Chemistry lab
Category BSC
Course Code 20AC14L
Year I Year
Semester I Semester
Branch CE & ME
0 0 3 1.5
Course Objectives:
 To familiarize the students with the basic concepts of chemistry
 To impart training for handling of different instruments.
 To familiarize the students with digital and instrumental methods of analysis
 To expose the students in practical aspects of the theoretical concepts.
List of experiments:
1. Determination of Hardness of a ground water sample by Complexometry.
2. Estimation of active chlorine content in Bleaching powder.
3. Determination of strength of an acid by pH metric method.
4. Determination of Fe (II) in M ohr‘s salt by potentiometric method.
5. Estimation of mixture of acids by conductometric titration
6. Estimation of Iron in Cement by Colorimetry
7. Preparation of Phenol-formaldehyde resin
8. Determination of strength of solutions by Conductometry
9. Determination of viscosity of lubricating oil by Red Viscometer 1 or 2
10. Estimation of Ferrous iron by Dichrometry.
11. Determination of copper in by Iodometry.
12. Determination of calorific value of a fuel by bomb calorimeter
1. J. M endham, R.C Denney, J.D Barnes, M . Thomas, B. Sivasankar Vogel‘s Quantitative Chemical Analysis
6/e, Pearson publishers, 2009.
2. N.K Bhasin and Sudha Rani Laboratory M anual on Engineering Chemistry 3/e, Dhanpat Rai Publishing
Company 2009.
Course Outcomes:
1. Explain the functioning of instruments such as pH meter, conductivity meter and L4
potentiometers.
2. estimate Cr, Fe & Cu and other metals in various compounds L2
3. analyze the quality of ground water sample and determine physical properties of L4
liquids
4. determine calorific value of different fuel samples and synthesize polymers L3
CO-PO Mapping:
PSO1
PSO2
PSO3
PO10
PO11
PO12
PO1
PO2
PO3
PO4
PO5
PO6
PO7
PO8
PO9
CO
20AC14L.1 3 2 - - - - - - - - - 2 - - -
20AC14L.2 3 2 - - - - - - - - - 2 - - -
20AC14L.3 3 2 - - - - - - - - - 2 - - -
20AC14L.4 3 2 - - - - - - - - - 2 - - -
53
Title of the Course Communicative English Lab

Category HSM C
Course Code 20AC15L
Year I B. Tech.
Semester I Semester

0 0 3 1.5
Course Objectives:
1. To learn better English pronunciation
2. To use language effectively in everyday conversations
3. To make formal oral presentations using effective strategies in professional life
4. To be exposed to a variety of self-instructional, learner friendly modes of language learning
Detailed Syllabus:
Pronunciation: 6
Introduction to English speech sounds
Learning Outcome:
At the end of the module, the learners will be able to
 understand different accents spoken by native speakers of English and speak in intelligible way
Listening Comprehension: Identifying the topic, the context and specific pieces of information by listening to short
audio texts and answering a series of questions. Answering a series of questions about main idea and supporting
ideas after listening to audio texts. Listening for global comprehension and summarizing what is listened to.
Learning Outcome:
 Adopt better strategies to listen attentively and comprehend attentively
Speaking 24
Situational Dialogues (Role plays for practice of conversational English in academic contexts (formal and informal) -
asking for and giving information/directions - Asking and answering general questions on familiar topics such as
home, family, work, studies and interests; introducing oneself and others.)
Oral Presentations: Formal oral presentations on topics from academic contexts - Formal presentations using PPT
slides with graphic elements, deliver an enthusiastic and well-practiced presentation
Describing people and situations (learn new adjectives, practice describing themselves and others, describe
objects using proper adjectives, use details in pictures to make predictions orally, describing situations, Integrate
and evaluate information presented in diverse media visually and orally
Learning Outcomes:
 speak confidently in formal and informal contexts
 comprehend and produce short talks on general topics
 use specific vocabulary to describe different persons, places and objects
Reading 6
Information Transfer (Studying the use of graphic elements in texts to convey information, reveal trends/ patterns/
relationships, communicate processes or display complicated data.
54
Learning Outcome:
 Analyze data given in an infographic and write/speak about it
Minimum Requirements:
1. Computer aided Language Lab for 60 students with 60 systems, one master console, LAN facility and
English language software for self- study by learners.
2. Communication Skills Lab with movable chairs and audio-visual aids with a P.A System, a T. V. an LCD
projector, a digital stereo –audio & video system and camcorder etc.
Prescribed Textbook: Lab M anual developed by Faculty M embers of AITS Rajampet

Suggested Software:
1. Loose Your Accent in 28 days, CD Rom, Judy Ravin
2. Sky Pronunciation Suite
3. Clarity Pronunciation Power – Part I
4. Learning to Speak English - 4 CDs
Course Outcomes:
Student will be able to Blooms Level of Learning
1. Neutralize their pronunciation of English sounds, and their accent L3
2. Adopt effective listening skills for better comprehension of English, spoken L2
by native speakers
3. Illustrate themselves in social and professional context effectively L3
4. Improve their public speaking skills and make technical presentations L4
confidently
5. Describe people and situations using adjectives effectively L3
6. Assess and Deduct data from graphs/pie charts/tables L3
CO-PO M apping:
PO10
PO11
PO12
PSO1
PSO2
PSO3
PO1
PO2
PO3
PO4
PO5
PO6
PO7
PO8
PO9
CO
20AC15L.1 - - - - - - - - - 2 - 1 - - -
20AC15L.2 - - - - - - - - - 1 - 2 - - -
20AC15L.3 - - - - - - - - 3 3 - 3 - - -
20AC15L.4 - - - - - - - - 3 2 - 1 - - -
20AC15L.5 - - - - - - - - 1 3 - 3 - - -
20AC15L.6 - - - - - - - - - 2 - 1 - - -
55
Title of the Course Problem solving through C Programming Lab

Category ESC
Course Code 20A511L
Year I B. Tech
Semester I Semester

0 0 3 1.5
Course Objectives:
 Setting up programming environment.
 Develop Programming skills to solve problems.
 Use of appropriate C programming constructs to implement algorithms.
 Identification and rectification of coding errors in program
 Develop applications using a modular programming and M anage data using files.
M inimum number of FOUR programs from each exercise is to be done students
Data Types, constants, Input and Output and expressions

Exercise :( week-1): Data types, Variables, Constants and Input and Output.
Exercise2 :( week-2): Operators, Expressions and Type Conversions.
 Identify situations where computational methods and computers would be useful. (L2)
 Approach the programming tasks using techniques learned and write pseudo-code. (L2)
 Write the program on a computer, edit, compile, debug, correct, recompile and run it. (L4)
Decision control statements and Arrays

Exercise3 :( week-3): Conditional Statements [two way and multipath].
Exercise4:(week-4):Loop Control Statements.[for, while and do-While]
Exercise5 :( week-5): Unconditioned JUM P Statements-break, continue, go to.
Exercise6 :( week-6): Declaring Arrays, Referencing Arrays, Array Subscripts. Using for loop for sequential
Access.
Exercise7:(week-7):M ultidimensional Arrays
 Choose the right data representation formats based on the requirements of the problem. (L3)
 Use the comparisons and limitations of the various programming constructs and choose the right one for
the task in hand. (L3)
 Identify tasks in arrays with different techniques that are applicable and apply them to write programs.
(L2)
 Design and implement operations on both single and M ultidimensional arrays. (L6)
Strings and Functions

Exercise8 :( week-8): String Basics, String Library Functions and Array of Strings.
Exercise9 :( week-9): Sim ple user defined functions, Parameter passing methods – pass by value, pass by
reference.
Exercise10:(week-10):Storageclasses-Auto,Register,StaticandExtern
Exercise11 :( week-11): Recursive Functions, Preprocess or commands.
Exercise12 :( week-12): Array Elements as Function Arguments.
56
 Implement and test the programs on strings using string manipulation functions. (L5)
 Analyze programming problems to choose when regular loops should be used and when recursion will
produce a better program (L4)
Pointers
Exercise13:(week-13): Pointers, Dynamic memory allocation and error handling
 Design and develop Computer programs, analyzes, and interprets the concept of pointers and their
usage. (L6)
 Identify tasks in which the dynamic memory allocation techniques learned are applicable and apply them
to write programs, and hence use computers effectively to solve the task. (L2)
Structures and Files

Exercise14:(week-14):Structures
Exercise15:(week-15): File handling
 Define structure data types and use them in simple data processing applications. (L2)
 Develop and test C programs for simple applications using files. (L6)

1. C Programming and Data Structures. B.A. Forouzan, R. F.Gilberg,Cengage learning, Indian edition.
2. C and Data Structures, E.Balaguruswamy, Tata M cGraw Hill.
3. Programming in C and Data Structures, J.R.Hanly, Ashok N. Kamthane and A. Ananda Rao, Pearson
Education.
Reference Books:
1. Let Us C, Yeswanth Kanitkar, Ninth Edition, BPB Publication
2. A K Sharma ―Computer Fundamentals and Programming‖, 2nd Edition, University Press, 2018.
3. Pradeep Dey and M anas Ghosh, ―Programming in C‖, Oxford Press, 2ndEdition, 2017
4. Reema Tharaja ―Introduction to C Programming‖, Second Edition, OXFORD Press, 2015
5. https://www.cprogramming.com/
6. https://www.mycplus.com/tutorials/c-programming-tutorials
Course Outcomes:
1. Identify and setup program development environment L2
2. Implement the algorithms using C programming language constructs L3
3. Identify and rectify the syntax errors and debug program for semantic errors L3
4. Solve problems in a modular approach using functions L4
5. Implement file operations with simple text data L4
CO-PO Mapping:
PO10
PO11
PO12
PSO1
PSO2
PSO3
PO1
PO2
PO3
PO4
PO5
PO6
PO7
PO8
PO9
CO
20A511L.1 3 2 - 2 2 - - - 2 2 1 - - - -
20A511L.2 2 2 - - - - - - 1 - - - - - -
20A511L.3 3 3 3 3 - - - - 1 - - 3 - - -
20A511L.4 3 3 3 3 - - - - - - - 3 - - -
20A511L.5 3 3 3 3 - - - - - - - 3 - - -
57
Title of the Course Environmental Science

Category MC
Course Code 20AC16T
Year I B. Tech
Semester I Semester

3 0 0 0
Course Objectives:
 To make the student to get awareness on environment and understand the importance of protecting natural
resources.
 To enable the student to know the importance of ecosystems and biodiversity for future generations.
 To make the student to know pollution problems due to the day-to-day activities of human life.
 To enable the student to acquire skills for identifying and solving the social issues related to environment.
 To enable the student to understand the impact of human population on the environment.
Unit 1 Multidisciplinary Nature of Environmental Studies 10

Definition, Scope and Importance – Need for Public Awareness. NATURAL RESOURCES: Renewable and non-
renewable resources – Forest resources: Uses, deforestation– Water resources: Uses, floods, drought – M ineral
resources: Uses, environmental effects of extracting mineral resources – Food resources: Impacts of overgrazing,
problems with traditional agriculture, effects of modern agriculture – Land Resources: Land degradation, soil
erosion - Energy resources: Renewable and non-renewable energy resources.
 Understand the importance of public awareness (L1).
 Identify various natural resources (L2).
Unit 2 Ecosystems, Biodiversity and its Conservation 10

Ecosystems: Producers, consumers and decomposers – Food chains, food webs and ecological pyramids –
Introduction, types, characteristic features, structure and function of the following ecosystem: Forest ecosystem,
lake ecosystem.
Biodiversity and Its Conservation: Definition – Value of biodiversity - Hot-spots of biodiversity – Threats to
biodiversity – Conservation of biodiversity.
 Explain the concept of ecosystem (L2).
 Recognize the importance of biodiversity (L2).
Unit 3 Environmental Pollution 8

Definition, Causes, effects and control measures of: Air Pollution, Water pollution, Soil pollution, M arine pollution,
Noise pollution, Thermal pollution, Nuclear hazards.
 Illustrate the different types of pollution (L2).
 Describe various sources, effects and control measures of pollution (L2).
Unit 4 Social Issues and the Environment 10

Rain water harvesting, Environmental ethics: Issues and possible solutions – global warming, acid rain, ozone
layer depletion – Environment Protection Act – Air (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act – Water
(Prevention and control of Pollution) Act – Wildlife Protection Act – Forest Conservation Act.
 Interpret social issues related to environment (L3).
58
 Relate importance of environmental acts (L4).
Unit 5 Human Population and the Environment 7

Population explosion – Family Welfare Programmes – Environment and human health – Value Education –
HIV/AIDS – Role of information Technology in Environment and human health, Field work – Visit to a local area to
document environmental assets.
 Understand the effects of population explosion (L1).
 Identify the natural assets and their relationship (L2).
1. Perspectives in environmental Studies, Anubha Kaushik and C P Kaushik, New Age International Publishers,
New Delhi, 2018.
2. A Textbook of Environmental Studies, Shashi Chawla, M cGraw Hill Education, New Delhi, 2017.
Reference Books:
1. Environmental Studies by Benny Joseph, M cGraw Hill Education, New Delhi, 2017.
2. A textbook of environmental studies, A Dhinakaran and B Sankaran, Himalaya Publishing House, M umbai,
2017.
3. Fundamentals of environmental studies, M ahua Basu and S Xavier, Cambridge University Press, New Delhi,
2017.
4. Textbook of Environmental Studies for undergraduate courses, ErachBharucha for University Grant
Commission, University press, New Delhi, 2013.
5. A textbook of environmental studies, Vijay kumarTiwari, Himalaya Publishing House, M umbai, 2017.
Course Outcomes:
1. Explain how natural resources should be used. L2
2. Identify the need to protect ecosystems and biodiversity for future generations. L3
3. List out the causes, effects, and control measures of environmental pollution. L1
4. Demonstrate knowledge to the society in the proper utilization of goods and L2
services.
5. Outline the interconnectedness of human dependence on the earth‘s ecosystems. L2
CO-PO Mapping:
PO10
PO11
PO12
PSO1
PSO2
PSO3
PO1
PO2
PO3
PO4
PO5
PO6
PO7
PO8
PO9
CO
20AC16T.1 1 1 - - - 3 3 1 - - - 3 - - -
20AC16T.2 1 2 - - - 3 3 1 - - - 3 - - -
20AC16T.3 - 1 - - - 3 3 1 - - - 3 - - -
20AC16T.4 2 - - - - 3 3 1 - - - 3 - - -
20AC16T.5 1 - - - - 3 3 1 - - - 3 - - -
59
Title of the Course Differential Equations and Vector Calculus

Category BSC
Course Code 20AC21T
Year I B. Tech
Semester II Semester

3 0 0 3
Course Objectives:
 To enlighten the learners in the concept of differential equations and multivariable calculus.
 To furnish the learners with basic concepts and techniques at plus two level to lead them into
advanced level by handling various real world applications.
Unit 1 Linear differential equations of higher order with constant Coefficients 10

Basic concepts - general solution-operator D-rules for finding complimentary function-inverse operator-rules for
finding particularintegral for RHS term of the type e ax , sin ax / cos ax , polynomials in x,
eax sin ax / eax cos ax / eax xn , x sin ax / x cos ax -method of variation of parameters.
 identify the essential characteristics of linear differential equations with constant coefficients(L3)
 solve the linear differential equations with constant coefficients by appropriate method (L3)
Unit 2 Equations reducible to Linear Differential Equations with constant 8

coefficients
Cauchy‘s and Legendre‘s linear equations, simultaneous linear equations with constant coefficients
Applications: Electrical Circuits – L-C and L-C-R Circuit problems.
 classify and interpret the solutions of linear differential equations(L4)
 generalize and solve the higher order differential equation by analyzing physical situations(L3)
Unit 3 Partial Differential Equations 8

Formation of PDEs by eliminating arbitrary constants and arbitrary functions, solutions of first order linear and non-
linear PDEs (Charpit‘s method). Introduction to method of separation of variables for second order linear Partial
Differential Equations.
 apply the techniques to find solutions of standard PDEs (L3)
 solve the boundary value problems (L3)
Unit 4 Vector Differentiation 8

Scalar and vector point functions, vector operator Del, Gradient, Divergence and Curl operators, vector identities.
 apply del to scalar and vector point functions(L3)
 illustrate the physical interpretation of Gradient, Divergence and Curl(L2)
Unit 5 Vector integration 10

Line integral-circulation-work done, surface integral, Green‘s theorem in the plane (without proof), Stoke‘s theorem
(without proof), volume integral, Divergence theorem (without proof) and applications of these theorems.
 find the work done in moving a particle along the path over a force field(L1)
60
 apply Green‘s, Stokes and Divergence theorem in evaluation of double and triple integrals(L3)
2. Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering M athematics, 10/e, John Wiley & Sons, 2011.
Reference Books:
1. B. V. Ramana, Higher Engineering M athematics, Mc Graw Hill Education.
2. George B. Thomas, M aurice D. Weir and Joel Hass, Thomas Calculus, 13/e, Pearson
Publishers,2013.
3. R.L. Garg NishuGupta, Engineering M athematics Volumes-I &II, PearsonEducation
4. H. K. Das, Er. Rajnish Verma, Higher Engineering M athematics, S.Chand.
Course Outcomes:
1. Solve the differential equations related to various engineering fields L3
2. Generalize and solve the higher order differential equation by analyzing
L3
physical situations
3. Identify solution methods for partial differential equations that model
L3
physical processes
4. Understand the physical meaning of different operators such as
gradient, L2
curl and divergence
5. Find the work done against a field, circulation and flux using vector calculus L3
CO-PO Mapping: PO10
PO11
PO12
PSO1
PSO2
PSO3
PO1
PO2
PO3
PO4
PO5
PO6
PO7
PO8
PO9
CO
20AC21T.1 3 3 - - - - - - - - - 2 - - -
20AC21T.2 3 3 - - - - - - - - - 2 - - -
20AC21T. 3 3 3 - - - - - - - - - 3 - - -
20AC21T.4 3 3 - - - - - - - - - 2 - - -
20AC21T.5 3 3 - - - - - - - - - 3 - - -
61
Title of the Course Engineering Physics

Category BSC
Course Code 20AC24T
Year I B. Tech.
Branch CE & ME

3 0 0 3
Course Objectives:
 To impart knowledge in basic concepts of mechanics, acoustics, and ultrasonics with their engineering
applications
 To explain the significant concepts of dielectrics and magnetic materials in the field of engineering and their
potential applications.
 To impart knowledge in basic concepts of LASERs and optical fibers along with its engineering applications.
Unit 1 Mechanics 9
Gradient of scalar, Divergence and Curl of vector field and their physical significance-rotational frames-
conservative forces- F = - grad V, torque and angular momentum - Newton‘s laws in inertial and non-inertial
frames of reference-rotating frame of reference with constant angular velocity-qualitative explanation of Foucault‘s
pendulum-rigid body-angular velocity vector-centre of mass- gravitation law and Kepler‘s laws(qualitative).
 Identify forces and moments in mechanical systems using scalar and vector techniques. (L3)
 Interpret the equation of motion of a rigid rotating body (torque on a rigid body). (L3)
 Extend Newton‘s second law for inertial and non-inertial frame of reference. (L2)
Unit 2 Acoustics and Ultrasonic’s 9

Acoustics: Introduction- reverberation-reverberation time-Sabine‘s formula- derivation using growth and decay
method – Absorption coefficient and its determination –factors affecting acoustics of buildings and their remedies.
Ultrasonic‘s: Introduction- Properties- Production of ultrasonic‘s by magnetostriction and piezoelectric methods -
acoustic grating -Non Destructive Testing – pulse echo system through transmission and reflection modes - A,B
and C – scan displays, M edical applications – Sonogram.
 Explain how sound is propagated in buildings. (L2)
 Analyze acoustic properties of typically used materials in buildings. (L4)
 Identify the use of ultrasonic‘s in different fields. (L3)
Unit 3 Dielectric and Magnetic materials 10

Introduction-Dielectric Polarization-Dielectric polarizability- Susceptibility and Dielectric constant- Types of
polarizations: Electronic and Ionic (quantitative), Orientation polarizations (qualitative) -Frequency dependence of
polarization-Lorentz (internal) field-Claussius -M osotti equation-Applications of Dielectrics.
Introduction- M agnetic dipole moment-M agnetization-M agnetic susceptibility and permeability- Origin of
permanent magnetic moment -Classification of M agnetic materials-Weiss domain theory of ferromagnetism
(qualitative)-Hysteresis-soft and hard magnetic materials-M agnetic device applications.
 Explain the concept of dielectric constant and polarization in dielectric materials. (L2)
 Classify the magnetic materials based on susceptibility and their temperature dependence. (L2)
 Apply the concept of magnetism and magnetic devices. (L3)
62
Unit 4 LASERs and Fiber Optics 10
Introduction-characteristics of lasers-spontaneous and stimulated emission of radiation-Einstein‘s coefficients-
population inversion-pumping mechanism-Ruby laser- He-Ne laser-semiconductor laser-applications of lasers.
Introduction to Optical Fibers-Total Internal Reflection-Critical angle of propagation- Acceptance angle -Numerical
Aperture-Classification of fibers based on Refractive index profile& modes (step index and Graded index optical
fibers)-attenuation and optical fiber losses-Block diagram of fiber optic communication- M edical Applications.
 Understand the basic concepts of laser light sources. (L2)
 Identify the Engineering applications of lasers. (L2)
 Classify optical fibers based on refractive index profile and mode of propagation and identify the
applications of optical fibers in medical, communication and other fields. (L2)
Unit 5 Sensors 8
Sensors:(qualitative description only): Different types of sensors and applications; Strain and Pressure
sensors- Piezoelectric, magneto strictive sensors, Fibre optic methods of pressure sensing; Temperature
sensors - bimetallic strip, pyroelectric detectors, Hall-effect sensor, smoke, and fire detectors.
 Identify different types of sensors and applications. (L3)
 Explain physics behind the working principles of sensors. (L2)
 Select sensors for different type of applications. (L3)
1. D.Kleppner and Robert Kolenkow , ―An introduction to M echanics‖-II -Cambridge University Press,2015
2. M .N.Avadhanulu & P.G.Kshirsagar, ―A textbook of Engineering Physics‖- S. Chand Publications, 2017
3. Ian R Sinclair, Sensors and Transducers, 3rd ed,Elsevier (Newnes), 2001
Reference Books:
1. K.Thyagarajan. ―Engineering Physics‖-Mc Graw Hill Publishing company Ltd,2015.
2. M K Varma ―Introduction to M echanics‖-Universities Press-2015.
3. D.K. Bhattacharya and A. Bhaskaran, ―Engineering Physics‖- Oxford Publications-2015
Course Outcomes:
1. Explain physics applied to solve engineering problems in mechanics. L2
2. Apply the principles of acoustics for noise cancellation and explain the applications L3 & L2
of ultrasonics in various engineering fields.
3. Summarize the various types of polarization of dielectrics, classification of L2
magnetic materials and the applications of dielectric and magnetic materials.
4. Apply the lasers and optical fibre concepts in various applications. L3
5. Identify the sensors for various engineering applications L3
CO-PO Mapping:
PO10
PO11
PO12
PSO1
PSO2
PSO3
PO1
PO2
PO3
PO4
PO5
PO6
PO7
PO8
PO9
CO
20AC24T. 1 3 2 - - - - - - - - - - - - -
20AC24T. 2 3 2 2 - - - - - - - - - - - -
20AC24T.3 3 2 2 - - - - - - - - 2 - - -
20AC24T. 4 3 2 2 - - - - - - - - 2 - - -
20AC24T. 5 3 2 2 - - - - - - - - 2 - - -
63
Title of the Course Engineering M aterials

Category ESC
Course Code 20A321T
Year I B. Tech
Branch ME

3 0 0 3
.
Course Objectives:
 To understand the basic structure, properties of metals, mechanism of crystallization and imperfections in
crystals.
 To study the importance of binary phase diagrams.
 To acquire knowledge on properties and structure of ferrous and nonferrous alloys and to select suitable
materials for various engineering applications.
 To learn various methods of heat treatment and surface coating processes.
 To gain knowledge on materials like Ceramics and Composites
Unit 1 Structure of Metals & Constitution of Alloys 8

Structure Of M etals: Bonds in Solids – M etallic bond with examples, Crystal structures, crystallization of metals,
imperfections, grain and grain boundaries, effect of grain boundaries on the properties of metal / alloys –
determination of grain size.
Constitution Of Alloys: Necessity of alloying, types of solid solutions, Hume Rotherys rules, intermediate alloy
phases, and electron compounds with examples.
 Recall the definitions ad terminology of crystallography (L1)
 Understand the effect of grain size and grain boundaries on the properties of metals and alloys (L2)
 Differentiate between metals and alloys (L4)
Unit 2 Equilibrium Diagrams 8

Experimental methods of construction of equilibrium diagrams, Isomorphous alloy systems, equilibrium cooling
and heating of alloys, Phase rule, Lever rule, eutectic systems with examples, peritectic reaction, eutectoid,
peritectoid reactions, phase rule, relationship between equilibrium diagrams and properties of alloys. Study of
binary phase diagram of Fe-Fe3C.
 M ake use of the principles of construction of binary phase diagrams (L1)
 Know the concepts of Lever and phase rule. (L1)
 Identify various Invariant reactions in binary phase diagrams (L2)
Unit 3 Ferrous & Non-Ferrous Alloys 8

Ferrous - Cast Irons: Structure, composition and properties of White Cast iron, M alleable Cast iron, grey cast iron,
Spheroidal graphite cast iron, Alloy cast irons with applications.
Steels - Classification of steels, structure and properties of plain carbon steels, Low alloy steels, Stainless steels,
Hadfield manganese steels, tool steels with applications.
Non-Ferrous M etals And Alloys: Structure and properties of copper and its alloys, Aluminium and its alloys,
Titanium and its alloys, with applications.
 Classify various types of cast irons and steels , their properties and applications (L2)
 Understand the importance of non ferrous metals and their alloys in engineering applications (L2)
 Compare cast Irons, steels and non ferrous alloys , their limitations in applications (L4)
64
Unit 4 Heat Treatment of Alloys & Surface Engineering 7
Heat Treatment of Alloys: Effect of alloying elements on Iron – Iron carbon system, Annealing, normalizing,
Hardening, TTT diagrams, tempering, Hardenability, surface - hardening methods, Age hardening.
Surface Engineering: Surface treatment processes and their characteristics and applications, mechanical
coatings, Diffusion coating.
 Know the influence of heat treatment in modification of properties of steels. (L1)
 Develop a heat treatment cycle based on properties required. (L4)
 Learn the importance of surface treatment processes. (L2)
Unit 5 Ceramic Materials & Composite Materials 7

Ceramic M aterials: Crystalline ceramics, glasses, cermets.
Composite M aterials: Classification of composites, various methods of component manufacture of composites,
particle – reinforced materials, fiber reinforced materials, metal ceramic mixtures, metal – matrix composites and
Carbon – Carbon composites.
 Understand the properties of ceramics and their applications. (L2)
 Summarize the properties of composites and their use (L3)
 Choose composites for various applications (L2)

1. Kodgire, M aterial Science and M etallurgy, 42nd edition Everest Publishing House 2017.
2. Donald R. Askeland, Essential of M aterials Science and Engineering. Thomson Publications 2014
Reference Books:
1.Sidney H. Avener, Introduction to Physical M etallurgy, TM H
2. William and collister, M aterials Science and Engineering, wiley pub. 2014
3. V. Raghavan, M aterial science and engineering, PH Pub. 2015
4. R.K.Rajput, Engineering materials and metallurgy. S.Chand & Co. 2006
5. O.P. Khanna, M aterial Science and M etallurgy. Dhanpatrai Pub. 2014
Course Outcomes:
1. Understand the mechanism of crystallization, methods of determining grain size
and factors affecting the solid solubility. L2
2. Use the phase diagrams of binary systems and iron-carbide diagram to select
the material composition L2
3. Understand the structure and properties of various cast irons, steels and non-
ferrous alloys. L2
4. Apply the various heat treatment processes, TTT diagram, surface hardening
methods & coatings depending on material requirements. L3
5. Understand the importance of ceramics, composites and their use. L2
CO-PO Mapping:
PO10
PO11
PO12
PSO1
PSO2
PSO3
PO1
PO2
PO3
PO4
PO5
PO6
PO7
PO8
PO9
CO
20A321T.1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 - - - - 3 - - -
20A321T.2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 - - - - 3 - - -
20A321T.3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 - - - - 3 - - -
20A321T.4 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 - - - - 3 - 2 2
20A321T.5 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 - - - - 3 - - -
65
Title of the Course Engineering Graphics & Design

Category ESC
Course Code 20A322T
Year I B. Tech
Branch ME

1 0 4 3
Course Objectives:
 To impart and inculcate proper understanding of the theory of projections of solids and simple machine
components.
 To visualize projections of solids with sectioning, isometric views and conversion of views.
 To prepare the student for future engineering positions.
Unit 1 Projections of Solids Theory: 03

Projections of Regular Solids – Cylinder, Cone, Prism and Pyramid - inclined to one reference plane & both
reference planes – Auxiliary Views.
 Understand the Orthographic Projections of Solids. (L2)
 Apply the concepts learned in industrial applications. (L3)
Unit 2 Sections Of Solids Theory: 02

Section Planes and Sectional views of Right Regular Solids–Prism, Cylinder, Pyramid and Cone. True shapes of
the sections.
 Understand the concept of Sections of Solids. (L2)
 Apply sectional views for engineering components. (L3)
Unit 3 Development of Surfaces & Theory: 03

Interpenetration of Right Regular Solids Practice Sessions: 03
Development of Surfaces of Right Regular Solids – Prisms, Cylinder, Pyramid, Cone and their Sectioned parts.
Projections of curves of Intersection of Cylinder Vs Cylinder – Cylinder Vs square prism – Cylinder Vs Cone and
Square prism Vs Square prism (Axis bisecting problems only).
 Understand the Development of surfaces and Intersections of Solids (L2)
 Develop a sheet which meets the specifications of an object and can analyze the image of an intersected
solids (L3)
Unit 4 Isometric Projections / Views Theory: 02

Principles of Isometric Projection – Isometric Scale – Isometric Views– Conventions – Isometric Views of Lines,
Plane Figures, Simple and Compound Solids.
 Understand the Isometric Views and Isometric Projections (L2)
 Employ freehand 3D pictorial sketching to aid in the visualization process and can efficiently
communicate ideas graphically. (L3)
66
Unit 5 Conversion of Views Theory: 02
Conversion of Isometric views to Orthographic Views and Conversion of Orthographic views to Isometric views.
 Understands the conversion of views. (L2)
 Analyze a drawing and can efficiently communicate ideas graphically (L4)

1. Engineering Drawing, N.D. Bhatt, Charotar Publishers
2. Engineering Drawing, K.L. Narayana, P. Kanniah, Scitech Pub
Reference Books:
1. Engineering Drawing and Graphics, Venugopal/ New age
2. Engineering Drawing, Johle, Tata M cGraw-Hill
3. Engineering Drawing, Shah and Rana, 2/e, Pearson Education
Course Outcomes:
1. understand and analyze the Orthographic Projections of Solids L1, L2
2. apply sectional views for industrial engineering components L1, L2, L3
3. develop a sheet which meets the specifications of an object and can analyze the L1, L2
image of an intersected solids
4. employ freehand 3D pictorial sketching to aid in the visualization process and to L1, L2, L3
efficiently communicate ideas graphically
5. Analyze a drawing and can efficiently communicate ideas graphically L1, L2, L4
CO-PO Mapping:
PO10
PO11
PO12
PSO1
PSO2
PSO3
PO1
PO2
PO3
PO4
PO5
PO6
PO7
PO8
PO9
CO
20A322T. 1 3 - - - 2 2 - 3 3 - - - - - -
20A322T. 2 3 - - - - 2 - 3 3 - - - - - -
20A322T. 3 3 2 - - - 2 - 3 3 - - - - - -
20A322T. 4 3 2 - - - 2 - 3 3 - - - - - -
20A322T. 5 3 2 - - - 2 - 3 3 - - - - - -
67
Title of the Course Engineering M echanics

Category ESC
Course Code 20A323T
Year I B. Tech
Branch CE & ME

3 0 0 3
Course Objectives:
 To explain the effect of force and moment in the different engineering applications.
 To familiarize frictional forces in mechanical applications.
 To teach centre of gravity and moment of inertia of solids and surfaces.
 To understand the analysis of rigid bodies under dynamic conditions.
Unit 1 Introduction to Engineering Mechanics 08

Introduction to Engineering M echanics: Composition and resolution of forces, parallelogram law, principle of
transmissibility, types of force systems - concurrent and concurrent coplanar forces, resultant of coplanar force
systems couple, moment of a force Varignon's theorem, concept of free body diagrams, concept of equilibrium
of coplanar force and non-coplanar systems.
 Resolve the forces in mechanical systems (L2)
 Identify the moments and forces (L3)
 Draw free body diagram (L3)
 Demonstrate equilibrium of ideal system. (L2)
Unit 2 Analysis of Structures and Friction 09

Introduction to plane trusses, analysis of plane trusses by method of joints and method of sections.
Friction: Laws of friction, types of friction, equilibrium of force systems involving frictional forces, wedge friction.
Free body diagrams involving frictional forces.
 Identify different types of trusses. (L2)
 Analyze the plane trusses by method of joints and the method of sections. (L4)
Unit 3 Properties of Surfaces and Moment of Inertia 09

Properties of Surfaces and Volumes: Centroid and center of gravity, derivation of centroids from first moment of
area, centroids of composite sections, center of gravity of common volumes - cylinder, cone, sphere, theorem of
Pappus-guldinus.
M oment of Inertia: Area moment of inertia of plane and composite shapes, parallel axis theorem, perpendicular
axis theorem, polar moment of inertia, mass moment of inertia of common volumes -thin plates, thin rod,
cylinder, cone, sphere, rectangular prism, radius of gyration.
 Identify the centre of gravity of composite sections. (L3)
 Determine the centre of gravity of common solids. (L3)
 Determine moment of inertia for composite volumes. (L3)
Unit 4 Kinematics 08
Equations of motion for rigid bodies, constant and variable acceleration, rectilinear and curvilinear motion,
motion under gravity -projectile motion, use of rectangular coordinates, tangential and normal coordinates,
radius of curvature, rotation of a rigid body about a fixed axis, introduction to plane motion.
68
 Write equations of motion for rigid bodies. (L3)
 Find velocity and acceleration in rectilinear and curvilinear motions (L4)
 Trace the path of projectile. (L3)
Unit 5 Kinetics and Ideal Systems 08

Kinetics: Principles of dynamics - Newton's Laws of motion, D'Alembert's principle in rectilinear translation,
principle of work and energy.
Ideal Systems: Principle of conservation of energy, concept of power, conservation of linear and angular
momentum, principle of momentum and impulse, impact - types of impact.
Learning Outcomes :At the end of the unit, the student will be able to:
 Apply D'Alembert's principle in rectilinear translation. (L3)
 Estimate the work done by a force and work done by a couple. (L3)
 Relate principle of work and energy in dynamic systems. (L3)
 M ake use of principle of momentum and impulse to dynamic bodies. (L4)

1. A Nelson, Engineering M echanics: Statics and Dynamics, M cGraw Hill publications.
2. J.L.M eriam , L.G.Kraige , J.N.Bolton ,Engineering M echanics-statics, Engineering M echanics-Dynamics.
3. S SBhavikatti, Engineering M echanics, New Age International.
4. RK Bansal , Engineering M echanics, Laxmi Publications.
Reference Books:
1. Basudeb Bhattacharya., Engineering M echanics, 2/e, Oxford University Press (India), 2015.
2. Irving Shames, G K M Rao, Engineering M echanics: Statics and Dynam-ics, 4/e, Pearson, 2009
3. K L Kumar, Veenu Kumar, Engineering M echanics, 4/e, Tata M cGraw Hill, 2010.
Course Outcomes:
1. Resolve forces and couples in mechanical systems L3
2. Identify different types of trusses and analyze the plane trusses by method of L2,L4
joints and the method of sections
3. Identify the frictional forces and its influence on equilibrium L3
4. Find the centre of gravity and moment of inertia for various geometric shapes L3
5. Develop equations for different motions L4
6. Determine the displacement, velocity and acceleration relations in dynamic L4
systems
7. Relate the impulse and momentum L4
CO-PO Mapping:
PO10
PO11
PO12
PSO1
PSO2
PSO3
PO1
PO2
PO3
PO4
PO5
PO6
PO7
PO8
PO9
CO
20A323T.1 3 - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
20A323T.2 3 - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
20A323T.3 3 - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
20A323T.4 3 3 - - - - - - - - - - - - -
20A323T.5 3 - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
20A323T.6 3 - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
20A323T.7 3 3 - - - - - - - - - - - - -
69
Title of the Course Engineering Physics Lab

Category BSC
Course Code 20AC24L
Year I B. Tech.
Branch CE & ME

0 0 3 1.5
Course Objectives:
 To understand the role of Optical fiber parameters in engineering applications.
 To recognize the significance of laser and ultrasonics
by studying its characteristics and its applicationin finding the particle size.
 To illustrate the semiconductor, magnetic and dielectric materials applications.
 To identify the various sensor applications.
List of Experiments
1. Determination of wavelength of LASER light using diffraction grating
2. Determination of particle size using LASER.
3. Determination of spring constant of springs using Coupled Oscillator
4. Determination of Hall voltage and Hall coefficient of a given semiconductor usingHalleffect.
5. Determination of Dielectric constant of dielectric material using charging and dischargingofcapacitor.
6. Determination of M agnetic field along the axis of a circular coil carrying current.
7. Determination of Rigidity modulus of material of a wire-dynamic method (Torsional pendulum)
8. Determination of hysteresis loss by tracing B-H Curve of ferromagnetic material.
9. Determination of the numerical aperture of a given optical fiber and hence to find itsacceptance Angle
10. M easurement of magnetic susceptibility by Gouy‘s method
11. Determination of ultrasonic velocity in liquid (Acoustic grating)
12. Determination of pressure variation using Strain Guage sensor.
13. Determination of temperature change using Strain Guage sensor.
14. Determination of pressure variations using optical fiber sensors.
Determination of temperature changes using optical fiber sensors
References:
1. S. Balasubramanian, M .N. Srinivasan ―A Text book of Practical Physics‖- S Chand Publishers, 2017
Course Outcomes:
At the end of the course, student will be able to Blooms Level of Learning
1. Understand the characteristics and behavior of various materials. L2
2. Estimate the basic characteristic quantities of LASER and ultrasonics L4
3. Exhibit an ability to use techniques and skills associated with modern engineering L4& L5
tools such as fiber optics and sensors.
4. M easure properties of a semiconductors, magnetic and dielectric materials. L5
CO-PO Mapping:
PSO1
PSO2
PSO3
PO10
PO11
PO12
CO
PO1
PO2
PO3
PO4
PO5
PO6
PO7
PO8
PO9
20AC24L.1 3 - - - 2 - - - - - - - - - -
20AC24L.2 3 - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
20AC24L.3 3 2 - - 2 - - - - - - - - - -
20AC24L.4 3 2 - - 2 - - - - - - - - 2 2
70
Title of the Course Engineering M aterials Lab

Category ESC
Course Code 20A321L
Year I B. Tech
Branch ME

0 0 3 1.5
Course Objectives:
 To gain the knowledge of microstructures of different ferrous and non ferrous alloys
 To gain the knowledge of calculating hardness number of heat treated steels
 To gain the knowledge of conducting experiment on jominy & quench apparatus for hardenability
List of Experiments: 8
1. Study of M icrostructures of Pure M etals – Copper & Aluminium.
2. Study of M icrostructures of Non – Ferrous Alloy – Brass.
3. Study of M icrostructures of Other Alloys – Stainless Steel, Case Carburized Steel & Bearing M etal.
4. Study of M icrostructures of Cast Irons – Gray, M alleable & White Cast Irons.
5. Study of M icrostructures of Low Carbon Steel & M edium Carbon Steel.
6. Study of M icrostructures of Heat Treated Steels.
7. Finding out the Hardness of Treated and Untreated Steels.
8. Finding out the Hardability of Steels by using Jominy End Quench Test Apparatus.
Course Outcomes:
1. Know and draw the microstructure of ferrous, nonferrous alloys, steels and cast L1
irons
2. visualize grains and grain boundaries L1
3. Evaluate the hardness of treated and untreated steels L2
4. summarize the importance of hardening of steels L2
CO-PO Mapping:
PO10
PO11
PO12
PSO1
PSO2
PSO3
PO1
PO2
PO3
PO4
PO5
PO6
PO7
PO8
PO9
CO
20A321L.1 3 - - 3 - - - - - - - - 1 2 2
20A321L.2 3 - - 3 - - - - - - - - 1 2 2
20A321L.3 3 - - 3 - - - - - - - - 1 2 2
20A321L.4 3 - - 3 - - - - - - - - 1 2 2
71
Title of the Course Engineering & IT Workshop

Category ESC
Course Code 20A326L
Year I B. Tech
Branch CE, M E & ECE

0 0 3 1.5
Course Objectives:
 To read and interpret job drawing, plan various operations and make assembly.
 To identify and select the hand tools and instruments used in various trades.
 To gain practical skills by performing the experiments in different trades of workshop.
 Demonstrate the parts of a personal computer system
 Demonstrate the Installation the operating system and other software required in a personal computer system
 Introduce connecting the PC on to the internet from home and workplace and effectively usage of the internet,
Usage of web browsers, email, news groups and discussion forums
 Introduce the usage of Productivity tools in crafting professional word documents, excel spreadsheets and
power point presentations
 To utilize M S Office tools
Engineering Workshop:
Trade 1 Carpentry Shop 02

Two joints (exercises) from : M ortise and tenon T joint, Dove tail joint, Bridle T joint, middle lap T joint, Half Lap
joint, cross lap joint, Corner Dovetail joint or Bridle Joint from soft wood stock.
Learning Outcomes: At the end of the unit, the student will be able to apply wood working skills in real world
applications. (L3)
Trade 2 Sheet metal shop 02

Two jobs (exercises) from: Tapered Tray, cylinder, conical funnel from out of 22 or 20 guage G.I. sheet
Learning Outcomes: At the end of the unit, the student will be able to build different parts with metal sheets used
in various appliances (L3)
Trade 3 Fitting shop 02

Two jobs (exercises) from: square Fit, V-Fit, Semi-circular fit, dove tail fit from M .S. stock
Learning Outcomes: At the end of the unit, the student will be able to apply fitting operations in various
assemblies. (L3)
Trade 4 House-wiring 02
Two jobs (exercises) from: Parallel and Series, Two way switch, Tube –Light connection, Stair case connection.
Learning Outcomes: At the end of the unit, the student will be able to apply basic electrical engineering
knowledge for house wiring practice. (L3)
Trade 5 Demonstration 01
Any one trade of Plumbing • M achine Shop • M etal Cutting • Soldering and Brazing
Learning Outcomes: At the end of the unit, the student will be able to get the basic awareness of any of trade
demonstrated. (L3)

72
1. Kannaiah P. and Narayana K.L., Workshop M anual, 3rd Edn, Scitech publishers.
2. John K.C., M echanical Workshop Practice. 2nd Edn. PHI 2010.
Reference Books:
1. Jeyapoovan T.and Pranitha S., Engineering Practices Lab M anual, 3rd Edn. Vikas Pub.2008.
IT Workshop:
Task 1 01
Learn about Computer: Identify the internal parts of a computer, and its peripherals. Represent the same in the
form of diagrams including Block diagram of a computer. Write specifications for each part of a computer including
peripherals and specification of Desktop computer. Submit it in the form of a report
 Identify the parts of a computer (L2)
 Know the usage of internal parts of a computer (L2)
Task 2 01
Install Operating System: Student should install Linux on the computer. Students should record the entire
installation process.
 Install another operating systems (L1)
 Know how to install software‘s (L2)
Task 3 01
Browsing Internet: Student should access the Internet for Browsing. Students should search the Internet for
required information. Students should be able to create e-mail account and send email. They should get
acquaintance with applications like Face book, Skype etc. If Intranet mailing facility is available in the organization,
then students should share the information using it. If the operating system supports sending messages to multiple
users (LINUX supports it) in the same network, then it should be done by the studen t. Students are expected to
submit the information about different browsers available, their features, and search process using different
natural languages, and creating e-mail account.
 Create e-mail account and send email (L2)
 Browse internet for required information (L2)
Task 4 01
Word Processor: Students should be able to create documents using the word processor tool. Some of the tasks
that are to be performed are inserting and deleting the characters, words and lines, Alignment of the lines,
Inserting header and Footer, changing the font, changing the colour, including images and tables in the word file,
making page setup, copy and paste block of text, images, tables, linking the images which are present in other
directory, formatting paragraphs, spell checking, etc. Students should be able to prepare project cover pages,
content sheet and chapter pages at the end of the task using the features studied. Students should submit a user
manual of the word processor considered. .
 Prepare project documents, user manuals (L3)
 Get the knowledge on word processor tool (L1)
Task 5 01
Spreadsheet: Students should be able to create, open, save the application documents and format them as per
the requirement. Some of the tasks that may be practiced are M anaging the worksheet environment, creating cell
data, inserting and deleting cell data, format cells, adjust the cell size, applying formulas and functions, preparing
charts, sorting cells. Students should submit a user manual of the Spreadsheet application considered.
 Create , open and save spread sheets (L3)
 Apply formulas for different tasks (L4)
73
Task 6 01
Presentations: creating, opening, saving and running the presentations, selecting the style for slides, formatting
the slides with different fonts, colours, creating charts and tables, inserting and deleting text, graphics and
animations, bulleting and numbering, hyper linking, running the slide show, setting the timing for slide show.
Students should submit a user manual of the Presentation tool considered.
 Create , open and save slides (L4)
 Create their own presentations for seminars (L4)

1. Introduction to Information Technology, ITL Education Solutions limited, Pearson Education.
2. Upgrading and Repairing PC‘s, 22nd Edition, Scott M uller QUE, Pearson Education.
3. Comdex Information Technology Course Kit, Vikas Gupta, WILEY Dream tech.
4. MOS 2010 Study Guide for M icrosoft Word, Excel, PowerPoint, and Outlook Exams, 1st Edition, Joan
Lambert, Joyce Cox, M icrosoft Press
Reference Books:
1. IT Essentials PC Hardware and Software Companion Guide, CICSO Networking Academy
2. Network Your Computer & Devices Step by Step 1st Edition, Ciprian Rusen, M icrosoft Press
3. Troubleshooting, M aintaining & Repairing PCs, 5th Edition, Bigelow, TM H
4. Introduction to computers, Peter Norton, 6/e, M c Graw Hill
Course Outcomes:
1. Apply wood working skills in real world applications. L3
2. Build different parts with metal sheets used in various appliances. L3
3. Employ fitting operations in various assemblies. L3
4. Execute basic electrical engineering knowledge for house wiring practice. L3
5. Identify various operations and its applications from the demonstration. L3
6. Recognize the peripherals of a computer, perform assembling and L1, L3
disassembling of various components of a computer.
7. Describe and perform installation and un-installation of Windows and Linux L2, L3
operating systems and also perform troubleshooting of various hardware and
software components.
8. Use Web browsers to access Internet, Search Engines. L3
9. Use word processor; spread sheet, presentation and data storage tools. L3
CO-PO Mapping:
PSO1
PSO2
PSO3
PO10
PO11
PO12
CO
PO1
PO2
PO3
PO4
PO5
PO6
PO7
PO8
PO9
20A326L.1 3 - 1 - 1 - - - - - - 1 - - -
20A326L.2 3 - 1 - 1 - - - - - - 1 - - -
20A326L.3 3 - 1 - 1 - - - - - - 1 - - -
20A326L.4 2 - 1 - 1 - - - - - - 1 - - -
20A326L.5 3 - 1 - 1 - - - - - - 1 - - -
20A326L.6 3 3 1 - 3 - - - - - - 3 - - -
20A326L.7 3 3 1 - 3 - - - - - - 3 - - -
20A326L.8 3 3 1 - 3 - - - - - - 3 - - -
20A326L.9 3 3 1 - 3 - - - - - - 3 - - -
74
Title of the Course Partial Differential Equations and Numerical M ethods

Category BSC
Course Code 20AC31T
Year II Year
Semester I Semester
Branch CE & ME

3 0 0 3
Course Objectives:
 To introduce numerical methods for solving algebraic and transcendental equations.
 To notify the numerical methods in interpolation
 To explain various numerical methods for evaluating definite integrals.
 To introduce the numerical solutions of ordinary differential equations.
 To describe the applications of Partial differential equations
Unit 1 Solutions of algebraic and transcendental equations 10

Bisection method - Regula-Falsi method - The Iteration M ethod-Newton-Raphson method.
 acquire the Knowledge of algebraic and transcendental equations (L1)
 find approximate roots of an equation by using bisection, regula-falsi and Newton‘s methods (L3)
Unit 2 Interpolation 10
Finite differences - forward differences and backward differences - Newton‘s forward interpolation formula - Newton's
backward interpolation formula - Lagrange‘s interpolation formula.
 Explain various discrete operators (L2)
 Apply Newton forward and Backward formula for equal intervals (L3)
 Apply Lagrange‘s interpolation formula for unequal intervals (L3)
Unit 3 Numerical Differentiation and Numerical integration 8

Numerical Differentiation, Numerical integration - Trapezoidal rule - Simpson‘s 1/3rd and Simpson‘s 3/8 rules.
 Find differentiation of a function by using different numerical methods (L3)
 Determine the integration of a function by using numerical integration (L3)
Unit 4 Numerical solutions of ordinary differential equations of first order 10

Picard‘s method -Taylor‘s series- Euler‘s method - M odified Euler‘s method - Runge-Kutta method of fourth order.
 Solve ordinary differential equations by using different numerical schemes (L3)
 Apply the knowledge of numerical methods to solve Engineering problems (L3)
Unit 5 Applications of Partial Differential Equations 10

Solution of 1D-wave - 1D-heat and 2D-Laplace equations in cartesian coordinates by the M ethod of separation of
variables.
 Find the solution of partial differential equations bearing applications (L3)
 Solve the boundary value problems related to one dimensional wave equation and heat equations. (L3)
75
1. R.K. Jain, S.R.K. Iyengar, Advanced Engineering M athematics, 5/e, Narosa Publishers, 2016.
2. E. Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering M athematics, 9/e, John Wiley & Sons, 2006.
Reference Books:
1. T. Veerarajan, Engineering M athematics, Tata M cGraw-Hill, New Delhi, 2008.
2. N.P. Bali and M anish Goyal, A text book of Engineering M athematics, Laxmi Publications, Reprint, 2010.
3. P. Kandasamy, K. Thilagavathi, K. Gunavathi, Numerical M ethods, S. Chand & Company, 2/e, Reprint 2012.
Course Outcomes:
1. Apply the knowledge of numerical methods to solve algebraic and transcendental L3
equations
2. Apply the knowledge of interpolation L2
3. Understand the techniques of numerical differentiation and Integration L2
4. Solve the ordinary differential equations using numerical methods L3
5. Solve the boundary value problems (related to heat, one dimensional wave L3
equation.
CO-PO Mapping:
PO10
PO11
PO12
PS01
PS02
PS03
PO1
PO2
PO3
PO4
PO5
PO6
PO7
PO8
CO PO9
20AC31T.1 3 3 - - - - - - - - - 3 - - -
20AC31T.2 3 3 - - - - - - - - - 3 - - -
20AC31T.3 2 2 - - - - - - - - - 2 - - -
20AC31T.4 3 3 - - - - - - - - - 3 - - -
20AC31T.5 3 3 - - - - - - - - - 3 - - -
76
Department of Electrical and Electronics Engineering
Title of the Course Basic Electrical and Electronics Engineering

Category ESC
Course Code 20A235T
Year II Year
Semester I Semester
Branch ME

3 0 0 3
Course Objectives:
 To discuss the basic knowledge about fundamental laws and electric circuits.
 To describe the working of various DC M achines.
 To describe the working of various AC M achines.
 To describe the operation of electronic devices.
 To discuss the various electrical installations and measuring instruments
Unit 1 Fundamental Laws and Electrical Circuits 9

Basic definitions - Voltage, current, power, energy, charge, flux, static and dynamic em f, Faraday‘s laws of
electromagnetic induction, Fleming‘s right-hand rule, Fleming‘s left-hand rule, Lenz‘s law, Cork screw rule, Right hand
thumb rule, Right hand palm rule, types of elements, ohms law, resistive, inductive, capacitive networks, Series-
parallel circuits and Kirchhoff‘s laws.
 Describe the fundamental laws of Electrical Engineering. (L2)
 Describe the Kirchhoff‘s laws (L2)
Unit 2 DC Machines 9
DC Generator: Constructional Details of DC machine, Principle of operation, em f equation, types of generators,
applications.
DC M otor: principle of operation, torque equation, types, losses and efficiency, applications, Brake test, Swinburne‘s
test and Speed control methods.
 Describe construction and operation of DC machines (L2)
 Analyze the performance of DC machines (L4)
 Discuss the speed control methods of DC motor (L2)
Unit 3 AC Machines 9
1-Φ Transformer: Principle of operation, emf equation, losses, efficiency and regulation calculations using OC and SC
tests. Introduction to 3-Φ system, 3-Φ Alternator: Principle of operation of alternators-Regulation by synchronous
impedance method. 3-Φ Induction M otor: Principle of operation of induction motor, Brake Test on 3-Φinduction motor.
 Describe construction and operation of various AC machines (L2)
 Analyze the performance of various AC machines (L4)
Unit 4 Diode and Transistor 9

Diode: PN junction diode, symbol, v-i characteristics, applications, half wave, full wave and bridge rectifiers. Transistor:
PNP and NPN transistor, characteristics of CE configuration.
77
 Sketch operating characteristics of PN junction diode (L3)
 List out the applications of PN junction diode (L1)
 Describe the operation of various types of BJTs (L2)
 Sketch operating characteristics of CE configuration of BJTs (L3)
Unit 5 Measuring Instruments and Electrical Installations 9

Introduction, Electrical and Electronic Instruments, Classification of Instruments, M ultimeter, Function generator, CRO:
Block diagram of CRO, Principle of CRT (Cathode Ray Tube), applications of CRO, voltage, current and frequency
measurements using CRO.
Switch Fuse Unit (SFU), M CB, types of wires and cables, earthing, elementary calculations for energy consumption.
 Describe the construction and operation of measuring instruments. (L2)
 Describe the various electrical installations (L2)

1. V.K. M ehta, Principles of Electrical and Electronics Engineering. S. Chand & Co 2015.
2. T.Thyagarajan, Fundamentals of Electrical and Electronics Engineering. SciTech publications, 2011, 5th Ed
3. D. C. Kulshreshta, ―Basic Electrical Engineering‖, M cGraw Hill, 2017.
4. P.S.Dhogal ―Basic Electrical Engineering with Numerical Problems‖ McGraw Hill, 2006.
5. A.Sudhakar and Shyammohan, S Palli, ―Circuits and Networks‖ McGraw Hill, 2018.
Reference Books:
1. M .S Naidu and S.Kamakshaiah, Introduction to Electrical Engineering. TM H Publications. 2017
2. D.P Kothari and I.J Nagrath, Basic Electrical Engineering, TM H, 4thEd.2019
3. M illman and Halkias, Satya Prabhajit, Electronic devices and circuits, 4th Edition, TM H, 2015
4. Salivahanan, N,Suresh Kumar, ―Electronic Devices and Circuits‖ 4th Edition, M cGraw Hill, 2016.
Course Outcomes:
1. Describe the basic laws and apply to electrical circuits L1, L3
2. Describe the working of various DC M achines and analyze their performance. L1,L4
3. Describe the working of various AC M achines and analyze their performance. L1,L4
4. Describe the working of various electronic devices and sketch their characteristics. L1, L3
5. Describe the operation of various electrical installations and measuring instruments L2
CO-PO Mapping:
PO10
PO11
PO12
PS01
PS02
PS03
PO1
PO2
PO3
PO4
PO5
PO6
PO7
PO8
PO9
CO
20A235T.1 2 2 - 2 - - - - - - - - - - -
20A235T.2 2 3 2 2 - - - - - - - - - - -
20A235T.3 2 3 2 2 - - - - - - - - - - -
20A235T.4 2 2 - 3 - - - - - - - - - - -
20A235T.5 2 2 1 3 - - - - - - - - - - -
78
ANNAMACHARYA INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY AND SCIENCES::RAJAMPET
Title of the Course M echanics of Solids

Category PCC
Course Code 20A331T
Year II B. Tech
Semester I Semester
Branch ME

3 0 0 3
Course Objectives:
 To understand the nature of stresses induced in material under different loads.
 To plot the variation of shear force and bending moments over the beams under different types of loads.
 To understand the behavior of beams subjected to bending and shear loads.
 To calculate the deflection of beams under complex loading.
 To analyze the cylindrical and spherical shells under circumferential and radial loading conditions.
Unit 1 Simple Stresses & Strains 9

Elasticity– Types of stresses & strains–Hooke‘s law– stress – strain diagram for mild steel – Working stress –
Factor of safety – Lateral strain, Poisson‘s ratio & volumetric strain – Elastic moduli & the relationship – Bars of
varying section–composite bars (simple problems)–Thermal stresses (simple problems).Strain energy–Resilience,
principal stresses and strains - mohrs circle ( Elementary treatment only) .
 Define the simple stresses and strains when members are subjected to axial loads.(L1)
 Identify the temperature stresses and strains when members are subjected to axial loads (L2 , L3 & L4)
Unit 2 Shear Force and Bending Moment 8

Definition of beam – Types of beams – Concept of shear force and bending moment – S.F and B.M diagrams for
cantilever, simply supported and overhanging beams subjected to point loads, UDL, uniformly varying loads and
combination – Point of contra flexure –Relation between S.F.,B.M and rate of loading at a section of a beam.
 Sketch the shear force and bending moment diagrams for the beam subjected to different loading conditions
(L3).
Unit 3 Bending Stresses & Shear Stresses 8

Flexural Stresses: Theory of simple bending – Assumptions – Derivation of bending equation: M / I = f/y = E/R
Neutral axis–Determination of bending stresses–section modulus of rectangular and circular sections (Solid and
Hollow),I,T, Angle and Channel sections.
Shear Stresses: Derivation of formula – Shear stress distribution across various beam sections like rectangular,
circular, triangular, I,T and angle sections.
 Identify the stresses induced in different cross – sectional members subjected to bending moment (L2,
L3).
 Identify the stresses induced in different cross – sectional members subjected to shear loads (L2, L3).
Unit 4 Deflection of Beams 9

Bending into a circular arc – slope, deflection and radius of curvature – Differential equation for the elastic line of a
beam –Double integration and M acaulay‘s methods. Determination of slope and deflection for cantilever and
simply supported beams subjected to point loads, U.D.L, uniformly varying load.
 Identify the deflections in beams subjected to different loading conditions (L2 & L4)
79
Unit 5 Thin Cylinders 7
Thin Cylinders: Thin seam less cylindrical shells – Derivation of formula for longitudinal and circumferential
stresses – hoop, longitudinal and volumetric strains – changes in diameter, and volume of thin cylinders – Thin
spherical shells.
 Identify the stresses in thin cylindrical shells (L2 & L4).

1. Strength of materials by S S Bhavikatti
2. Strength of materials by R S Khurmi& N. Khurmi, S. Chand Publishing
3. Strength Of M aterials by S. Ramamrutham
Reference Books:
1. S.B. Junnarkar , M echanics of Structures Vol-III, Charotar publishing house.
2. S.Timoshenko, Strength of M aterials, D Van Nostrand Company.
3. Strength of M aterials by Dr. Sadhu Singh, ISBN: 978-81-7409-048-5,11th edition..
4. Strength Of M aterials by SS Rattan, Tata M cgraw Hill Education Private Limited; 2nd edition (July 11, 2011)
Course Outcomes:
1. Determine the simple stresses and strains when members are subjected to axial L1,L2,L3,L4
loads.
2. Draw the shear force and bending moment diagrams for the beam subjected to L1,L2,L3
different loading conditions.
3. Evaluate stresses induced in different cross-sectional members subjected to L1,L2,L3,L4
bending and shear loads.
4. Evaluate the deflections in beams subjected to different loading conditions L1,L2,L4
5. Analyze the thin cylindrical shells. L1,L2,L3,L4
CO-PO Mapping:
PSO1
PSO2
PSO3
PO10
PO11
PO12
PO1
PO2
PO3
PO4
PO5
PO6
PO7
PO8
PO9
CO
20A331T.1 3 - 3 - - 3 3 - - - - - - - -
20A331T.2 3 3 3 - - 3 3 - - - - - 2 - -
20A331T.3 3 3 3 - - 3 3 - - - - - - - -
20A331T.4 3 3 3 - - 3 3 - - - - - 2 - -
20A331T.5 3 - 3 - - 3 3 - - - - - - - -
80
Title of the Course M anufacturing Processes

Category PCC
Course Code 20A332T
Year II B. Tech
Semester I Semester
Branch ME

3 0 0 3
Course Objectives:
 To identify the basic steps involved in manufacturing processes of casting, pattern preparation and designing
of Gating system.
 To illustrate the concepts of various joining and cutting processes.
 To demonstrate the concept of metal forming processes, mechanism and their working principle, tools and
dies, its types and applications.
 To identify the concepts of basic extrusion and forging processes and its applications
 To demonstrate the basic knowledge on plastics, 3D Printing, classification, processing of plastics, its
applications and process of steel making and metallurgy.
Unit 1 Casting Processes 8
Steps involved in making casting– Types of patterns–Pattern M aterials––Pattern allowances and their
Construction –Principles of Gating, Gating ratio and design of Gating systems- defects in casting. Solidification of
casting–Concept–Solidification of pure metal and alloys, short & long freezing range alloys, Solidification time
calculations – Types of Risers, function and design, casting design considerations, Special casting processes:
Centrifugal- Die –Investment- stir casting.
 Understand the steps involved in metal casting, pattern making. (L2)
 Apply the knowledge of designing gating systems, risers. (L3)
 Identify the various casting defects. (L2)
Unit 2 Joining Processes 8
Classification of welding process, types of welds, forward, backward welding and welded joints. Gas welding, ARC
welding, Forge welding, resistance welding, Thermit welding and Plasma (Air and water) welding. Inert Gas
welding, TIG & M IG welding – Friction stir Welding. Soldering & Brazing. Heat affected zones in welding; welding
defects – causes and remedies – destructive and non destructive testing of welds. Cutting of metals: Oxy–
Acetylene Gas cutting, Cutting of ferrous, non-ferrous metals.
 Classify the working of various welding processes. (L2)
 Summarize the applications, advantages of various welding processes. (L3)
 Identify the defects in welding. (L2)
Unit 3 Metal Forming Processes 8
Hot working and cold working of metals –strain hardening, recovery, re-crystallization and grain growth,
Comparison and properties of Cold and Hot worked parts, rolling fundamentals–theory of rolling, types of Rolling
mills and products – defects in rolled products. Press working process: Stamping, forming and other cold working
processes: Blanking and piercing– Bending and forming– Drawing and its types – wire drawing and Tube
drawing– coining–Hot and cold spinning
 Compare cold working and hot working processes. (L4)
 Evaluate the forces and power in rolling and extrusion processes. (L5)
 Summarize the various operations in drawing, blanking and bending processes. (L3)
81
Unit 4 Extrusion and Forging Processes 6
Basic extrusion and its characteristics – Hot and cold extrusion – Forward and backward extrusion - Impact
extrusion – Hydrostatic extrusion. Forging processes: Principles of forging–Tools and dies–Types of Forging –
Smith forging –Drop Forging–Roll forging–Forging hammers: Rotary forging – forging defects – Rotary swaging.
 Summarize the working of various extrusion processes. (L3)
 Identify the principles of forging, tools and dies. (L2)
 Identify the defects in forging. (L2)
Unit 5 Plastics & Metallurgy 6
Plastics: Classification – Properties – Plastics as engineering materials – M ethod of processing plastics –
Injection moulding –Blow moulding -extrusion compression and transfer moulding.
Metallurgy: Steel M aking - Introduction, M ethods of steelmaking – crucible process, Bessemer converter process,
Open Hearth Process, Introduction to Powder M etallurgy - Principle, manufacture of powders, steps involved.
 Learn the methods of manufacturing plastics parts and various moulding methods. (L1)
 Understand the process of 3D printing. (L2)
 Explain the steps in manufacturing of powder metallurgy parts. (L2)
1. P.N. Rao, M anufacturing Technology.TM H, 2017, ISBN 978-1259062575.
2. Kalpak Jain, M anufacturing Technology. Pearson education, 2015, ISBN 9332587906.
3. Lindberg, PE, Process and materials of manufacturing, Allyn and Bacon, 1977. ISBN 978-9332556973.
Reference Books:
1. R.K.Jain, Production Technology, Khanna Publisher, 2004
2. Rosenthal, Principles of M etal Castings, TM H, 1976
3. Parmar, Welding Process, Khanna Publishers, 2010.
4. R.K.Rajput, M anufacturing Technology. Laxmi Publications, 2007.
5. K.L. Narayana, Production Technology, I. K. International Pub, 2010
6. Hazrachoudary, Elements of workshop technology volume–1, Indian Book distributing company, Calcutta,
2010.
Course Outcomes:
1. Identify various casting process involved in the conversion of raw materials to L2, L4
useful products, analyze the gating system features and designing of Risers.
2. Illustrate and analyze various welding and metal cutting operations. L2, L4
3. Apply the knowledge of metal working process in sheet metal forming L3
Processes, drawing and rolling and analyzing the process variables.
4. Apply the primary forming processes like forging, extrusion, equipment used and L2 & L3
process variables.
5. Analyze various plastic parts manufacturing techniques, Understand the 3D L4 & L2
Printing and their M ethods, Process of steel making and M etallurgy
CO-PO Mapping:
PO10
PO11
PO12
PSO1
PSO2
PSO3
PO1
PO2
PO3
PO4
PO5
PO6
PO7
PO8
PO9
CO
20A332T.1 3 - 3 - - 3 3 - 2 - 2 3 - - 3
20A332T.2 3 2 3 2 - 3 3 3 2 - 2 3 - - 3
20A332T.3 3 - 3 - - 3 3 - 2 - 2 3 - - 3
20A332T.4 3 - 1 - - 3 3 - 2 - 2 3 - - 3
20A332T.5 3 - 1 - - 3 3 3 2 - 2 3 - - 3
82
Title of the Course Basic Thermodynamics

Category PCC
Course Code 20A333T
Year II B. Tech
Semester I Semester
Branch ME

3 0 0 3
Course Objectives: This course will
 Impart the awareness on laws of thermodynamics.
 Enable the students to understand second law of thermodynamics and its applications to various systems.
 Familiarize steam properties to understand working of steam power plants.
 Acquire knowledge on equations of state and determine the properties of gas mixtures.
 Understand the inter-relationship between various air standard cycles used in gas power cycles.
Unit 1 Basic Concepts & First Law Of Thermodynamics 11
System, Control Volume, Surrounding, Boundaries, Universe, Types of Systems, M acroscopic and M icroscopic
viewpoints, Concept of Continuum, Thermodynamic Equilibrium, State, Property, Process, Cycle – Reversibility,
Quasi – static Process, Irreversible Process, Causes of Irreversibility – Energy in State and in Transition - Types,
Work and Heat, Point and Path function.
Zeroth Law of Thermodynamics –Ideal Gas Scale – PMM I - Joule‘s Experiments – First law of Thermodynamics –
Corollaries – First law applied to a Process – applied to a flow system – Steady Flow Energy Equation.
Learning Outcomes: At the end of this Unit, the student will be able to
 Classify various thermodynamic systems, properties and their importance in solving engineering
problems. (L3)
 Apply energy balance to the system involving heat and work interactions. (L3)
Unit 2 Second Law Of Thermodynamics 10
Limitations of the First Law – Thermal Reservoir, Heat Engine, Heat pump, Parameters of performance, Second
Law of Thermodynamics, Kelvin-Planck and Clausius Statements and their Equivalence / Corollaries, PMM of
Second kind, Carnot‘s principle, Carnot cycle and its specialties, Thermodynamic scale of Temperature.
Clausius Inequality, Entropy, Principle of Entropy Increase – Energy Equation, Availability and Irreversibility –
Thermodynamic Potentials, Gibbs and Helmholtz Functions, M axwell Relations – Elementary Treatment of the
Third Law of Thermodynamics.
 Solve the problems related to the performance measurement of thermal interacting devices. (L3)
 Determine entropy changes in a wide range of processes and determine the reversibility or irreversibility
of a process. (L3)
Unit 3 Pure Substances 8
Pure Substances, P-V-T- surfaces, T-S and h-s diagrams, M ollier Charts, Phase Transformations – Triple point at
critical state properties during change of phase, Dryness Fraction – Clausius – Clapeyron Equation,
Constructional use of Property tables. M ollier charts – Various Thermodynamic processes and energy Transfer –
Steam Calorimetry.
 Apply properties of steam to design steam systems. (L3)
 Determine properties of pure substances. (L3)
Unit 4 Perfect Gas Laws & Mixture Of Perfect Gases 13

Equation of State, specific and Universal Gas constants – various Non-flow processes, properties, end states,
Heat and Work Transfer, changes in Internal Energy – Throttling and Free Expansion Processes – Flow
83
processes – Deviations from perfect Gas M odel – Vander Waals Equation of State – Compressibility charts –
variable specific Heats – Gas Tables.
M ole Fraction, M ass fraction Gravimetric and volumetric Analysis – Dalton‘s Law of partial pressure, Avogadro‘s
Laws of additive volumes – M ole fraction, Volume fraction and partial pressure, Equivalent Gas constant and
M olecular Internal Energy, Enthalpy, specific heats and Entropy of M ixture of perfect Gases and Vapour.
 Utilize the equations of state and compressibility charts in solving thermodynamic problems. (L3)
 Determine the properties of ideal gas mixtures. (L3)
Unit 5 Air Standard Cycles 6

Otto, Diesel and Dual cycles, P-V and T -S diagrams - Description and Efficiencies- M ean effective pressures.
Comparison of Otto, Diesel and Dual cycles.
 Identify the cycles followed for each type of engine. (L2)
 Determine the performance of different air standard cycles. (L3)
1. Engineering Thermodynamics. PK Nag, TM H, 5TH Ed.2013 ISBN: 1259062562 / 9781259062568.
2. Basic Engineering Thermodynamics. A. Venkatesh, Universities Press; First edition (2007). ISBN:
9788173715877.
3. Thermodynamics – An Engineering Approach. Yunus Cengel& Boles, TM H. Mcgraw Higher Ed Edition: 8,
2015. ISBN 13: 9781259822674.
Reference Books:
1. Fundamentals of Thermodynamics. Sonntag, Borgnakke and Van wylen, John Wiley & sons (ASIA) Pt Ltd.
Publisher: Wiley; 8 edition (December 26, 2012). ISBN-13 ‫‏‬: ‫‏‬978-1118131992.
2. Thermodynamics. Mc Graw Hill J. P. Holman, M cGraw-Hill College; 4th edition (January 1, 1988). ISBN-13 ‫‏‬:
‫‏‬978-0070296336.
3. An introduction to Thermodynamics. YVC Rao, Universities Press, 3rd edition 2004. ISBN: 9788173714610.
4. Engineering Thermodynamics, Jones & Dugan, PHI INDIA (2011). ISBN-13 ‫‏‬: ‫‏‬978-8120313750.
Course Outcomes:
1. Solve the thermodynamic problems by applying first law and steady flow energy L1, L2, L3
equation
2. Apply the laws of thermodynamics to measure the performance of heat engines, L1, L2, L3
refrigerators, heat pumps.
3. Determine change in properties of pure substances during phase change L2, L3
processes.
4. Understand the application and limitations of different equations of state and L2, L3
calculate properties of ideal gas mixtures.
5. Apply the knowledge of thermodynamics laws to verify the performance of air L2, L3
standard cycles.
CO-PO Mapping:
PO10
PO11
PO12
PSO1
PSO2
PSO3
PO1
PO2
PO3
PO4
PO5
PO6
PO7
PO8
PO9
CO
20A333T.1 3 3 - - - - 3 - - - - 3 - - -
20A333T.2 3 3 - - - - 3 - 1 - - 3 1 - -
20A333T.3 3 3 - - - - - - - - 3 1 - -
20A333T.4 3 3 - - - - 3 - - - - 3 - - -
20A333T.5 3 2 2 - - 1 1 - - - - 3 1 - -
84
Title of the Course Basic Electrical and Electronics Engineering lab

Category ESC
Course Code 20A235L
Year II B. Tech
Semester I Semester
Branch ME

0 0 3 1.5
Course Objectives:
 To impart knowledge and practical exposure on various elements of electrical circuits, operational aspects of
various electrical machines and electronic circuits.
List of experiments:
1. Pre-determination of efficiency of DC shunt M achine working as M otor as well as Generator(Swinburne‘s
Test)
2. Determination of Performance Characteristics of DC Shunt M otor(Brake Test)
3. Speed Control of DC Shunt M otor(Armature Control M ethod and Field Control M ethod)
4. Determination of Performance Characteristics of Three Phase Squirrel Cage Induction M otor(Brake Test)
5. Predetermination of efficiency and regulation of Single Phase Transformer at different power factors(OC and
SC test on single phase transformers)
6. Study of V-I Characteristics of PN junction Diode.
7. Determination of Ripple Factor and Regulation of Half Wave Rectifier with and without capacitive filter.
8. Determination of Ripple Factor and Regulation of Full Wave Rectifier with and without capacitive filter.
9. Study of Input and Output Characteristics of Bipolar Junction Transistor in Common Emitter Configuration.
10. Study of Cathode Ray Oscilloscope.(CRO)
11. Determination of V-I Characteristics of ZENER Diode.
12. Study of Frequency response of a single stage CE amplifier
Note: Perform any ten experiments
Course Outcomes:
1. Apply the conceptual knowledge of various electrical machines to understand L3
their operation and control aspects through practical investigations.
2. Apply the conceptual knowledge of semiconductor devices to analyze the L3
electronic circuits through practical investigations.
3. Apply ethics and norms of the engineering practices while exercising L3
experimental investigations.
4. Function effectively as an individual and as a member in a team. L1
5. Communicate effectively in verbal and written forms. L1
CO-PO Mapping:
PSO1
PSO2
PSO3
PO10
PO11
PO12
PO1
PO2
PO3
PO4
PO5
PO6
PO7
PO8
PO9
CO
20A235L.1 3 - - 3 - - - - - - - - - - -
20A235L.2 3 - - 3 - - - - - - - - - - -
20A235L.3 - - - - - - - 3 - - - - - - -
20A235L.4 - - - - - - - - - - 1 - - - -
20A235L.5 - - - - - - - - - - 1 - - - -
85
Title of the Course M echanics of Solids Lab

Category PCC
Course Code 20A331L
Year II B. Tech
Semester I Semester
Branch ME
0 0 3 1.5
Course Objectives:
 To calculate the Young M odulus, torsional strength, hardness and tensile strength of given specimens.
 To calculate impact strength of given specimens.
 To calculate the compressive strength of given specimens.
 To calculate stiffness of springs.
List of experiments
1. Direct tension test
2. Torsion test
3. Hardness test
a) Brinell hardness test b) Rockwell hardness test
4. Test on springs
5. Compression test on wood
6. Impact test
a) Charpy test b) Izod test
7. Shear test
Course Outcomes:
1. Determine the young‘s modulus by tension test. L4
2. Calculate the modulus of rigidity of ductile materials. L4
3. Calculate & compare the hardness values for various materials L4
4. Calculate modulus of rigidity and stiffness for springs L4
5. Analyze the compression strength of wood by compression test L4
6. Apply the concept of impact loading and to determine impact values for materials L4
7. Determine the shear stress for various materials. L4
CO-PO Mapping:
PSO1
PSO2
PSO3
PO10
PO11
PO12
PO1
PO2
PO3
PO4
PO5
PO6
PO7
PO8
PO9
CO
20A331L .1 3 3 - 3 - - 3 - 3 - 3 3 - - -
20A331L.2 3 3 - 3 - - 3 - 3 - 3 3 - - -
20A331L .3 3 3 - 3 - - 3 - 3 - 3 3 - - -
20A331L.4 3 3 - 3 - - 3 - 3 - 3 3 - - -
20A331L .5 3 3 - 3 - - 3 - 3 - 3 3 - - -
20A331L.6 3 3 - 3 - - 3 - 3 - 3 3 - - -
20A331L.7 3 3 - 3 - - 3 - 3 - 3 3 - - -
86
Title of the Course M anufacturing Processes Lab

Category PCC
Course Code 20A332L
Year II B. Tech
Semester I Semester
Branch ME

0 0 3 1.5
Course Objectives:
 To acquire practical knowledge on making of patterns and calculation of its allowances, preparation of mould
cavity and casting
 To impart hands on practical exposure of joining of metals by welding process and its heat affected zone on
weldments.
 To acquire practical knowledge of joining thin metals by spot welding, joining of metals by TIG welding and
Gas welding processes.
 To acquire practical knowledge of making hallow parts like bottles by the blow moulding machine and making
of plastic components by the injection moulding machine.
Metal Casting:
1. Pattern Design and making
2. Sand properties testing - Exercise -for strengths, and permeability – 2 Experiments.
3. M oulding M elting and Casting - 1 Experiment.
Welding:
1. ARC Welding Lap & Butt Joint - 2 Experiments.
2. Spot Welding - 1 Experiment.
3. TIG Welding - 1 Experiment.
4. Plasma welding and Brazing - 2 Exercises (Water Plasma Device).
Mechanical Press Working:
1. Blanking & Piercing operation and study of simple, compound and progressive press tool.
2. Hydraulic Press: Deep drawing and extrusion operation.
3. Bending and other operations.
Processing Of Plastics
1. Injection M oulding.
2. Blow M oulding.
Note: M inimum of 10 Experiments need to be performed
Course Outcomes:
Attending the laboratory the students shall be able to Blooms Level of Learning
1. M ake Pattern with pattern material selection and pattern allowances. L3
2. Find sand properties and apply in sand preparation for casting process. L2
3. Fabricate components using primary manufacturing processes such as casting, L2
welding, joining and forming.
4. Acquire knowledge about the various tools, equipment, machinery and operations L4
required for mechanical press working manufacturing processes.
5. M ake the components by processing of plastics using injection and blow moulding. L6
87
CO-PO Mapping:
PSO1
PSO2
PSO3
PO10
PO11
PO12
PO1
PO2
PO3
PO4
PO5
PO6
PO7
PO8
PO9
CO
20A332L.1 3 3 3 3 - - - - 3 1 - 1 - 2 -
20A332L.2 3 2 1 3 2 - - - 3 1 - 1 - 2 -
20A332L.3 3 2 1 1 2 - - - 3 - - 1 - 2 -
20A332L.4 3 2 1 1 2 - - - 3 - - 1 - 2 -
20A332L.5 3 2 1 1 2 - - - 3 - - 1 - 2 -
88
Title of the Course Auto CAD
Category SC
Course Code 20A334L
Year II B. Tech.
Semester I Semester
Branch ME

1 0 2 2
Course Objectives:
 To Explore Auto CAD software for drafting and modelling.
 To instruct the utility of drafting & modeling packages in orthographic and isometric drawings.
Course Content:
Introduction to AutoCAD: Basic drawing and editing commands: line, circle, rectangle, erase, view, undo, redo,
snap, object editing, moving, copying, rotating, scaling, mirroring, layers, templates, polylines, trimming, extending,
stretching, fillets, arrays, dimensions. Dimensioning principles and conventional representations.
Orthographic Projections: Systems of projections, conventions and application to orthographic projections.
Isometric Projections: Principles of isometric projection- Isometric scale; Isometric views: lines, planes, figures,
simple and compound solids.
List of Exercises for 2D Drafting:
1. To create a ‗square‘ of 50mm
2. To create a ‗pentagon‘ of 50mm as shown in figure
3. To create a ‗circle‘ of 100mm diameter
4. To create a ‗polygon‘ of ‗n‘ no. of sides
5. To draw, a line diagram as shown in figure using Absolute Coordinate M ethod
6. Draw a line diagram as shown in figure. Use Relative Polar Coordinate M ethod.
7. Draw a line diagram as shown in figure. Use Donut and Rectangular Array, commands
8. Draw a diagram as shown in figure. Use Ellipse and Polar Array Commands.
9. Draw a line diagram as shown in figure. Use of Hatch, Rotate, Stretch and Scale Commands
10. Draw a diagram of conversion of views Iso to Ortho as shown in figure
List of Exercises for 3D Modelling:
1. Draw an isometric line diagram as shown in figure using grid, snap and iso-plane commands
2. To Create Iso-circles in each iso-plane using Ellipse command for the previous figure.
3. To Create Aligned dimensions
4. To generate 3D Wireframe model, using 3D Absolute Coordinate and 3D Rectangular Coordinate M ethods.
5. To draw a three dimensional diagram using 3D commands such as Region, Extrude and Subtract.
Course Outcomes:
1. Create the various two dimensional drafting shapes using Auto CAD commands. L6
2. Draft the conversion of views 3D to 2D orthographic views in Auto CAD software. L6
3. Create the various 3D modelling shapes using commands in Auto CAD software. L6
CO-PO Mapping:
PSO1
PSO2
PSO3
PO10
PO11
PO12
PO1
PO2
PO3
PO4
PO5
PO6
PO7
PO8
PO9
CO
20A334L.1 - - 2 - 3 - - 2 - 2 2 2 - - 3
20A334L.2 - - 2 - 3 - - 2 - 2 2 2 - - 3
20A334L.3 - - 2 - 3 - - 2 - 2 2 2 - - 3
89
Title of the Course Probability and Statistics

Category BSC
Course Code 20AC41T
Year II Year
Branch CE, M E, CSE, AIDS& AIM L

3 0 0 3
Course Objectives:
 To describe the measures of central tendency.
 To introduce the basic concepts of probability theory.
 To elucidate probability distribution for solving problems in engineering.
 To introduce test of Hypothesis and confidence interval for a population parameter of large samples
 To explain the steps of testing of hypothesis for small samples
Unit 1 Introduction to statistics 10

M ean - M edian and M ode for ungrouped and grouped data.
Correlation - correlation coefficient – Karl Pearson‘s coefficient - Spearman‘s rank correlation.
 Summarize the basic concepts of data science and its importance in engineering (L2)
 Analyze the data quantitatively or categorically measure of averages variability (L4)
 Adopt Correlation methods and principle of least squares, regression analysis
Unit 2 Probability 10
Axioms of probability – addition theorem of probability - conditional probability-multiplication theorem of probability
(without proof) - Baye‘s theorem.
Random variables - discrete and continuous - Distribution functions - M ean and Variance.
 Define the terms trail, events, sample space, probability and laws of probability (L1)
 M ake use of probabilities of events in finite sample space from experiments (L3)
 Apply Baye‘s theorem to real time problems (L3)
 Explain the notation of random variable, distribution functions and expected value (L2)
Unit 3 Probability distributions 8

Binomial and Poisson distribution - fitting - normal distribution - their properties.
 Apply binomial, passion distributions for real data to compute probabilities, theoretical frequencies (L3)
 Interpret the probabilities of normal distribution and its applications (L2)
Unit 4 Estimation and testing of hypothesis for large samples 10

Point estimation - Interval estimation of one mean (small and large) - one Proportion (large).
Test of Hypothesis: Types of errors, one and two tailed tests, level of significance, single mean -difference of means -
single proportion - difference of proportions (large).
90
 Explain the concepts of estimation, interval estimation and confidence intervals (L2)
 Apply the concepts hypothesis testing for large samples (L3)
Unit 5 Testing of hypothesis for small samples 10

Student t-distribution test for single mean - two means and paired t-test,
Testing of equality of variances (F-test) - χ2 test for goodness of fit - χ2 test for independence of attributes.
 Apply the concepts of testing hypothesis for small samples to draw the inferences (L3)
 Apply the concepts of estimation of the goodness of fit (L3)
1. M iller and Freund‘s, Probability and Statistics for Engineers,7/e, Pearson, 2008.
2. S.C. Gupta and V.K. Kapoor, Fundamentals of M athematical Statistics, 11/e, Sultan Chand & Sons Publications,
2012.
Reference Books:
1. S. Ross, a First Course in Probability, Pearson Education India, 2002.
2. W. Feller, an Introduction to Probability Theory and its Applications, 1/e, Wiley, 1968.
3. B.V. Ramana, a text bookof Probability and Statistics, McGraw Hill, 2008.
4. T.K.V. Iyengar, B. Krishna Gandhi and others, Probability and Statistics, S. Chand, 2007.
Course Outcomes:
Upon successful completion of this course, the student will be able to Blooms Level of Learning
1. Calculate and interpret the correlation between two variables. L3
2. Understand the basic concepts of Probability, random variables and apply discrete and
L2
continuous probability distributions
3. Employ the concepts of probability distributions in real life applications. L3
4. Design the components of a classical hypothesis test for large samples L4
5. Apply the knowledge of test of hypothesis for small samples in Engineering field. L3
CO-PO Mapping:
PO10
PO11
PO12
PS01
PS02
PS03
PO1
PO2
PO3
PO4
PO5
PO6
PO7
PO8
PO9
COs
20AC41T.1 3 3 - - - - - - - - - 3 - - -
20AC41T.2 3 3 - - - - - - - - - 3 - - -
20AC41T.3 2 2 - - - - - - - - - 2 - - -
20AC41T.4 3 3 - - - - - - - - - 3 - - -
20AC41T.5 3 3 - - - - - - - - - 3 - - -
91
Title of the Course Theory of M achines

Category PCC
Course Code 20A341T
Year II B. Tech
Branch ME

3 0 0 3
Course Objectives:
 To enable the students in selection of appropriate mechanisms.
 To analyze the straight line motion mechanisms, steering mechanisms and Hooke‘s joint.
 To understand the kinematics of mechanisms and gears.
 To know the importance of gyroscope and its effects in an aeroplane & ship.
 To analyze the cam and follower systems, the clutches and governors.
 To understand the balancing of rotating masses and reciprocating masses.
 To understand the concept of vibratory systems and their analysis.
Unit 1 Simple Mechanisms, Lower Pair Mechanisms 12

Simple Mechanisms: Element or Link – Classification– Kinematic pair – Types – Constrained motion – types –
Degree of freedom– Grashof‘s law, kinematic inversions of four bar chain, single and double slider crank chains.
Lower Pair Mechanisms: Pantograph – Peaucellier mechanism – Steering gear mechanism: Ackermann, Davis –
Hooke‘s joint.
 Contrast the difference between machine and structure. (L4)
 identify different types of kinematic pairs, kinematic chains, find degrees of freedom for different mechanisms,
and identify the inversions of four bar mechanism (L2)
 analyze the strain line motion mechanisms, steering gear mechanisms and Hooke‘s joint (L4)
Unit 2 Velocity & Acceleration Analysis and Gyroscope 12

Velocity Analysis: Relative velocity method- Motion of Link – construction of velocity diagrams – determination of
angular velocity of points and links – four bar chain, single slider crank chain and other simple mechanisms.
Acceleration Analysis: Acceleration diagram for simple mechanisms – four bar mechanism and single slider
crank chain mechanism - determination of acceleration of points and angular acceleration of links – Corioli‘s
acceleration.
Gyroscope: Principle of gyroscope, gyroscopic effect in an aeroplane, ship
 calculate the velocities and acceleration of various links in a mechanism (L3)
 determine instantaneous centers for a given mechanism (L3)
 apply gyroscopic concept to various moving vehicles (L3)
Unit 3 Gears and Gear trains, Cams and Followers 14

Gears and Gear trains: Friction wheels and toothed gears – types – law of gearing – condition for constant
velocity ratio for transmission of motion – forms of teeth – Cycloidal and involute profiles – velocity of sliding, path
of contact, arc of contact and contact ratio – phenomena of interference –Types of gear trains-simple, compound,
reverted, and epicyclic–kinematics- simple problems.
Cams and Followers: Definitions – Cam and Follower – uses – types of followers – knife edge follower, roller
follower, flat face follower – radial followers only – types of cams – radial cam terminology – types of follower
motion – uniform velocity, simple harmonic, uniform acceleration and retardation motion – maximum velocity and
maximum acceleration during outward and return strokes.
92
 explain the different gear profiles and parameters (L2)
 identify different types of gear trains (L2)
 analyze the different motions in cam and followers (L3)
Unit 4 Clutches and Governors 10
Clutches: Single Disc or plate clutch, M ultiple Disc clutch, Cone clutch, centrifugal clutch
Governors: Watt, Porter, Proell governors, and Hartnell governors. Sensitiveness, isochronism and hunting.
 analyze the various types of clutches (L3)
 analyze the governor for an application (L3)
Unit 5 Vibrations and Gyroscope 18
Balancing of Rotating & Reciprocating masses: Need for balancing, balancing of single mass and several
masses in different planes-graphical methods -
Balancing of Reciprocating masses: Primary and Secondary balancing of reciprocating masses - graphical
method – balancing of locomotives – variation of tractive force, swaying couple, hammer blow.
Vibrations: Introduction, types of vibration – natural frequency of longitudinal and transverse vibrations –
transverse loads. Dunkerley‘s method, Whirling of shafts, torsional vibrations, single and two rotor systems.
 estimate natural frequency of vibratory systems (L5)
 Explain the importance of balancing and analyze balancing problems in rotating engines and reciprocating
engines. (L2)
1. S.S.Rattan ,Theory of M achines, 4/e, Tata M c-Graw Hill, 2014
2. R.S.Khurmi&J.K.Gupta, Theory of M ahines, S. Chand Publications.
Reference Books:
1. J.E.Shigley, Theory of M achines and M echanisms, 4/e, Oxford, 2014
2. P.L.Ballaney, Theory of M achines & M echanisms, 25/e, Khanna Publishers, Delhi, 2003.
3. Thomas Bevan, Theory of M achines, 3rd edition, CBS Publishers & Distributors, 2005.
4. JagadishLal, Theory of M echanisms and M achines, M etropolitan company pvt. Ltd.
5. R.K.Bansal, Theory of M achines, Lakshmi Publications.
Course Outcomes:
1. Understand different mechanisms and their inversions and straight line motion
L2
mechanisms, steering mechanisms and Hooke‘s joint
2. Calculate velocity and acceleration of different links in a mechanism and apply
L3, L4
the effects of gyroscopic couple in ships and aero planes.
3. Analyze gear system for a mechanism or machine and the cam and follower
L4
mechanism to obtain desired motion
4. Analyze the application of clutches and governors L4
5. Analyze natural frequency of vibratory system and evaluate unbalance mass in
L4, L5
rotating machines and reciprocating machines.
CO-PO Mapping:
PSO1
PSO2
PSO3
PO10
PO11
PO12
PO1
PO2
PO3
PO4
PO5
PO6
PO7
PO8
PO9
CO
20A341T.1 3 2 1 - - - - - 1 - 1 - - - -
20A341T.2 3 2 2 - - - - - 2 - 1 - - - -
20A341T.3 3 2 2 - - - - - 2 - 1 - - - -
20A341T.4 3 2 1 - - - - - 1 - 1 - - - -
20A341T.5 3 2 2 - - - - - 2 - 1 - - - -
93
Title of the Course Fluid M echanics and Hydraulic M achines

Category PCC
Course Code 20A342T
Year II B. Tech
Branch ME

3 0 0 3
Course Objectives:
 To give insight knowledge on fluid statics and kinematics.
 To gain knowledge on fluid dynamics.
 To give basic understanding of Hydro Electric power plant and importance of impact of jets.
 To become familiar about different types of turbines and able to analyze the performance characteristics of
various turbines.
 To be able to understand the working of power absorbing devices like pumps and able to analyze their
performance characteristics.
Unit 1 Fluid Statics & Fluid Kinematics 10

Dimensions and units: physical properties of fluids- specific gravity, viscosity, Newton's law of viscosity and
surface tension vapour pressure - atmospheric gauge and vacuum pressure – measurement of pressure
Piezometer, U-tube and differential manometers – Buoyancy, meta-centre, metacentre height, condition of
equilibrium height of a floating and submerged bodies.
Fluid Kinematics: Stream line, path line, streak lines and stream tube, classification of flows-steady & unsteady,
uniform & non uniform, laminar & turbulent, rotational & irrotational flows. Equation of continuity for one
dimensional flow.
Learning Outcomes: At the end of the unit, the s tudents will be able to
 Understand the concept of fluid mechanics fundamentals like fluid statics and fluid kinematics. (L2)
 Solve problems on pressures of fluids. (L3)
 Learn the different kind of flows and flow lines. (L1)
Unit 2 Fluid Dynamics & Closed Conduit Flow 8

Surface and body forces –Euler‘s and Bernoulli‘s equations for flow along a stream line, Applications of Bernoulli‘s
equations- M easurement of flow: Pitot tube, venturi meter and orifice meter. M omentum equation and its
application on force on pipe bend. Vortex flow-Free and forced (Elementary Treatment).
Closed Conduit Flow: Reynold‘s experiment- Darcy Weisbach equation- M inor losses in pipes- pipes in series and
pipes in parallel- total energy line-hydraulic gradient line.
 Understand the fundamental equations in fluid dynamics. (L2)
 Determine the total energy of fluids and able to draw the energy lines. (L4)
Unit 3 Hydroelectric Power Stations 8

Elements of hydroelectric power station-types. Concept of pumped storage plants- storage requirements.
Basics of Turbo M achinery: Hydrodynamic force of jets on stationary and moving flat, inclined, and curved vanes,
jet striking centrally and at tip, velocity diagrams, work done and efficiency, flow over radial vanes.
 Learn the concept of hydro electric power plants. (L1)
 Calculate the work done and efficiency of plates at different positions. (L3)
 Calculate the force exerted by the jet on vanes at different positions. (L3)
94
Unit 4 Hydraulic Turbines 10
Classification of turbines, impulse and reaction turbines, Pelton wheel, Francis turbine and Kaplan turbine-working
proportions, work done, efficiencies, hydraulic design –draft tube theory- functions and efficiency.
Performance of Hydraulic Turbines: Geometric similarity, Unit and specific quantities, characteristic curves,
governing of turbines, selection of type of turbine, cavitation, water hammer.
 Understand the working of different turbines. (L2)
 Draw the velocity triangles and able to determine the work done and efficiency of different turbines. (L3)
 Understand the performance of different turbines. (L2)
Unit 5 Hydraulic Pumps 11

Classification, working, work done – mano metric head, losses and efficiencies, specific speed, pumps in series
and parallel .performance - characteristic curves, NPSH.
Reciprocating Pumps: Working, Discharge, slip, indicator diagrams.
Learning Outcomes: Students able to
 Classify the hydraulic pumps. (L2)
 Calculate the performance of the different types of Hydraulic Pumps. (L5)

1. Fluid M echanics and Hydraulic machines by Dr. R.K.Bansal
2. Hydraulics and Fluid M echanics including Hydraulic M achines by Dr. P.N.M odi and Dr. S.M .Seth
Reference Books:
1. D.S. Kumar, Fluid M echanics and Fluid Power Engineering. Kotaria& Sons – 2013 edition
2. D. Rama Durgaiah, Fluid M echanics and M achinery. New Age International, 1st edition – 2002
3. Banga& Sharma, Hydraulic M achines.Khanna Publishers.
4. James W. Dally, William E. Riley, Instrumentation for Engineering M easurements. John Wiley & Sons Inc,
2nd edition – 2010.
Course Outcomes:
1. Gain the knowledge on fluid mechanics fundamentals like fluid statics and fluid L1,L2 & L3
kinematics
2. Apply the fundamental equations used in Fluid Dynamics and are able to apply L3
these concepts in real working environment
3. Determine the forces exerted by jet in various wanes used in turbo machinery. L3
4. M easure the performance of the different types of Hydraulic Turbines. L2 & L3
5. Calculate the performance of the different types of Hydraulic Pump. L2 & L3
CO-PO Mapping:
PSO1
PSO2
PSO3
PO10
PO11
PO12
PO1
PO2
PO3
PO4
PO5
PO6
PO7
PO8
PO9
CO
20A342T.1 3 3 3 - 3 - 3 - - - - - 1 - -
20A342T.2 3 3 3 - 3 - - - - - - - 1 - -
20A342T.3 3 3 3 3 - - - - - 1 - - 1 - -
20A342T.4 3 3 3 3 3 - - - 2 - - - 1 - -
20A342T.5 3 3 3 3 3 - - - 2 - - - 1 - -
95
Title of the Course Design of M achine Elements - I

Category PCC
Course Code 20A343T
Year II B. Tech
Branch ME

3 0 0 3
Course Objectives:
 To introduce the concepts of design of machine elements.
 To familiarize with fundamental approaches to failure prevention for static and dynamic loading.
 To explain the design procedures of different types of joints.
 To familiarize with various theories related the design of machine elements for different loading conditions.
Unit 1 Design for Static Loads 11

Introduction: General considerations of design, design process. Selection of Engineering materials - properties –
M anufacturing considerations in the design. BIS codes of materials. Preferred numbers.
Design for static loads: M odes of failure, Design of components subjected to axial, bending, torsion and
combined loads. Theories of failure for static loads.
 Learn the basics of machine elements (L1)
 Learn the M odes of failure under static load condition. (L1)
 Design of components subjected to different loads. (L6)
Unit 2 Design for Dynamic Loads 10
Stress concentration –notch sensitivity, Types of fluctuating loads– Design for fluctuating stresses –finite life -
Endurance limit - Estimation of Endurance limit – Soderberg, Goodman and M odified Goodman criterion for
fatigue failure.
 Learn the basics of stress concentration, notch sensitivity and types of fluctuating loading. (L1)
 Apply the theories of failures in designing of machine elements subjected to dynamic loads. (L3)
Unit 3 Design of Bolted and Welded joints 14

Design of Bolted Joints: Preload of bolts, various stresses induced in the bolts, torque requirement for bolt
tightening, eccentrically loaded joints.
Design of Welded Joints: Stresses of lap and butt welds, eccentrically loaded welded joints. Joints subjected to
bending and torsion.
 Learn the basics of different types of joints. (L1)
 Analyze stresses induced in joints subjected to different loads. (L4)
 Design different joints subjected to combined loading. (L6)
Unit 4 Design of Keys, Cotter and Knuckle Joints 8

Keys: Design of sunk, saddle, Kennedy and woodruff keys.
Cotter and Knuckle Joints: Socket and spigot joint, Sleeve and Cotter joints, Gib and Cotter joint, Knuckle joint.
 Gain knowledge on keys and cotter joints. (L1)
 Design procedure for keys. (L6)
 Design procedure for cotter joints. (L6)
96
Unit 5 Design of Shafts and Couplings 8
Shafts: Design of solid and hollow shafts bending, torsion, axial and combined bending and axial loading.
Shaft Couplings: Design of Rigid couplings-M uff, Split muff and Flange couplings-Flexible couplings: bushed pin
type.
 Gain knowledge on shafts and couplings. (L1)
 Design shafts under different loading conditions. (L6)
 Design of couplings under loading conditions. (L6)
Note: Allow the date book for External examination

1. V B Bhandari, Design of machine elements, 4th edition, TM H, 2017. ISBN 9780070611412
2. Pandya & Shah, M achine design, 20th edition, Charotar Publishers, 2009. ISBN : 978-93-85039-10-2
3. R.S. Khurmi &J.S.Gupta, M achine Design, S.Chand Publications, 2014. ISBN-13: 978-8121905015
Reference Books:
1. J.E. Shigley, M achine design, TM H, 2015. ISBN-10: 9780073398204
2. T. Krishna Rao, Design of M achine Elements-I. I.K. International, 2010. ISBN 9789381141373
3. M .F. Spotts, Design of M achine Elements. PHI, 2006. ISBN 9788177584219
4. Kannaiah,M achine Design. Scietech, 2009. ISBN 13: 9788183711517
5. M achine Design, Schaum series, ISBN 13: 9780070255951.
Course Outcomes:
1. Identify the suitable materials for machine elements, apply the codes and L1, L6
standards in design, and apply theories of failures in designing of machine
elements subjected to static loads.
2. Apply theories of failures in designing of machine elements subjected to L3
dynamic loads.
3. Identify different types of joints; analyze stresses induced in joints subjected to L1, L4, L6
different loads, and design different joints subjected to combined loading.
4. Design keys, cotter and knuckle joints subjected to various loads. L6
5. Design the shafts subjected to various loads, selection of shaft couplings for a L1, L6
given application and outline the design procedure.
CO-PO Mapping:
PSO1
PSO2
PSO3
PO10
PO11
PO12
PO1
PO2
PO3
PO4
PO5
PO6
PO7
PO8
PO9
CO
20A343T.1 3 2 - - - - - - 2 - - - - - -
20A343T.2 3 3 - - - - - - 2 - - - - - -
20A343T.3 3 3 - - - - - - 3 - - - - - -
20A343T.4 3 3 - - - - - - 3 - - - - - -
20A343T.5 3 3 - - - - - - 3 - - - - - -
97
Department of Business Administration
Title of the Course M anagerial Economics & Financial Analysis

Category HSM C
Course Code 20AC45T
Year II B. Tech.
Branch ME

3 0 0 3
Course Objectives:
 To understand the concepts and tools of economic analysis.
 To apply concepts in real life by developing problem solving skills there exists a relationship between
M anagerial Economics and Financial Accounting.
 To focus on picking up the basics of accounting such as Accounting Data and Financial Statements, which
constitute the language of Business.
 The student is exposed and made familiar with journalizing, interpretation and use of Accounting Data
Unit 1 Introduction to Managerial Economics and Demand Analysis 12

Managerial Economics: M eaning and Nature, Definition, Scope, relationship with other areas.
Demand Analysis: Definition and types of Demand, Demand Determinants, and Law of Demand and its
exceptions, Elasticity of Demand-types, measurement and Significance, Demand forecasting methods.
 Remember the scope and relationship with other areas of M anagerial Economics. (L1)
 Explain types of demand and demand forecasting methods. (L2)
Unit 2 Production and Cost Analysis 10

Production: Production Function, Cobb-Douglas Production function, Iso-quants and Iso-costs, M RTS, Least
Cost Combination of Inputs, Laws of Returns, Internal and External Economies of Scale.
Cost Analysis: Cost concepts, Determinants of cost, cost-output relationship in short run and Long run.
Break-Even Analysis (BEA): Objectives, Assumptions, Importance, Graphical representation, Limitations, simple
numerical problems.
 Remember production function and economies of Scale. (L1)
 Differentiate cost concepts. (L4)
 Explain BEP concepts in practically. (L1)
Unit 3 Market Structure and Forms of Business Organizations 12

Markets: Perfect market, imperfect market- M onopoly, M onopolistic and Oligopoly M arkets. Price-output
determination in perfect competition and monopoly in long run and short run.
Forms Of Business Organizations: Definition, Forms of Business Organizations-Private Sector-sole
proprietorship, Partnership, Joint Hindu family business, co-operative societies, joint stock companies.
Public Sector- Departmental organizations, public corporations, government companies.
 State the functions of different forms of business organizations. (L1)
 Define Perfect market, imperfect market- M onopoly, M onopolistic and Oligopoly M arkets(L1)
Unit 4 Capital and Capital Budgeting 10

Capital: Definition of Capital and its significance, Types of Capital, Sources of raising Capital.
Capital Budgeting: Definition, Nature and scope of capital budgeting, features of capital budgeting, M ethods of
Capital Budgeting: Payback M ethod, Accounting Rate of Return (ARR) and Net Present Value M ethod,
98
Profitability Index M ethod (Simple Problems).
 Remember types and Sources of raising Capital. (L1)
 Compare and select techniques of Investment Analysis.(L4)
Unit 5 Introduction to Financial Accounting and Analysis 10

Financial Accounting: Accounting definition, Principles of accounting, Book Keeping, Journal, Ledger, Trial
Balance, Final Accounts (Trading Account, Profit and Loss Account and Balance Sheet with simple adjustments).
Financial Analysis: Definition of Financial Analysis, Ratios and its significance- types- liquidity Ratios, turnover
Ratios - solvency Ratios and profitability ratios
 Understand Financial Accounting Concepts(L1)
 Use Financial Accounting and Analysis in practical life (L3)
1. Gupta: M anagerial Economics, TM H, 2009
2. Varshney & M aheswari: M anagerial Economics, Sultan Chand, 2003
3. M ehta P.L., M anagerial Economics-Analysis, Problems, Cases, S Chand and Sons,New Delhi, 2001.
4. M .E.Thukaram Rao., Accounting for M anagers, New Age International Publishers.
5. T.S, Reddy and Y. Hari Prasad Reddy, Accounting and Financial M anagement, M argham Publications.
Reference Books:
1. Ambrish Gupta, Financial Accounting for M anagement, Pearson Education, New Delhi.
2. H. Craig Peterson & W. Cris Lewis, M anagerial Economics, PHI, 4th Edition.
3. Suma Damodaran, M anagerial Economics, Oxford University Press.
4. Lipsey & Chrystel, Economics, Oxford University Press.
5. Domnick Salvatore: M anagerial Economics In a Global Economy, 4th Edition,Thomson.
Course Outcomes:
1. Predict the demand for a product or product mix of a company and to analyze
L1
various factors influencing demand elasticity.
2. Assess the cost behavior, costs useful for managerial decision making
L2
and determine Break Even Point (BEP) of an enterprise.
3. Differentiate private and public sector undertakings in their promotion,
L2
incorporation, regulation, administration, legal formalities and existence.
4. List features, steps, merits, uses & limitations of Pay Back, ARR, NPV, PI and
L3
IRR methods of Capital Budgeting and compute rank of the projects.
5. Analyze, interpret and comment on the financial statements of a business
L3 & L4
enterprise by using liquidity leverage, coverage and turnover & profitability ratios.
CO-PO Mapping:
PSO1
PSO2
PSO3
PO10
PO11
PO12
PO1
PO2
PO3
PO4
PO5
PO6
PO7
PO8
PO9
CO
20AC45T.1 2 - - - 2 - 2 - - - - - - - -
20AC45T.2 - 3 - - - - - - - - - - - - -
20AC45T.3 2 - 1 - 2 - - - - - 2 - - - -
20AC45T.4 - - - - - - - - - - 3 - - - -
20AC45T.5 2 2 - - - - 2 - - - - - - - -
99
Title of the Course Theory of M achines Lab
Category PCC
Course Code 20A341L
Year II B. Tech.
Branch ME

0 0 3 1.5
Course Objectives:
 To understand the fundamentals of the theory of kinematics and dynamics of machines.
 To understand techniques for studying motion of machines and their components.
 To understand the vibrational behavior of systems, principles of gyroscope and governors.
List of Experiments:
1. To study various types of Links, Pairs, Chain and M echanism
2. To study inversion of four Bar M echanism, Single Slider Crank Chain M echanism and Double Slider Crank
Chain M echanism.
3. To study various types of steering mechanisms
4. To study various kinds of belt drives
5. To study Different types of Gears
6. Forced vibrations of a spring-mass system
7. Determination of Torsional natural frequency of single and two rotor system
8. Study of gyroscopic effect and couple
9. Determination of characteristic curves of Watt Governor
10. Determination of damped natural frequency of Torsional vibrating system
11. Determination of characteristic curves of Proell Governor
12. To study various types of Cam and Follower arrangement
Note: Any 10 experiments need to be performed

Course Outcomes:
1. Demonstrate the working of simple bar, link and steering mechanisms. L3
2. Distinguish different types of gears and belt drives and their applications. L2
3. Apply the principles of gyroscopic effects and stabilization on various transport L3
vehicles and applications of various governors.
4. Determine the vibration parameters of different systems. L5
CO-PO Mapping:
PO10
PO11
PO12
PSO1
PSO2
PSO3
PO1
PO2
PO3
PO4
PO5
PO6
PO7
PO8
PO9
CO
20A341L.1 1 - 1 2 - - - - - - - - 1 - -
20A341L.2 1 - 1 - - - - - - - - - 1 - -
20A341L.3 2 - - - - - - - - - - - 2 - -
20A341L.4 2 - 3 - - - - - - - - - 3 - -
20A341L.5 2 - - 3 - - - - - - - - 3 - -
100
Title of the Course Fluid M echanics and Hydraulic M achines Lab

Category PCC
Course Code 20A342L
Year II B. Tech
Branch ME

0 0 3 1.5
Course Objectives:
 To provide knowledge in verifying Bernoulli‘s Theorem.
 To impact knowledge in fluid flow measuring devices like Venturimeter & Orifice meter.
 To understand frictional losses in pipes with various diameters.
 To acquire knowledge about various hydraulic machines like centrifugal pump, reciprocating pump, Pelton
wheel, Francis turbine, Kaplan turbine etc.
 To understand impact of jet on vanes like flat vane & semi circular vane.
 To develop the students in learning the various principles of fluid mechanics & hydraulic machines, so that
they can characterize, transform and use the knowledge gained in solving the various related engineering
problems.
List of Experiments
1. Verification Of Bernoulli‘s Theorem

2. Flow Through Venturimeter
3. Flow Through Orifice meter
4. Determination of frictional losses in a given pile line.
5. Determination of loss of head due to sudden contraction in a pipeline.
6. Performance Test On Single Stage Centrifugal Pump
7. Performance Test On M ulti Stage Centrifugal Pump
8. Performance Test On Reciprocating Pump
9. Impact Of Jet On Vanes
10. Performance Test On Pelton Wheel
11. Performance Test On Francis Turbine
12. Performance Test On Kaplan Turbine
13. Turbine flow meter.
Note: Any 10 of the above 13 experiments are to be conducted.
Course Outcomes:
1. Verify the Bernoulli‘s Theorem L3
2. M easure the flow rate of fluids by the instruments like Venturimeter and Orifice
L3
meter.
3. Analyze the frictional losses and discharge in pipes. L3
4. Analyze impact of jet on vanes like flat & semi circular vane. L3
5. Conduct experiments, analyze the data and interpret results of hydraulic
L3
machineries.
101
CO-PO Mapping:
PSO1
PSO2
PSO3
PO10
PO11
PO12
PO1
PO2
PO3
PO4
PO5
PO6
PO7
PO8
PO9
CO
20A342L.1 3 - 2 - - - - - - - - - 2 - -
20A342L.2 2 1 - - - - - - - - - - 2 - -
20A342L.3 2 1 1 - - - - - - - - - 1 - -
20A342L.4 2 1 2 - - - - - - - - - 2 - -
20A342L.5 3 2 3 2 - - - - - - - - 3 2 1
102
Title of the Course M achine Drawing lab

Category PCC
Course Code 20A344L
Year II B. Tech.
Branch ME

0 0 3 1.5
Course Objectives:
 To understand drawing practice as per BIS conventions for mechanical elements.
 To familiarize the students bolted joints and riveted joints.
 To prepare assembly drawings.
List of Exercises:
Part – I: Exercises on conventional drawings of machine elements and simple parts

1. Conventional representation of materials and machine components.
2. Different types of thread profiles-Square, M etric, ACM E, Worm.
3. Hexagonal and square headed bolts and nuts.
4. Riveted joints for plates.
Part – II: Exercises on conventional assembly drawings of any 5 assembly drawing from the following.
1. Assembly of Knuckle Joint
2. Assembly of Screw Jack
3. Assembly of Plummer Block
4. Assembly of Simple Eccentric
5. Assembly of Stuffing Box
6. Assembly of Steam engine Crosshead
1. K.L.Narayana, P.Kannaiah, A text book on M achine Drawing, SciTech Publications, 2014. ISBN-
13: 978-8122440546, ISBN-10: 8122440541- 2014
2. N.D.Bhatt, M achine Drawing, Charotar, 50/e, ISBN: 9789385039232, 2014.
3. Dhawan, M achine Drawing. S.Chand Publications. 2015, ISBN: 8121908248, 9788121908245
Reference Books:
1. P.S.Gill, M achine Drawing, S K Kataria& Sons. 2013. ISBN: 9789350144169, 9350144166
2. Luzzader, M achine Drawing 11th edition, ISBN 13: 9780132844307. Prentice-Hall of India, 1995
3. K.C.John, Textbook of M achine Drawing. PHI learning, 2009 ISBN 9788120337213
Course Outcomes:
1. Demonstrate the conventional representation of materials and machine L1
components.
2. Identify different types of bolts, nuts and screw threads. L1
3. Prepare detail drawing of a given object. L2
4. Draw details and assembly of mechanical system. L2
103
CO-PO Mapping:
PSO1
PSO2
PSO3
PO10
PO11
PO12
PO1
PO2
PO3
PO4
PO5
PO6
PO7
PO8
PO9
CO
20A344L.1 2 - 2 - - - - - - 2 - - 2 - 2
20A344L.2 2 - 2 - - - - - - 2 - - 2 - 2
20A344L.3 2 - 2 - - - - - - 2 - - 2 - 2
20A344L.4 2 - 2 - - - - - - 2 - - 2 - 2
104
Title of the Course Life Sciences for Engineers

Category MC
Course Code 20AC44T
Year II B. Tech.
Branch EEE, ECE, ME
Lecture Hours Tutorial Hours Practical Credits

3 0 0 0
Course Objectives:
 To introduce the origin of life.
 To provide the basis for classification of living organisms.
 To describe the transfer of genetic information.
 To introduce the techniques used for modification of living organisms.
 To describe the applications of biomaterials
Unit 1 The Living World 8

Nature and Scope of Biology,Origin and Evolution of Life, Systematics, Classification of living organisms, Viruses,
Prokaryotes and Eukaryotes.
 Explain the concept of origin of life. (L2)
 Classify the different types of organisms. (L2)
Unit 2 Cell and Cell Division 8

Plant cell and Animal cell, Structure of the cell: Nucleus, Ribosome‘s. M olecules of the cell: Nucleic acids, Cell Cycle:
M itosis, M eiosis.
 Discusses the structure and function of the cell. (L2)
 Differentiate the stages of cell division. (L2)
Unit 3 Physiology of Plants and Animals 12

Photosynthesis, Respiration: Types of respirations, Glycolysis, TCA Cycle, Nervous system,Endocrine system in
animals.
 Describe the importance of photosynthesis and respiration process. (L1)
 Explain the vital role of Co-ordinate system in animals. (L2)
Unit 4 Genetics 12
Genetic basis of Inheritance, M endel‘s laws, Human genetic disorders: Hemophilia, Colour Blindness, Autosomal
abnormalities: Down‘s, Patau‘s and Edward‘s syndromes. Genetic Engineering: Recombinant vaccines, Basis of DNA
finger Printing, Animal cloning.
 Define the gene and its importance in heredity. (L1)
 Describe the effects of gene mutations. (L2)
 Apply the concept of genetic engineering in development of vaccines. (L3)
105
Unit 5 Biology in Human Welfare 8
Parasitism, Plasmodium vivax, Wuchereria bancrofti, Health and Disease: Bacterial, Viral diseases:HIV, Biomedical
technologies: X-Ray, CT- Scan, M RI- Scan, PET-Scan.
Learning Outcomes :At the end of the unit, the student will be able to:
 Identify the causes of pathogenic diseases and effects on human health. (L1)
 Explain the importance of biomedical techniques. (L2)
Prescribed Textbooks
1. N. A. Campbell, J. B. Reece, L. Urry, M . L. Cain and S. A. Wasserman, ―Biology: A global approach‖, Pearson
Education Ltd, 2018.
2. Arthur T Johnson, Biology for Engineers, CRC press, 2011
Reference Books
1. Alberts Et.Al. The molecular biology of the cell, 6/e, Garland Science, 2014
2. E. E. Conn, P. K. Stumpf, G. Bruening and R. H. Doi, ―Outlines of Biochemistry‖, John Wiley and Sons, 2009.
3. John Enderle and Joseph Bronzino Introduction to Biomedical Engineering, 3/e, 2012
4. PS Verma | VK Agarwal.Cell Biology, Genetics, M olecular Biology, Evolution and Ecology, S. Chand Publishing,
2004.
Course Outcomes:
1. Explain stages of Systematics. L2
2. Summarize application of biomolecules. L2
3. Identify DNA as a genetic material in the molecular basis of information transfer. L3
4. Analyze biological processes at the Genetic Engineering. L4
5. Identify the potential of recombinant DNA technology. L3
CO-PO Mapping:
PO10
PO11
PO12
PS01
PS02
PS03
PO1
PO2
PO3
PO4
PO5
PO6
PO7
PO8
PO9
COs
20AC44T.1 2 2 - - - 2 - - - - - 2 - - -
20AC44T.2 2 2 - - - 2 - - - - - 2 - - -
20AC44T.3 3 3 - - - 3 - - - - - 3 - - -
20AC44T.4 3 3 - - - 3 - - - - - 3 - - -
20AC44T.5 2 2 - - - 2 - - - - - 2 - - -
106
Title of the Course Python Programming

Category SC
Course Code 20A545L
Year II B. Tech.
Branch EEE, ME and ECE

1 0 2 2
Course Objectives:
 To learn basics of computational problem solving, python programming and basic control structures.
 To understand python programming basic constructs like lists, dictionaries, sets and functions
 To apply module design and usage of text files in python programming
Module 1 Theory Hours: 4, Practice sessions: 6

Introduction to python programming language, literals, variables and identifiers, operators, expressions and data types.
Control Structures: Boolean expressions, selection control, and iterative control.
 Understand the importance of python programming (L2)
 remember control structures and use them in the python programs (L2)

Lists: List structures, lists in python, iterating over lists in python, more on python lists. Dictionaries and sets, tuple.
 Construct python programs using list type (L3)
 Demonstrate programs on dictionaries and sets, tuple. (L3)

Functions: Program routines, more on functions, M odule Design: M odules, Top-Down design, python modules
 illustrate the importance of module and use them (L3)
 infer programs on text files (L4)

Text Files: Text File, Using Text files, string processing, exception handling
 describe about text files and use in python programs (L3)
 analyze string processing and exception handling in programming (L4)

Introduction to Object oriented programming: class, three fundamental features of object oriented programming,
encapsulation-what is encapsulation, defining classes in python. Inheritance: subtypes, defining subclasses in python,
Polymorphism: use of polymorphism.
 describe the fundamentals of object oriented programming (L3)
 reframe programs using class and object in python programming(L5)

1. Introduction to Computer Science Using Python: A Computational Problem-Solving Focus, Charles Dierbach.
107
Reference Books:
1. Python Programming using problem solving approach, ReemaThareja, Oxford University press
2. Python Programming: An Introduction to Computer Science, John Zelle, Franklin,Beedle& Associates Inc.,3 rd
Edition
3. Think Python: How to think like a computer Scientist, Allen Downey 2nd Edition O‘Reilly Publications.
Course Outcomes:
At the end of the course s tudent will be able to Blooms Level of Learning
1. Understand computational problem solving and basic elements of python L2
programming.
2. Construct python programming basic constructs like lists, tuple, dictionaries, and L3
sets.
3. Implement string processing and exception handling in programming L5
4. Analyze string processing and exception handling in programming. L4
5. Reframe programs using class and object in python programming. L5
CO-PO Mapping:
PSO1
PSO2
PSO3
PO10
PO11
PO12
PO1
PO2
PO3
PO4
PO5
PO6
PO7
PO8
PO9
CO
20A545L.1 3 - 3 - - - - - - - - 3 - - -
20A545L.2 3 - 3 3 - - - - - - - 3 - - -
20A545L.3 3 - 3 3 - - - - - - - 3 - - -
20A545L.4 3 - 3 3 - - - - - - - 3 - - -
20A545L.5 3 - 3 3 - - - - - - - 3 - - -
108
Title of the Course Applied Thermodynamics

Category PCC
Course Code 20A351T
Year III B. Tech

Semester I Semester
Branch ME

3 0 0 3
Course Objectives:
 To familiarize about the Rankine cycle used for steam power plant & steam boilers.
 To impart knowledge on the working of nozzles and condensers used in steam power plants.
 To impart knowledge on the working of steam turbines.
 To understand the principle and operation of gas turbines and jet propulsions.
 To acquire knowledge on different Refrigeration & Air conditioning systems
Unit 1 Introduction to steam power plant 9

Rankine cycle - Schematic layout, Thermodynamic Analysis, Concept of M ean Temperature of Heat addition,
M ethods to improve cycle performance – Regeneration – reheating.
Boilers: Classification based on Working principles - Fire tube boilers, water tube boilers – High pressure Boilers
 Explain the concepts of vapour power cycle used in steam power plant. (L2)
 Classify the Boilers and to know their working principle. (L4)
Unit 2 Steam Nozzles & Condensers 9

Steam Nozzles: Function of nozzle – applications - types, Flow through nozzles, thermodynamic analysis –
assumptions -velocity of nozzle at exit- Ideal and actual expansion in nozzle, velocity coefficient, condition for
maximum discharge, critical pressure ratio.
Condensers: Requirements of steam condensing plant, rare fraction – Classification of condensers – working
principle of different types – vacuum efficiency and condenser efficiency – air leakage, sources and its effects.
 Compare the performance of nozzles, used in turbines. (L2)
 Classify the condensers and their application. (L4)
Unit 3 Steam Turbines 8

Classification of steam turbines -impulse turbine and reaction turbine -compounding in turbines - velocity diagrams
in impulse and reaction turbines, efficiency, degree of reaction - governing of turbines.
 Classify steam turbines and applications. (L4)
 Analyse the performance of steam turbines under different operating conditions. (L5)
Unit 4 Gas Turbines & Jet Propulsion 8

Gas Turbines: Simple gas turbine plant, Brayton cycle, closed cycle and open cycle for gas turbines, actual cycle.
M ethods to improve performance: regeneration, intercooling and reheating.
Introduction to jet propulsion: working principle of ramjet, turbojet, turboprop and pulse jet engines, Thrust, Thrust
Power and Propulsion Efficiency.
● Evaluate the cycles used in gas turbines. (L5)
● Outline the jet propulsion system (L2)
109
Unit 5 Refrigeration & Air Conditioning 12
Refrigeration: Bell-Coleman cycle - Unit of refrigeration and C.O.P. vapour compression cycle, effect of sub
cooling and super heating- numerical Problems.
Vapour Absorption Refrigeration System: Description and working of NH3- water system, Li Br –water ( Two shell
& Four shell) System, Principle of operation of three Fluid absorption systems, properties of common refrigerants.
Principles of Psychrometry and Air Conditioning: Psychrometric properties & processes and air conditioning
systems - Summer, Winter & year round air conditioning systems.
 Outline the operation of refrigerators. (L2)
 Identify different refrigerants and applications.(L3)
 Use properties of moist air in calculations for air-conditioning system. (L3)
1. Thermal Engineering. M ahesh M Rathore, TM H.1st Ed.2010 - ISBN-13: 978-0070681132
2. Thermal Engineering, R.K. Rajput, S.Chand & Co., 6th edition, Laxmi publications, 2010. ISBN-
9788131808047.
3. Thermal Engineering, M .L.M athur and F.S.M ehta, 4th edition, Jain brothers,2016, ISBN-13 ‫‏‬: ‫‏‬978-
8183600781
4. A Course in Refrigeration and Air conditioning, SC Arora & Domkundwar, Dhanpat Rai & Co 2015. ISBN-13:
978-1111644475.
5. Gas Turbines, V. Ganesan, TM H Publishers, New Delhi.3rd Ed 2017, ISBN: 978-0-07-068192-7.
Reference Books:
1. Thermodynamics: An Engineering Approach, Cengal .Y.A and Boles M .A, 5/e, McGraw-Hill,8th Ed 2017,
ISBN-13 : ‫‏‬978-9339221652.
2. Thermal Engineering. R. S Khurmi & JS Gupta, S.Chand. 16th Ed.2020. ISBN 9788121925730.
3. Gas Turbine & Jet Rocket Propulsion, M athur M L, Standard Publishers Distributors, 2010, ISBN-13 ‫‏‬:‫‏‬978-
8180140624
4. Basic Refrigeration and Air Conditioning, Ananthanarayanan, TM H 3rd Edition. 2013. ISBN: 9781259062704.
5. A text book of Refrigeration and Air Conditioning by R.K Rajput , S K Kataria & sons, 4 th Edition 2013. ISBN-
13 ‫‏‬: ‫‏‬978-9350142554.
Course Outcomes:
1. Understand the basic cycle, working principle of steam power plant and
L1
classification of boilers
2. Analyze the function of Nozzles and categorize the condensers used in steam
L2
power plant.
3. Classify and evaluate the performance of Steam Turbines. L3
4. Understand the basic cycle, working principle and classification of gas turbines
L1
and Jet propulsion systems.
5. Analyze the basic cycle, working principle of vapour compression & vapour
absorption Refrigeration systems and understand the concepts air conditioning L2
systems.
CO-PO Mapping:
PSO1
PSO2
PSO3
PO10
PO11
PO12
PO1
PO2
PO3
PO4
PO5
PO6
PO7
PO8
PO9
CO
20A351T.1 3 3 - - - - 2 - - - 1 2 3 1 -
20A351T.2 3 3 - - - - 1 - - - - 2 3 1 1
20A351T.3 3 3 - - - - 2 - - - 1 2 3 1 1
20A351T.4 3 3 - - - - 2 - - - - 2 3 1 -
20A351T.5 3 3 - - - - 2 - - - 1 2 3 1 1
110
Title of the Course M achining Processes

Category PCC
Course Code 20A352T
Year III B. Tech

Semester I Semester
Branch ME

3 0 0 3
Course Objectives:
 To explain parameters in the metal cutting operation.
 To relate tool wear and tool life and the variables that controls them.
 To calculate machining times for different machining processes.
 To teach various metal cutting processes. (Lathe, drilling, boring shaping, slotting, milling and grindin g).
 To familiarize the principles of jigs and fixtures and types of clamping and work holding devices.
Unit 1 Theory of Metal Cutting 12

Introduction to orthogonal and oblique cutting, M erchant Circle Diagram, M echanics of M achining, types of chip,
single point, Nomenclature (ORS & ASA) and multi-point cutting tools, forces in turning process; Cutting tool
materials, tool wear, tool life and cutting fluids
 Classify various types of chips, cutting tool materials and cutting fluids. (L2)
 Solve problems on cutting force, speed and feed finding techniques during machining. (L3)
 Describe cutting processes and variables. (L2)
Unit 2 Turning Machines & Operations 12

Centre lathe, constructional features, specifications, lathe operations – taper turning methods, thread cutting –
calculations of machining time. Capstan and turret lathes-tool layout – Automatic lathes: semi-automatic – single
spindle: Swiss type, automatic screw type – multi spindle
 List the specifications for various types of lathes. (L1)
 Determine cutting speeds for different machining operations. (L3)
Unit 3 Reciprocating and Rotary Based Machine Tools 10

Shaper, Planer and Slotter- Construction, Types and operations.
Drilling machines -construction, specifications, types, and operations performed – Reaming and Boring
M illing machines: types, working principle, Dividing head and Index, methods of indexing – Simple Indexing,
M illing cutters types
 Recognize the parts of milling, shaping, slotting and planning machine. (L1)
 Compare tool geometry for milling, shaping, slotting and planning operations. (L4)
 Identify parts of drilling. (L1)
Unit 4 Abrasive Processes and Broaching 10

Grinding wheel – Specification of grinding wheel and selection, types of grinding process– cylindrical grinding,
surface grinding, Center less grinding, internal grinding- micro finishing methods - Typical applications – concepts
of surface integrity.
Broaching machines: broach construction, types – push, pull broach.
Super finishing: Honing (Types and Construction), Lapping, Buffing, Burnishing and polishing process.
111
 Understand the basic principles of abrasive processes. (L2)
 Explain the designation of the grinding wheel and the significance of the various codes. (L2)
 Explain various types of abrasive processes such as honing and lapping for final finishing operation. (L2)
Unit 5 Jigs & Fixtures 6

M aterials used in Jigs & Fixtures, Principles of work holding, design of Jigs and fixtures and uses, Classification of
Jigs & Fixtures – Principles of location and clamping– Types of clamping - Typical examples of jigs and fixtures.
 Classify various types of jigs and fixtures. (L2)
 Identify various types of work and tool holding devices. (L2)
 Explain the design principles of jigs and fixtures. (L2)

1. P.N. Rao, M anufacturing Technology: M etal Cutting and M achine Tools, (Volume 2), 3/e, Tata M cGraw-Hill
Education, 2013 ISBN-13 ‫‏‬: ‫‏‬978-0074638439
2. R.K. Jain and S.C. Gupta, Production Technology, 17/e, Khanna Publishers, 2012. ISBN:978-81-7409-099-7
Reference Books:
1. Kalpakzian S and Schmid SR, M anufacturing Engineering and Technology, 7/e, Pearson, 2018. ISBN-13 ‫‏‬:
‫‏‬978-9332587908
2. M ilton C.Shaw , M etal Cutting Principles, 2/e, Oxford, 2012. 2012ISBN: 9780195142068
3. V.K.Jain, Advanced M achining Process,12/e, Allied Publications, 2010. ISBN 11, 577–583
4. Halmi A Yousuf& Hassan, , M achine Technology: M achine Tools and Operations, CRC Press Taylor and
Francis Group, 2008. ISBN-13 ‫‏‬: ‫‏‬978-0136353010.
Course Outcomes:
1. Understand the fundamentals of metal cutting, chip formation and problems L2 & L3
solving on chip formations, cutting forces involved in orthogonal metal cutting,
and different cutting forces, tool materials and cutting fluids will be learned.
2. Understand the classification of cylindrical work parts and their operations L1 & L3
performed on turning machines and to determine cutting speeds.
3. Analyze the classification of various non-rotational work part machines with their L1 & L4
constructional features and operations.
4. Explain the surface finishing operations with abras ive processes such as L2
grinding and broaching machines, types and working principle.
5. Explain the constructional features and the terminologies related to various L2
types of Jigs and Fixtures.
CO-PO Mapping:
PSO1
PSO2
PSO3
PO10
PO11
PO12
PO1
PO2
PO3
PO4
PO5
PO6
PO7
PO8
PO9
CO
20A352T.1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 - - - - - 3 -
20A352T.2 2 - 2 2 - - - - - - - -- - 2 -
20A352T.3 2 - 2 2 - - - - - - - - - 2 -
20A352T.4 2 - 2 2 - - - - - - - - - 2 -
20A352T.5 1 1 1 1 - 1 1 1 - - - 1 - 1 -
112
Title of the Course Design of M achine Elements - II

Category PCC
Course Code 20A353T
Year III B. Tech

Semester I Semester
Branch ME

3 0 0 3
Course Objectives:
 To learn the basic concepts of design of power transmission elements & various types of springs.
 To understand the design concepts of sliding contact bearings
 To understand the design concepts of rolling contact bearings
 To understand the design concepts of various types of gears
 To help the students in applying design concepts of IC engine parts like Pistons, connecting rod and crank
shaft.
Unit 1 Design of Flat & V belt drives and Springs 12

Flat & V belt drives: Design of Flat belt drives, Design of V-belt drives.
Springs: Introduction- types of Springs -design of helical springs (tension, compression & torsion) - Leaf springs.
 learn the basic concepts of springs and belt drives (L3)
 design the belt drives under different conditions (L4)
 design and analyze the stresses induced in springs (L4)
Unit 2 Sliding Contact Bearings 10

Introduction, Types of Journal bearings – Lubrication – Petroff‘s equation, M cKee‘s investigation, nomenclature,
Bearing M odulus –bearing materials – journal bearing design – Cap design.
 Learn the different types of journal bearings (L2)
 Design of Journal bearing (L6)
Unit 3 Rolling Contact Bearings: 10

Types of rolling contact bearings – Selection of bearing type, Static loading of ball & roller bearings Stribeck‘s
equation, Dynamic load carrying capacity, equivalent bearing load, selection of bearing life, design for cyclic loads
and speeds, bearing with a probability of survival other than 90%.
 Identify the different types of Rolling contact journal bearing (L2)
 Design of Rolling contact Journal bearing subjected to different loads (L6)
Unit 4 Design of Spur & Helical Gears 12

Spur Gears: Introduction, classification of gears, terminology of spur gears Force analysis, beam strength of gear
tooth, effective load on gear tooth, Design analysis of spur gears – Estimation of module and face width, check for
plastic deformation. Check for dynamic and wear considerations for spur gears.
Helical Gears: Introduction, terminology of helical gears, Force analysis, beam strength of gear tooth, effective
load on gear tooth, Design analysis of helical gears – Estimation of module and face width, check for plastic
deformation. Check for dynamic and wear considerations for helical gears.
 learn the concepts of gear (L1)
 analyze the forces induced in the gears (L4)
113
 design the gear for different loading condition (L6)
Unit 5 Design of IC engine components 12

Piston - Forces analysis of piston - Design and proportions of Trunk type piston.
Connecting rod–forces acting on connecting rod - design of connecting rod.
Crank and Crank shafts-types of Crank shafts -design of Center crank shafts.
 Learn the basics concepts of IC engine parts (L1)
 analyze forces induced in IC Engine parts (L4)
 design the different IC engine parts subjected to different loads (L6)

1. V B Bhandari, Design of machine elements, 4th edition, TM H, 2017. ISBN 9780070611412
2. R.S. Khurmi&J.S.Gupta, M achine Design, S.Chand Publications, 2014. ISBN-13: 978-8121905015
3. Kannaiah,M achine Design. Scietech, 2009. ISBN 13: 9788183711517
Reference Books:
1. J.E. Shigley, M achine design, TM H, 2015. ISBN-10: 9780073398204
2. T. Krishna Rao, Design of M achine Elements-I. I.K. International, 2010. ISBN 9789381141373
3. Pandya & Shah, M achine design, 20th edition, Charotar Publishers, 2009. ISBN: 978-93-85039-10-2
4. Data Books: (i) Balaveerareddy and M ahadevan
Tables/Codes: Design data books are to be supplied in examination
Course Outcomes:
1. Learn the basic concepts of design of power transmission elements & various L3 & L4
types of springs.
2. Understand the design concepts of sliding contact bearings. L2 & L6
3. Understand the design concepts of rolling contact bearings. L2 & L6
4. Understand the design concepts of various types of gears. L1, L4 & L6
5. Apply design concepts of IC engine parts like Piston, connecting rod and crank L1, L4 & L6
shaft.
CO-PO Mapping:
PSO1
PSO2
PSO3
PO10
PO11
PO12
PO1
PO2
PO3
PO4
PO5
PO6
PO7
PO8
PO9
CO
20A353T.1 3 3 3 3 - - 2 - - - - - - - -
20A353T.2 3 3 3 3 - - 2 - - - - - - - -
20A353T.3 3 3 3 3 - - 3 - - - 2 - - - -
20A353T.4 3 3 3 3 - - 3 - - - 2 - - - -
20A353T.5 3 3 3 3 - - 2 - - - - - - - -
114
Department of Civil Engineering
Title of the Course Water Resources and Harvesting

Category OEC
Course Code 20A15ET
Year III Year

Semester I Semester
Branch ME,EEE & ECE

3 0 0 3
Course Objectives:
 To familiarize students about the occupational hazards and remedial measures to say safe at work place.
 To enable students to learn the basics of the environmental management in order to make them job ready.
Unit 1 Water and waste water 9

Introduction – Water resources (Surface and subsurface) and its significance – Water: distribution on earth, Water
quality and standards; Water pollution: Types, sources and impacts – Surface water, ground water pollution,
Wastewater: Domestic – black and grey water; industrial and agricultural wastewater. Waste water treatment –
M ethods.
Learning Outcomes: At the end of the unit, the student will be able to learn
 Know the significance of surface and sub surface water resources. (L1)
 Know the impact of waste water on domestic, agricultural and industrial. (L1)
Unit 2 Water Resource Management 10

Hydrological cycle, Precipitation Evaporation and condensation, Groundwater - Classification, Aquifers – types
and management. Soil conservation and water recharge. Ground water management and key factors.
 Learn the elements in hydrological cycle (L1)
 Recharge and preserve subsurface water. (L1)
Unit 3 Rainwater Harvesting 10

Conservation and Harvesting of rain. Types and design of water harvesting structures; catchments – type and
methods. Rainwater harvesting-Catchment and roof top harvesting, Check dams, Artificial recharge, Farm ponds,
Percolation tanks, traditional rain water harvesting structures
 Know the difficulties in design of water harvesting structures. (L1)
 Know the rain water harvesting techniques. (L1)
Unit 4 Watershed Management 8

Definition, watershed delineation; watershed development: concepts, objectives and need- Integrated and
multidisciplinary approach for watershed management- Characteristics of watershed: size, shape, physiography,
slope, climate, drainage, land use, vegetation, geology and soils, hydrology and hydrogeology- Socio-economic
characteristics.
 Know M ultidisciplinary approaches and characteristics for water shed managements. (L1)
 Know the hydrology, hydrogeology and socio economic characteristics. (L1)
Unit 5 Basin Management 12

Definition, Factors affecting basin management- Preparation of land drainage schemes-Types and design of
surface drainage -Controlling of soil erosion and soil characteristics; Estimation of soil loss due to erosion. Water
115
availability assessment – Surface water and groundwater-Water demand assessment: municipal, industrial,
agricultural and environmental-Water allocation - Principles and policies, State and National water conflicts and
management.
 Know the schemes of various drainage systems (L1)
 Assess the availability of water and water demand. (L2)

1. Irrigation and Water Resources Engineering- G.L. Asawa, New age international Publisher
2. Watershed management and Field manuals -FAO
3. Watershed management in India, J.V.S. M oorthy, Wiley India.
4. Hydrology & Water Resources Engg., S K Garg, Khanna Pub., Delhi.
Reference Books:
1. Hydraulics &Fluid Dynamics-P.M .M odi and S.M .Seth,Standard book house, Delhi
2. Applied Hydrology - Chow V T., M cGraw-Hill, Inc
3. Irrigation, Water Resources & Water Power Engg., P N M odi, New Age Publishers.
Course Outcomes:
1. Know about various sustainable materials L4
2. Understand the concept of sustainable buildings L3
3. Learn to maximize the efficacy of existing processes. L4
4. Understand the importance of HVAC L4
5. Understand the importance of using renewable materials and ambient air quality. L3
CO-PO Mapping:
PO10
PO11
PO12
PS01
PS02
PS03
PO1
PO2
PO3
PO4
PO5
PO6
PO7
PO8
PO9
CO
20A15ET.1 - 1 2 - - - 3 - - - - 1 - - -
20A15ET.2 - 1 1 - - - 1 - - - - 1 - - -
20A15ET.3 - 1 1 - - - 1 - - - - 1 - - -
20A15ET.4 - 1 1 - - - 1 - - - - 1 - - -
20A15ET.5 - 1 1 - - - 1 - - - - 1 - - -
116
Department of Civil Engineering
Title of the Course Disaster M anagement

Category OEC
Course Code 20A15FT
Year III Year

Semester I Semester
Branch ME,EEE & ECE

3 0 0 3
Course Objectives:
 To enable the learner to understand how disasters occur and keep them aware about different disasters.
 To enable students to plan measures against different disasters.
 To make students familiar with the topics of crisis, disaster and emergency management techniques.
Unit 1 Introduction to disasters and Natural Disasters 9

Definitions Of Risk, Vulnerability and Disasters and Their Relationship; Classification of Disasters; Natural
Disasters; Environmental and Weather Pre-Conditions Leading To Various Natural Disasters; Floods: Urban
Floods; Flash Floods; Cyclones; Earthquakes; Landslides; Avalanches; M udslides Impacts of Natural Disasters;
Important Case Studies (2006 Tsunami, Covid 19 etc.,).
Learning Outcomes: At the end of the unit, the student will be able to learn
 Various natural disasters and what their preconditions. (L1)
 Impacts of different natural disasters on different aspects of human life. (L1)
Unit 2 Manmade Disaster 10

Classification of M anmade Disasters: Accidents, Industrial M ishaps; Wars – M ilitary, Bio-War and Cyber warfare;
Nuclear Disasters; Blackouts; Cyber Attacks, Oil Spills, Compound or Cascading Disaster; Preconditions Various
M anmade Disasters; Impacts of M anmade Disasters; Important Case Studies (Bhopal Gas Tragedy, Fukushima
Disaster, Ennore Oil Spill, Vizag Styrene Leak).
 Discern between natural and manmade disasters (L1)
 Learn about cascading disasters (L1)
 Find the reasons why manmade disasters happen and how to avert them. (L1)
Unit 3 Crisis and Emergency Management 8

Definition, scope and methods of - Crisis M anagement, Emergency management; Importance of emergency
management, Evacuation plans; mock drills of evacuation; Industrial safety drills; M onitoring of hazardous
components in industries and places of public importance.
 Understand the importance of crisis and emergency management. (L4)
 Understand how evacuation drills are conducted and their importance. (L4)
 Devise plans for industrial monitoring and analyse various real-time disasters. (L1)
Unit 4 Disaster Risk Reduction 12

Global and national disaster trends, Common Disasters in India, risk analysis, vulnerability and capacity
assessment; early warning systems, Disaster management cycle–its phases; prevention, mitigation,
preparedness, relief and recovery; structural and nonstructural safety and rehabilitation measures; Post-disaster
environmental response (water, sanitation, food safety, waste management, disease control); Roles and
responsibilities of government, community, local institutions, NGOs and other stakeholders; Policies and
legislation for disaster risk reduction, DRR programs in India and the activities of National Disaster M anagement
Authority.
117
 Understand various phases in disaster management and importance of decision making (L3)
 Learn relating risk, vulnerability and capacity. (L3)
 Know various stages involved in disaster management and various disaster management authorities.(L3)
Unit 5 Aftermath Disaster 8

Post disaster situations; Rebuilding – methods and strategies; Re-development - M ethods and strategies;
Environmental design; Disaster resistant design in built environment and in industries. Change in land use pattern
and its effects on human settlements. Capacity building of the society and the industries against disasters.
 Understand and analyze and understand dealing with post disaster situations. (L3)
 Learn the importance of incorporating environment in the design. (L3)
 M ethods and strategies involved in rebuilding the society. (L3)

1. Disaster M anagement, Dr. M rinalini Pandey, 2014, Wiley India.
2. Introduction to Emergency M anagement, Bullock et al., 2020, Elsevier.
3. Techniques for Disaster Risk M anagement and M itigation, M ohanty et al., 2020, Wiley.
Reference Books:
1. Harsh K Gupta, Disaster M anagement, 2003, Universities Press.
2. Larry Collins, Disaster M anagement and Preparedness, 2001, Lewis Publishers.
3. Li et al., Geomatics Solutions for Disaster M anagement, 2007, Springer International.
Course Outcomes:
1. Understand the natural disasters and their impacts. L1
2. Understand the M anmade disasters and their impacts. L1
3. Understand and plan for disaster risk Reduction L4
4. Develop disaster accommodating plans for coping up with post disaster L3
5. Apply the concepts of crisis management. L3
CO-PO Mapping:
PO10
PO11
PO12
PS01
PS02
PS03
PO1
PO2
PO3
PO4
PO5
PO6
PO7
PO8
PO9
CO
20A15FT.1 - - - - - 1 1 1 1 - - 1 - - -
20A15FT.2 - 1 - - - 1 1 1 1 - - 1 - - -
20A15FT.3 - 1 1 1 1 1 1 - - - - - - - -
20A15FT.4 - - - 1 1 1 1 - - - - - - - -
20A15FT.5 1 1 1 1 - - 1 1 - 1 - - - - -
118
Title of the Course Energy Auditing Conservation and M anagement

Category OEC
Course Code 20A25ET
Year III B. Tech

Semester I Semester

3 0 0 3
Course Objectives:
 To illustrate the present scenario of Energy Production and laws associated with it
 To illustrate the Energy conservation Codes
 To develop M anagement skills and communications of Energy manager/ Energy Auditor
 To illustrate the techniques, procedures, evaluation and energy audit reporting
 To evaluate life cycle costing analysis and return on investment on energy efficient technologies.
Unit 1 Energy Scenario 9

Global and Indian energy Scenario. Energy production, consumption and pricing. Long-term energy scenario. Salient
features of Electricity Act 2003. Energy Conservation Act – 2001 and its features. Energy poverty and Human
Development Indices, Energy and Human Development, Energy development index; Link between economic growth and
energy consumption.
 Discuss the Scenario of energy production (L2)
 Explain the Electricity Act 2003 (L2)
Unit 2 Energy conservation 9

Energy conservation areas, Energy transmission and storage, Plant Lecture wise energy optimization M odels, Data base
for energy management, Energy conservation through controls, Computer aided energy management, Program
organization and methodology. Energy environment interaction, Energy Conservation in Buildings, Energy Efficiency
Ratings & ECBC (Energy Conservation Building Code).
 Describe the Energy conservation through controls (L2)
 Discuss the Energy conservation in building with efficiency ratings and code (L2)
Unit 3 Energy Management 9

History of Energy M anagement, Definition and Objective of Energy M anagement and its importance. Need of energy
management, General Principles of Energy M anagement, Energy M anagement Skills, and Energy M anagement
Strategy. Organizing, Initiating and M anaging an energy management program. Roles, responsibilities and accountability
of Energy M anagers.
 Explain the importance of Energy management. (L2)
 Discuss the roles and responsibility of Energy manager (L2)
Unit 4 Energy Audit 9

Energy audit concepts, Definition, Need and Types of energy audit. Energy Audit Approach and M ethodology.
Systematic procedure for technical audit. Describing energy audit costs. Duties and responsibilities of energy auditors.
Energy audit instruments and their usage for auditing. Report-writing, preparations and presentations of energy audit
reports.
 Discuss the concepts of Energy Audit and its types (L2)
119
 Write the Energy Audit in the form of Report. (L1)
Unit 5 Economic Analysis 9

Economic analysis methods-cash flow model, time value of money, evaluation of proposals, pay-back method, average
rate of return method, internal rate of return method, present value method, life cycle costing approach, Case studies.
 Analyze the benefits of adapting energy efficient equipment‘s with respect to investment. (L4)
 Analyze the benefits of usage of power factor equipment. (L4)

1. AmlanChakrabarti, Energy Engineering and M anagement, PHI learning, 2nd edition, 2011.
2. Smith CB, Energy M anagement Principles, science direct, 2nd edition, 2016.
3. Hamies, Energy Auditing and Conservation; M ethods, M easurements, M anagement & Case discuss.
Hemisphere Pub. Corp: Washington, 1980
4. UmeshRathore, Energy management, S.K.Kataria&Sons,2nd edition,2014
Reference Books:
1. W.R.M urphy, G.M ckay, Energy M anagement, Butterworth-Heinemann Ltd, 2nd edition, 2009
2. Archie, W. Culp, Principles of Energy Conservation, M cGraw Hill, 1979
3. M unasinghe, M ohan Desai, Ashok V, Energy Demand: Analysis, M anagement and Conservation, Wiley
Eastern Ltd., New Delhi.1990.
4. A. J. M cM ichael, D. H. Campbell-Lendrum, C. F. Corvalan, K. L. Ebi, A. Githeko, J. D. Scheraga, A.
Woodward, Climate Change and Human Health Risks and Responses, 2003.
Course Outcomes:
1. Describe the energy scenario and laws associated with it. L2
2. Discuss the technical and commercial aspects of energy conservation L2
3. Analyze the energy management L4
4. Discuss the significance and procedure for Energy Audit. L2
5. Evaluate the pay back periods for energy savings equipment L5
CO-PO Mapping:
PO10
PO11
PO12
PS01
PS02
PS03
PO1
PO2
PO3
PO4
PO5
PO6
PO7
PO8
PO9
CO
20A25ET.1 3 2 - 2 - - 3 - - - - 2 - - -
20A25ET.2 2 2 - 2 - - 2 - - - - 1 - - -
20A25ET.3 3 2 - 2 - - 2 - - - - - - - -
20A25ET.4 3 2 - 2 - - 2 - - - - 1 - - -
20A25ET.5 2 2 - 1 - - 2 - - - - 1 - - -
120
Title of the Course Electric Vehicles

Category OEC
Course Code 20A25FT
Year III B. Tech

Semester I Semester

3 0 0 3
Course Objectives:
 To explain the concepts and configurations of electric vehicles
 To describe different electric propulsion systems and energy storage devices
 To discuss the different types of electrical vehicles.
Unit 1 Introduction to Electric Vehicles 8

A brief history of Electric Vehicles (EV), Types of EV, advantages over conventional vehicles, limitations of EV,
impact on environment of EV technology, disposal of battery, cell and hazardous material and their impact on
environment.
 Describe the history of electric vehicles(L2)
 Describe electric vehicle configuration and its components(L2)
 Describe the impact on environment of electric vehicles technology(L2)
Unit 2 Power Management and Energy Sources of EV 8

Power and Energy management strategies and its general architecture of EV, various battery sources, energy
storage, battery-based energy storage and simplified models of battery, Battery M anagement Systems (BM S),
fuel cells.
 Describe the general architecture of EV(L2)
 Describe various battery energy sources of EV(L2)
Unit 3 Power Electronics in EV 8

Introduction, various power electronics converter topologies and its comparisons, Control of converter operations
in EV, battery chargers used in EV.
 Describe the various power electronics converter topologies(L2)
 Describe the control of converter operations in EV(L2)
Unit 4 DC and AC Machines & Drives in EV 8

Various types of motors, selection and size of motors, Induction motor drives and control characteristics,
Permanent magnet motor drives and characteristics, Brushed & Brushless DC motor drive and characteristics,
switched reluctance motors and characteristics.
 Describe the various types of motors for EV(L2)
 Describe the characteristics of AC & DC motors (L2)
121
Unit 5 Design Considerations of EV 8
Design parameters of batteries, ultra-capacitors and fuel cells, aerodynamic considerations, calculation of the
rolling resistance and the grade resistance, calculation of the acceleration force, total tractive effort, torque
required on the drive wheel, transmission efficiency.
 Describe the design parameters for EV(L2)
 Describe calculation of tractive effort in EV(L2)

1. Iqbal Hussain, ―Electric and Hybrid Vehicles Design Fundamentals‖, 1st Edition, CRC Press, 2003.
2. James Larminie, John Lowry ―Electric Vehicle Technology Explained‖, 1st Edition, John Wiley and Sons, 2003.
3. Chris M i, M . AbulM asrur, David WenzhongGao, ―Hybrid Electric Vehicles: Principles and Applications with
Practical Perspectives‖, Wiley publication ,2011
4. Allen Fuhs, ―Hybrid Vehicles and the future of personal transportation‖, CRC Press, 2009.
Reference Books:
1. Web course on ―Introduction to Hybrid and Electric Vehicles‖ by Dr. Praveen Kumar and Prof. S M ajhi, IIT
Guwahati available on NPTEL at https://nptel.ac.in/courses/108/103/108103009/.
2. Video Course on ―Electric Vehicles‖ by Prof. Amit Kumar Jain, IIT Delhi available on NPTEL at
https://nptel.ac.in/courses/108/102/108102121/
Course Outcomes:
1. Explain the operation of electric vehicles L2
2. Select a suitable drive scheme for developing an electric vehicle
depending on resources L1
3. Identify proper energy storage systems for vehicle applications. L1
CO-PO Mapping:
PO10
PO11
PO12
PS01
PS02
PS03
PO1
PO2
PO3
PO4
PO5
PO6
PO7
PO8
PO9
CO
20A25FT.1 - 2 - 3 - - 2 - 3 - - - - - -
20A25FT.2 3 - - 2 - 3 - - 3 - - - - - -
20A25FT.3 3 2 2 - - - - - 2 - - - - - -
122
Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering
Title of the Course Electronic Circuits & its Applications

Category OEC
Course Code 20A45ET
Year III B. Tech

Semester I Semester
Branch CE, EEE & ME

3 0 0 3
Course Objectives:
 To analyze and design the transistor and feedback amplifiers.
 To understand and analyze the concepts of oscillators
Unit 1 Single Stage Amplifiers 10

Classification of Amplifiers - Distortion in amplifiers, Analysis of CE, CC and CB configurations with simplified
hybrid model, Analysis of CE amplifier with emitter resistance and emitter follower, M iller's theorem and its dual,
Design of single stage RC coupled Amplifier using BJT.
 Understand the concepts of basic transistor amplifier circuits. (L2)
 Design and analysis of single stage amplifiers using BJTs (L6)
Unit 2 Multistage Amplifiers 10

Analysis of Cascaded RC coupled BJT amplifiers, Cascode Amplifier, Darlington Pair, Different Coupling Schemes
used in Amplifiers - RC coupled amplifiers, Transformer Coupled Amplifier, Direct Coupled Amplifier.
 Understand the purpose of cascading single stage amplifiers. (L2)
 Analyse the different types of amplifiers, operation and it's characteristics. (L4)
Unit 3 Feedback Amplifiers 12

Concept of feedback amplifiers, General characteristics of negative feedback amplifiers, effect of feedback on
amplifier characteristics. Voltage series, voltage shunt, current series and current shunt feedback amplifiers with
discrete components (Topologies).
Learning Outcomes: At the end of the unit, the student will be able to :
 Understand the concepts of feedback amplifiers. (L2)
 Analyse the effect of negative feedback on amplifier characteristics (L4)
 Design and analysis of various feedback amplifiers (L6)
Unit 4 Oscillators 10
Condition for oscillations, Oscillator types, Frequency and amplitude stability of oscil lators,
LC oscillators - Hartley and Colpitts oscillators, RC phase shift and Wein bridge oscillators, Crystal Oscillators.
 Understand the basic principle of oscillator circuits. (L2)
 Design and Analysis of different oscillator circuits (L6)
Unit 5 Large Scale A mplifiers 8

Classification of Power amplifiers – Class A power Amplifiers – Direct coupled and Transformer Coupled, Class B
power Amplifiers – Push – pull and Complementary Symmetry-Transistor power dissipation, Power and Efficiency
calculations, Distortion of Power Amplifiers.
123
 Understand the concepts of different power amplifiers (L2)
 Determine the efficiencies of various power amplifiers (L3)

1. M illman and Christos C. Halkias- ―Integrated Electronics‖, M cGraw-Hill,1972.
2. Robert T. Paynter- ―Introductory Electronic Devices and Circuits‖, Pearson Education, 7 thEdition.
Reference Books:
1. Robert L. Boylestad and Louis Nashelsky - ―Electronic Devices and Circuits Theory‖, Pearson/Prentice Hall,
9th Edition, 2006.
2. Donald A. Neumann- ―Electronic Circuit Analysis and Design‖, M cGraw Hill
3. ―M icro Electronic Circuits‖ Sedra and Smith, Oxford University Press
Course Outcomes:
1. Analyze the single stage and multi-stage amplifiers using h-parameter model at L4
low frequencies
2. Understand the feedback amplifiers and oscillators L2
3. Analyse the concepts of large signal amplifiers L4
4. Understand the working principle and operation of oscillators L2
5. Analyze the concepts of large signal amplifiers L4
CO-PO Mapping:
PO10
PO11
PO12
PS01
PS02
PS03
PO1
PO2
PO3
PO4
PO5
PO6
PO7
PO8
PO9
CO
20A45ET.1 3 3 2 3 3 1 - - 2 - - - - - -
20A45ET.2 3 3 2 3 3 1 - - 2 - - - - - -
20A45ET.3 1 3 3 2 2 - - - 2 - - - - - -
20A45ET.4 1 3 3 2 2 - - - 2 - - - - - -
20A45ET.5 3 3 3 2 2 1 - - 2 - - - - - -
124
Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering
Title of the Course Introduction to Communication Systems

Category OEC
Course Code 20A45FT
Year III B. Tech

Semester I Semester
Branch CE, EEE & ME

3 0 0 3
Course Objectives:
 To learn the fundamental concepts of Analog and Digital communication systems
 To understand the different analog and digital modulation and demodulation techniques
 To know the effect of noise in communications
Unit 1 Amplitude Modulation 9

Introduction to communication system, Elements of communication system, Need for modulation, Types of
M odulation, Amplitude M odulation, Generation and Detection of AM , DSB-SC, SSB, VSB Waves.
 Understand the fundamental concepts of analog communication systems. (L2)
 Gain the knowledge on different Amplitude modulation and demodulation techniques. (L1)
Unit 2 Angle Modulation & Noise 11

Basic definitions, Frequency M odulation: Narrow Band FM , Wide Band FM , Transmission bandwidth of FM
Signals, Generation of FM Signals, Detection of FM Signals, Comparison of FM & AM .
Noise: Types of noise, noise in analog communication systems
 Learn the generation and detection of FM signals (L1)
 Learn the various types of noise and its effects on analog communication systems (L1)
Unit 3 Pulse Analog Modulation 9

Introduction, The Sampling process, Types of Pulse modulation, Generation & demodulation of PAM , PWM and
PPM , comparison, M ultiplexing-TDM , FDM
Learning Outcomes: At the end of the unit, the student will be able to :
 Understand the generation and detection of PAM , PWM and PPM (L2)
 Learn the different multiplexing concept (L1)
Unit 4 PULSE DIGITAL MODULATION 9

Elements of digital communication system, advantages of digital communication systems, Elements of PCM ,
Bandwidth requirements of PCM , Noise in PCM Systems, Differential PCM systems (DPCM), Delta modulation
systems, Adaptive delta modulation, comparison between PCM and DM
 Understand the basic concepts of digital communication system. (L2)
 Gain Knowledge on PCM ,DPCM and DM (L1)
Unit 5 DIGITAL CARRIER MODULATION SCHEMES 9

Introduction, Binary ASK, FSK and PSK Signaling Scheme-Generation and detection methods, DPSK and
DEPSK, Introduction to M -ary Signaling, Comparison of all Digital carrier M odulation Schemes.
 Learn the ASK, FSK and PSK signaling schemes (L1)
125
 Analyze the various digital modulation schemes (L4)

1. Simon Haykin, John Wiley- Principles of Communication systems , 2nd Ed.,
2. K. Sam Shanmugam – Digital and Analog Communication Systems, Wiley, 2010.
3. Simon Haykin-Digital Communication, Wiley, 2006
Reference Books:
1. H Taub & D. Dchilling, Gautam Sahe- Principles of Communication Systems, TM H, 2007 3 rd Edition
2. John G. Proakis, M asood Salehi- Fundamentals of Communication Systems PEA, 2006.
3. R.P.Singh&S.D.Sapre- Communication Systems Analog & Digital, TM H, 2008
Course Outcomes:
1. Design simple systems for generation and detection of AM , DSB, SSB and VSB L6
signals
2. Understand the concepts of the angle modulation & demodulation along with L2
noise analysis.
3. Analyze the various pulse amplitude modulation and demodulation techniques L4
4. Understand the different digital modulation techniques L2
5. Understand the different digital carrier modulation techniques L2
CO-PO Mapping:
PSO1
PSO2
PSO3
PO10
PO11
PO12
PO1
PO2
PO3
PO4
PO5
PO6
PO7
PO8
PO9
CO
20A45FT.1 3 1 - - - 1 - - - 3 - 2 - - -
20A45FT.2 3 3 1 - - 1 - - - 2 - 2 - - -
20A45FT.3 3 3 1 - - 1 - - - 2 - 2 - - -
20A45FT.4 3 3 2 2 2 - - - - 3 2 2 - - -
20A45FT.5 3 3 2 2 2 - - - - 3 2 2 - - -
126
ANNAMACHARYA INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY AND SCIENCES::RAJAMPET
Title of the Course Data Structures using Python

Category OEC
Course Code 20A55FT
Year III B. Tech.

Semester I Semester

3 0 0 3
Prerequisite: Prerequisite for this course is python programming language
Course Objectives:
 To learn basic of data structures.
 To analyze algorithms and understand sets, maps, linked list using python programming
 To apply recursion in python programming and understand hashing operation
 To learn the implementation of binary trees, binary search trees and AVL trees.
Unit 1 7
Introduction to Data structures, definition, types of data structures, Array-Based Sequences: Python‘s Sequence Types,
Low-Level Arrays, Dynamic Arrays and Amortization, Efficiency of Python‘s Sequence Types, Using Array -Based
Sequences, M ultidimensional Data Sets.
 Understand the definition of data structures (L2)
 Remember various data structures (L1)
Unit 2 11
Linked list structures: The Singly Linked List, Double linked list, Stacks. The Stack Abstract Data Type, Simple Array-
Based Stack Implementation, Reversing Data Using a Stack, Queue, The Queue Abstract Data Type, Array-Based
Queue Implementation
 Understand the linear data structure linked list (L2)
 Illustrate Abstract Data types for various data structures (L4)
Unit 3 9
Recursion: Recursive functions, properties of recursion, recursion works, recursive applications-recursive binary search,
towers of Hanoi, exponential operation. Sorting: M erge sort, Quick sort
 understands the importance of recursion (L2)
 use recursion in various examples (L3)
Unit 4 9
Binary Trees: The Tree structure, The binary search tree, The Priority Queue Abstract Data Type, Implementing a
Priority Queue, heap sort.
 explain binary tree data structure (L3)
 demonstrate priority queue and heap sort (L2)
Unit 5 9
Pattern-M atching Algorithms: Brute Force, The Boyer-M oore Algorithm, The Knuth-M orris-Pratt Algorithm, Tries:
127
Standard Tries, Compressed Tries, Suffix Tries.
Graphs, Graph Traversals, Depth-First Search, Breadth-First Search.
 describe the pattern matching algorithms (L3)
 justify the importance of graphdata structure(L4)

1. Data Structures and Algorithms in Python, M ichael T. Goodrich, Roberto Tamassia, M ichael H. Goldwasser, Wiley
Publications
2. Data Structures and Algorithms using Python, RanceD. Necaise, Wiley Publications
Reference Books:
1. Python Programming using problem solving approach, ReemaThareja, Oxford University press
2. Core Python Programming, R. Nageswara Rao, Dream Tech Press (Wiley India), 2017 Edition
3. Problem solving with algorithms and data structures using python, Bradley M iller, David L. Ranum, Franklin,
Beedle& Associates incorporated, independent publishers.
Course Outcomes:
1. Remember and Understand he basics data structures. L2
2. Illustrate Abstract Data types for various data structures L4
3. use recursion in different examples L3
4. explain binary tree, priority queue data structure L3
5. justify the importance of pattern matching, tires and graphdata structure L4
CO-PO Mapping: PO10
PO11
PO12
PSO1
PSO2
PSO3
PO1
PO2
PO3
PO4
PO5
PO6
PO7
PO8
PO9
CO
20A55FT.1 3 3 3 - - - - - - - - 2 - - -
20A55FT.2 3 3 3 - - - - - - - - - - - -
20A55FT.3 3 3 3 - 3 - - - - - - 2 - - -
20A55FT.4 3 3 - - - - - - - - - - - - -
20A55FT.5 3 3 3 - 3 - - - - - - - - - -
128
Title of the Course Database M anagement System

Category OEC
Course Code 20A55GT
Year III B. Tech

Semester I Semester

3 0 0 3
Course Objectives:
 To understand the role and uses of DBM S in an organization.
 To understand fundamental concepts of Database M anagement Systems like database design, database
languages, and database-system implementation.
 To construct simple and moderately advanced database queries using Structured Query Language (SQL).
 To understand and successfully apply logical database design principles, including E-R diagrams and
database normalization techniques.
 To explain the principle of transaction management design.
Unit 1 9
Introduction: Database-System Applications, Purpose of Database Systems, View of Data, Database Languages,
Relational Databases, Data Storage and Querying, Transaction M anagement, Data Base Architecture, Database
Users and Administrators, History of Database Systems.
 Explain the Features of Database M anagement Systems, Architecture of database systems.(L2)
 Define the role of database users (L1)
Unit 2 10
Database Design: Database Design and ER Diagrams, Entities, Attributes and Entity Sets, Relationships and
Relationship Sets, Additional Features of the ER M odel, Conceptual Design with the ER M odel, Case study: The
Internet Shop.
THE RELATIONAL MODEL: Introduction to the Relational M odel, Integrity Constraints over Relations, Enforcing
Integrity Constraints, Querying Relational Data, Logical Data Base Design: ER to Relational.
 Develops an Entity-Relationship model based on user requirements.(L5)
 Defines the basics of the relational data model. (L1)
Unit 3 9
SQL AND PL/SQL: Introduction to SQL, Data Definition Commands, Data M anipulation Commands, Select
Queries, Virtual Tables: Creating View, Altering View, Updating View, Destroying View, Relational Set Operators,
SQL Join Operators, Sub Queries and Correlated Queries, Aggregate Functions, Procedural SQL: Stored
Procedures, Stored Functions, Triggers, Cursors.
 Designs SQL queries to create database tables and make structural modifications. (L5)
 Define and enforces integrity constraints on a database. (L1)
Unit 4 12
Introduction to Schema Refinement: Problems Caused by Redundancy, Decompositions, Problems Related to
Decomposition, Functional Dependencies, Reasoning about FDs, Normal Forms: 1NF, 2NF, 3NF, BCNF,
Properties of Decomposition: Lossless Join Decomposition, Dependency Preserving Decomposition, M ultivalued
129
Dependencies, 4 NF.
 Describes Functional Dependency and Functional Decomposition. (L2)
 Applies various Normalization techniques for database design improvement. (L3)
Unit 5 9
ACID Properties: Consistency and Isolation, Atomicity and Durability, Transactions and Schedules, Concurrent
Execution of Transactions, Lock-Based Concurrency Control, Performance of Locking, Transaction Support in
SQL.
 Applies transaction processing mechanisms in relational databases.(L3)
 Explain the Concurrency Control and Recovery Algorithms. (L2)
1. Silberschatz, Korth, Sudarshan, Database System Concepts. M cGraw Hill, 5th Edition.
2. C.J.Date, Introduction to Database Systems. Pearson Education.
Reference Books:
1. RaghuRamaKrishnan, Johannes Gehrke, Database M anagement Systems, McGraw Hill, Third Edition.
2. Elmasri,Navate, Fundamentals of Database Systems. Pearson Education.
3. Peter Rob, A. Ananda Rao, Carlos Coronel, Database M anagement Systems, CENGAGE Learning.
Course Outcomes:
1. M emorize and recall the basic concepts of Database Systems to examine the L1
applications of database systems.
2. Demonstrate an Entity-Relationship (E-R) model from specifications and to L2
convert the transformation of the conceptual model into corresponding logical
data structures.
3. Illustrate database concepts in structure query languages. L3
4. Analyze the problems with redundancies and eliminate redundancies in a L4
database schema using normalization.
5. Judge the need of concurrency control in transaction management concepts L5
in database systems.
COs-POs Mapping:
PSO1
PSO2
PSO3
PO10
PO11
PO12
PO1
PO2
PO3
PO4
PO5
PO6
PO7
PO8
PO9
CO
20A55GT.1 - 3 - 3 3 - - - - - - - - - -
20A55GT.2 - 3 3 3 3 - - - - - - - - - -
20A55GT.3 - 3 3 3 3 - - - - - - - - - -
20A55GT.4 - 3 3 3 3 - - - - - - - - - -
20A55GT.5 - 3 3 3 3 - - - - - - - - - -
130
Department of Artificial Intelligence and Data Science
Title of the Course Foundations of Artificial Intelligence and Data Science

Category OEC
Course Code 20A305GT
Year III B. Tech

Semester I Semester
Branch CE, EEE, M E & ECE

3 0 0 3
Course Objectives:
 To comprehend the building blocks of AI in terms of intelligent agents.
 To understand the main approaches of artificial intelligence such as heuristic search, game search and logical
inference.
 Fundamental knowledge of concepts underlying data science and give a hands-on experience with real-world
data analysis.
 Demonstrate an understanding of statistics and machine learning concepts that are vital for data science.
 Critically evaluate data visualizations based on their design and use for communicating stories from data
Unit 1 Introduction 9
What is AI? Foundations of AI, History of AI, Agents and environments, The nature of the Environment, structure
of agents, Problem solving Agents, Problem Formulation, Uninformed Search Strategies.
 Understands the basics of AI and Intelligent Systems (L2)
 Represents the problem formulation in real world environment (L3)
Unit 2 Informed Search methods 9

Informed search methods–heuristic Functions, Hill Climbing, Simulated Annealing, A*,
PerformanceEvaluation.ConstrainedSatisfactionProblems:Constraint Satisfaction Problems like– map Coloring,
Crypt Arithmetic, and Back tracking for CSP, Local Search. Adversarial search techniques.
 Solves a problem for solution using state space search (L5)
 Learns different search methods for problem solving (L1)
Unit 3 Introduction to Data Science 9

What is Data Science: Big Data and Data Science hype – and getting past the hype, why now? – Deification,
Current landscape of perspectives, Skill sets needed
Statistics for Data science: Populations and samples, Statistical modeling, probability distributions, fitting a model,
Data Description, Probability, Distributions -Discrete and Continuous Distributions, Hypothesis testing, Regression
M odels – Linear and M ultiple Regression models.
 Understands the fundamental concepts of Data Science (L2)
 Apply the statistical methods for Data science problems (L3)
Unit 4 Data exploration and Data Learning algorithms 9

Exploratory Data Analysis (EDA), Philosophy of EDA, tools for EDA, The Data Science Process, Feature
Selection, Feature Generation and Extraction - Feature Selection algorithms – Filters; Wrappers.
Data Learning algorithms: M achine Learning Algorithms, Three Basic Algorithms - Linear Regression - k-Nearest
Neighbors (k-NN) - k-means – SVM , Naïve Bayes, Logistic Regression.
 Performs Exploratory Data Analysis for feature selection and decision making. (L5)
131
 Understands different Data Learning algorithms (L2)
Unit 5 Data visualization 9

Data visualization and presentation: Basic principles, ideas and tools for data visualization, Examples of inspiring
(industry) projects.
Applications of Data science in Business, Insurance, Energy, Health care, Biotechnology, M anufacturing, Utilities,
Telecommunication, Travel, Governance, Gaming, Pharmaceuticals, Geospatial analytics and modeling
 Design visual representations for processed data (L6)
 Apply data science methods in different application domains (L3)

nd
1. Stuart Russell and Peter Norvig, Artificial Intelligence: A M odern Approach, 2 Edition, Pearson Publication.
2. Cathy O‘Neil and Rachel Schutt. Doing Data Science, Straight Talk from the Frontline. O‘Reilly Edition, 2014.
Reference Books:
1. Rich ,E. and Knight, K., ―Artificial Intelligence‖, Tata McGraw-Hill
2. GeorgeLugar,―AI-StructuresandStrategiesforComplexProblemSolving‖,4/e,2002,PearsonEducation
3. RobertJ.Schalkolf,ArtificialIntelligence:anEngineeringapproach,McGrawHill,1990
4. PatrickH.Winston,ArtificialIntelligence,3rdedition,Pearson
5. Jure Leskovek, Anand Rajaraman and Jerey Ullman. M ining of M assive Datasets. v2.1 Cambridge University
Press. 2014
6. Foster Provost and Tom Fawcett. Data Science for Business: What You Need to Know about Data M ining
and Data-analytic Thinking. ISBN 1449361323. 2013
Course Outcomes:
1. UnderstandtheimportanceofartificialIntelligenceinrealworldenvironment L1, L2
2. Apply the artificial intelligence algorithms for problem solving L3
3. Understand the key concepts, notations in data science and implement the
standard methods of data analysis and decision making L2, L3
4. Demonstrate the problem of knowledge extraction as combinations of data
L3
filtration, analysis and exploration methods
5. Understand the importance of data visualization and the design and use of many
visual components for effective communications and applications of data L5, L6
visualization in various domains.
CO-PO Mapping:
PO10
PO11
PO12
PS01
PS02
PS03
PO1
PO2
PO3
PO4
PO5
PO6
PO7
PO8
PO9
CO
20A305GT.1 3 3 - - - 3 - 3 2 - 2 - - -
20A305GT.2 3 3 3 3 - 3 2 - 3 - - 2 - - -
20A305GT.3 3 - - - - - - - 3 - - 3 - - -
20A305GT.4 3 3 3 - 3 - - - 3 - 3 3 - - -
20A305GT.5 3 3 3 - 3 - - - 3 3 3 3 - - -
132
Department of Artificial Intelligence and Data Science
Title of the Course M achine Learning

Category OEC
Course Code 20A305HT
Year III B. Tech

Semester I Semester

3 0 0 3
Course Objectives:
 Formulate machine learning problems corresponding to different applications.
 Understand machine learning algorithms along with their strengths and weaknesses.
 Understand the basic theory underlying machine learning.
 Apply machine learning algorithms to solve problems of moderate complexity.
 Understand different types of learning approaches.
Well-posed learning problems, Designing a learning system, Perspectives and issues in machine learning
Concept learning and the general to specific ordering – Introduction, A concept learning task, Concept learning as
search, Find-S: finding a maximally specific hypothesis, Version spaces and the candidate elimination algorithm,
Remarks on version spaces and candidate elimination, Inductive bias
 Explore how to build computer programs that improve their performance at some task through
experience. (L4)
 Analyze sample complexity and computational complexity for several learning Problems (L4)
Unit 2 Decision Tree learning & Artificial Neural Networks 9

Decision Tree learning – Introduction, Decision tree representation, Appropriate problems for decision tree
learning, The basic decision tree learning algorithm, Hypothesis space search in decision tree learning,
Inductive bias in decision tree learning, Issues in decision tree learning
Artificial Neural Networks – Introduction, Neural network representation, Appropriate problems for neural network
learning, Perceptrons, M ultilayer networks and the back propagation algorithm, Remarks on the back propagation
algorithm, An illustrative example face recognition Advanced topics in artificial neural networks
 Analyze artificial neural networks as one of the most effective learning methods currently known to
interpret complex real-world sensor data (L4)
 Analyze and solves learning problem using Decision Tree (L5)
Unit 3 Bayesian learning & Genetic Algorithms 9

Bayesian learning – Introduction, Bayes theorem, Bayes theorem and concept learning, M aximum likelihood and
least squared error hypotheses, M aximum likelihood hypotheses for predicting probabilities, M inimum description
length principle, Bayes optimal classifier, Gibs algorithm, Naïve Bayes classifier, An example learning to classify
text, Bayesian belief networks The EM algorithm
Genetic Algorithms – M otivation, Genetic Algorithms, An illustrative Example, Hypothesis Space Search, Genetic
Programming, M odels of Evolution and Learning, Parallelizing Genetic Algorithms
 Apply the principles of Probability for classification as an important area of M achine Learning Algorithms
(L3)
 Illustrates the use of the genetic algorithm approach, and examine the nature of its hypothesis space
search (L3)
133
Unit 4 Learning Sets of Rules & Analytical Learning 9
Learning Sets of Rules – Introduction, Sequential Covering Algorithms, Learning Rule Sets: Summary, Learning
First Order Rules, Learning Sets of First Order Rules: FOIL, Induction as Inverted Deduction, Inverting Resolution
Analytical Learning - Introduction, Learning with Perfect Domain Theories: Prolog-EBG Remarks on Explanation-
Based Learning, Explanation-Based Learning of Search Control Knowledge.
 Analyze the Instance based algorithms can be used to overcome memory complexity and overfitting
problems. (L4)
 Infer the significance of Domain Theories (L2)
Unit 5 Reinforcement Learning 9

Reinforcement Learning – Introduction, The Learning Task, Q Learning, Non-Deterministic Rewards and Actions,
Temporal Difference Learning, Generalizing from Examples, Relationship to Dynamic Programming
 Infer that the combined methods outperform both purely inductive and purely analytical learning methods
(L3)
 Recognize the importance of Reinforcement Learning in the industry (L1)

1. M achine Learning – Tom M . M itchell, - M GH
2. M achine Learning: An Algorithmic Perspective, Stephen M arsland, Taylor & Francis (CRC) Reference
Reference Books:
1. M achine Learning M ethods in the Environmental Sciences, Neural Networks, William W Hsieh, Cambridge
Univ Press
2. Richard o. Duda, Peter E. Hart and David G. Stork, pattern classification, John Wiley & Sons Inc., 2001
3. Chris Bishop, Neural Networks for Pattern Recognition, Oxford University Press
Course Outcomes:
1. Understand the basic knowledge about the key algorithms of machine learning L1
2. Learn and use different machine learning algorithms L2
3. Apply various machine learning algorithms Bayesian learning and genetic L3
approaches
4. Design the classification, pattern recognition, optimization and decision L4
problems using machine learning algorithms
5. Analyze different types of learning approaches L5
CO-PO Mapping:
PO10
PO11
PO12
PS01
PS02
PS03
PO1
PO2
PO3
PO4
PO5
PO6
PO7
PO8
PO9
CO
20A305HT.1 3 3 3 1 - 1 - - 1 - - 3 - - -
20A305HT.2 3 - 3 - 3 - - - - - - 3 - - -
20A305HT.3 3 3 3 - 3 - - - - - - - - - -
20A305HT.4 3 3 3 - - - - - - - - 3 - - -
20A305HT.5 3 - 3 - 3 - - - - - - 3 - - -
134
Title of the Course Literature and Life

Category OEC
Course Code 20AC5AT
Year III B. Tech

Semester I Semester

3 0 0 0
Course Objectives:
 Identify specific features of major literary genres.
 Critically analyze the voices adopted by authors to convey their views on life.
 Develop a style of reading and writing aligned with one‘s personality type.
 To construct a philosophy of life as a foundation for one‘s growth.
Unit 1 Prose 8
 Abdul Kalam, ―When I Failed‖
 Chetan Bhagat, ―M y Stupid Suicide Plan‖
 R.K. Narayan, ―Toasted English‖
Learning Outcomes: The first module examines the hiatus between aspiration and achievement in the essays of
Kalam and Bhagat, the humorous and satirical presentation of common problems in the essays of Narayan. (L3)
Unit 2 Poetry 8
 W. Shakespeare, ―Let me not to the marriage of true minds‖
 W.H. Davies, ―Leisure‖
 Robert Frost, 'The Road Not Taken'
Learning Outcomes: The second module discusses the hope and faith necessary for life in the poems of Shakespeare,
Davies, and Frost. (L2)
Unit 3 Drama 12
 Girish Karnad‘s Tughlaq
Learning Outcomes: The third module analyses the competitive, cunning, and commercial as well as political life in the
play by Karnad. (L4)
Unit 4 Drama 12
 Girish Karnad‘s Tughlaq (Contd...)
Learning Outcomes: The fourth module analyses the competitive, cunning, and commercial as well as political life in
the play by Karnad. (L4)
Unit 5 Short Story 8

 G G Joshi, ―The Letter‖
 Katherine M ansfield, ―A Cup of Tea‖
 J G Rosa, ―The Third Bank of the River‖
 Anjana Appachana, ―Sharmaji‖
Learning Outcomes: The fifth module considers the delicate and fragile human feelings of a father, parents, a
commoner, a son, a professional, and an employee in the stories of Joshi, M ansfield, Rosa, and Appachana. (L3)
SupplementaryAcademicResources:(Includestextbooks,journal articlesande-learningmaterials)
1. Barnet,S.,Burto,W.,andCainW.E.2008.AnIntroductionto Literature.New York:Pearson Longman.
2. Bennett,A.,andRoyle,N.2015.ThisThingCalled Literature:Reading,Thinking,Writing.London: Routledge
135
3. Kusch,C. 2016.LiteraryAnalysis:TheBasics.London:Routledge.
4. Watson, L.E.Ed.1951.LightfromManyLamps.New York: Sim on and Schuster.
Course Outcomes:
Upon the successful completion of the course, the student will be able to Blooms Level of Learning
1. appreciate the close relationship between literature and life L3
2. protect themselves against their own self-destructive thoughts L4
3. establish better relationships with their close and distant relatives L3
4. analyze the arbitrary nature of social and political structures L3
5. face the challenges of family and business organizations L4
CO-PO Mapping:
PO10
PO11
PO12
PS01
PS02
PS03
PO1
PO2
PO3
PO4
PO5
PO6
PO7
PO8
PO9
CO
20AC5AT.1 - - - - - - - 3 - - - 3 - - -
20AC5AT.2 - - - - - - - 3 - - - 3 - - -
20AC5AT.3 - - - - - - - 3 - - - 3 - - -
20AC5AT.4 - - - - - - - 3 - - - 3 - - -
20AC5AT.5 - - - - - - - 3 - - - 3 - - -
136
Title of the Course Linear Algebra and Numerical Analysis

Category OEC
Course Code: 20AC5BT
Year III B. Tech

Semester I Semester

3 0 0 0
Course Objectives:
 To introduce the concept of vector space.
 To introduce the concept of linear transformation.
 To learn how to apply numerical methods to solve the equations
Unit 1 Vector Space 8

Vector spaces, Subspaces, Linear independence, Basis and dimension, Ordered basis and coordinates.
 Define Vector space and Subspaces (L1)
 Understand the concept of basis and dimension(L2)
Unit 2 Linear transformations and Inner product spaces 12

Linear transformations, Rank-nullity theorem (without proof), Algebra of linear transformations, Isomorphism,
M atrix representation, Change of basis.
Inner products, Norms on Vector spaces, orthogonal and orthonormal sets, Gram-Schmidt process
 Define linear transformation (L1)
 Understand the concept of rank and nullity (L2)
Unit 3 Solution of simultaneous algebraic equations 10

Iterative methods of solutions-Gauss Jacobi‘s method, Gauss-Seidal method, Relaxation method. Solution of non-
linear simultaneous equations-Newton-Raphson method.
 Use iteration methods to solve system of linear equations (L3)
 Apply Newton-Raphson method to solve non-linear simultaneous equations (L3)
Unit IV Numerical solution of Partial differential Equations 10

Introduction-Classification of second order equations, finite difference approximation to partial derivatives, Elliptic
equation, solution of Laplace equation, solution of Poisson‘s equation.
 Understand the concept of finite difference approxim ation (L2)
 Utilize the num erical m ethods to solve partial differential equations (L3)
Unit V Numerical solution of heat and wave Equations 8

Parabolic equation, Solutions of one-dimensional heat equation (Explicit & Implicit schem es), Hyperbolic
equation, solution of wave equation
 Define heat and wave equations (L1)
137
 Understand the concept of explicit and implicit schem es to solve heat and wave equations (L2)
1. A.R. Vasista and J.N. Sharm a, Linear Algebra, Krishna Prakashan M edia, 2019
2. S. Lang, Linear Algebra, 3rd edition, Springer, 2004.
3. D W Lewis, M atrix Theory, World Scientific, 1991.
4. B. S. Grewal, Numerical M ethods in Engineering & Science, 9/e, Khanna Publishers, 2010.
Reference Books:
1. K. Janich, Linear Algebra, Springer, 1994.
2. B. Koleman and D Hill, Elementary Linear Algebra, 9/e, Pearson, 2007.
3. S.S. Sastry, Introductory M ethods of Numerical Analysis, 7/e, PHI Publishers, 2014.
Course Outcomes:
Upon successful com pletion of the course, the student will be able to Blooms Level of Learning
1. understand the concept of vector spaces L2
2. understand the concept of Linear transformation L2
3. apply numerical methods to solve algebraic equations L3
4. Apply numerical techniques to solve partial differential equations. L3
5. use num erical methods to solve engineering problems L3
CO-PO Mapping:
PO10
PO11
PO12
PS01
PS02
PS03
PO1
PO2
PO3
PO4
PO5
PO6
PO7
PO8
PO9
CO/PO
20AC5BT.1 2 2 - - - - - - - - - 2 - - -
20AC5BT.2 3 3 - - - - - - - - - 3 - - -
20AC5BT.3 3 3 - - - - - - - - - 3 - - -
20AC5BT.4 3 3 - - - - - - - - - 3 - - -
20AC5BT.5 2 2 - - - - - - - - - 2 - - -
138
Title of the Course Human Resource M anagement

Category OEC
Course Code 20AE5AT
Year III B. Tech.

Semester I Semester

3 0 0 3
Course Objectives:
 The course is designed broadly to promote understanding of procurement, development, maintenance,
evaluation and overall effective utilization of manpower.
Unit 1 Introduction to Human Resource Management 10

Introduction-Definition-Nature of HRM -Scope of HRM -Functions of HRM -M anagerial functions and Operative
functions-Role of HRM -Personnel M anagement and HRM -Competitive challenges influencing HRM - Ethical
aspects of HRM .
 Understand the differences between Personnel and Human resource M anagement (L2)
 Identify the ethical issues to be followed in the organization (L1)
Unit 2 Manpower Planning , Job analysis and Job design 12

Introduction to M anpower Planning- Nature of HRP-Need and Importance of HRP in Organizations-Factors
affecting HRP-HRP process-Barriers to HRP- Human Resource Information System.
Job analysis: Definitions, Nature of Job analysis, process of Job analysis-methods of collecting job data.
Job design: Definition-Factors affecting Job Design-Job design Approaches.
 Identify the need of M anpower planning in Organizations‘ (L1)
 Find the basic requirements of job analysis and job design (L1)
Unit 3 Recruitment and Selection of Human Capital 10

Recruitment: Nature of Recruitment-Purpose and Importance- Factors governing Recruitment-Recruitment
process- Sources of Recruitment.
Selection: Nature of Selection-Selection Process- Selection tests-Barriers to effective selection.
Placement and orientation.
 Determine the requirements of recruitment and selection (L3)
 Prepare himself when attending for different selection tests (L3)
Unit 4 Training and Development 10

Nature of Training and Development-Inputs in Training and development-Benefits of Employee Training-Training
Process-Training M ethods-Impediments to effective training-Career development: Definition-Initiatives-stages.
 Extend the dynamic aspects of training and its applicability for the growth of organization(L2)
 Apply Training methods in order to make training effective(L3)
Unit 5 Evaluation and Compensation management 10

Performance Appraisal: Nature-objectives-Appraisal Process-M ethods of Appraisal.
Compensation: Objectives-Objectives of Remuneration-Theories of Remuneration-Wage policy in India-Concept
of Wages.
139
Grievance process- Importance and Approaches of Industrial relations-Collective Bargaining.
 Understand the various performance appraisal methods in an Organization(L2)
 Finds ways for evaluating compensation related pay in various organizations(L1)
1. K. Aswathappa, Human Resource M anagement: Text and cases, The M cGraw-Hill Companies, 5th Edition,.
2. P. SubbaRao, Personnel and Human Resource M anagement, Himalaya Publishing House, 5 th Revised
Edition.
Reference Books:
1. Noe A.Raymond, John Hollenbeck, Barry Gerhart and Patrick Wright, Human Resource M anagement, Tata
Mc Graw Hill.
2. Ian Beardwell & Len Holden, Human Resource M anagement, M acmillan India Ltd.
3. Ivansevich, Human Resource M anagement, Tata M cGraw Hill, 10th Edition.
4. Dessler Gary, Human Resource M anagement, Prentice Hall, 10th Edition.
5. Bernardi, Human Resource M anagement, Tata M cGraw Hill, 4th Edition.
Course Outcomes:
1. Understand the basics of Human Resource M anagement. L2
2. Know the basic requirements of Job and the way of designing the jobs in
L1
the organization.
3. Apply different Recruitment and selection techniques in their practical life when
L3
attending for recruitment and selection processes.
4. Get awareness of various Training and Development methods in the
L2
Organization.
5. Identify various types of performance appraisal methods and compensation
L1
designs in the organization.
CO-PO Mapping:
PO10
PO11
PO12
PS01
PS02
PS03
PO1
PO2
PO3
PO4
PO5
PO6
PO7
PO8
PO9
CO
20AE5AT.1 - - - - - - - 2 - - - 3 - - -
20AE5AT.2 - - 1 - - - - - 3 - - 3 - - -
20AE5AT.3 - - 1 - - - - - - - 3 3 - - -
20AE5AT.4 - - - - - - - 3 - - 3 - - - -
20AE5AT.5 2 - - - - - - - - - - 3 - - -
140
Title of the Course Intellectual Property Rights

Category OEC
Course Code 20AE5BT
Year III B. Tech

Semester I Semester

3 0 0 3
Course Objectives:
 To introduce fundamental aspects of Intellectual property rights to student who are going to play a vital role in
development and management of innovative projects in industries
 To disseminate knowledge of kinds and types of intellectual property in India and abroad and registration
aspects.
 To get aware about current trend in IPR and government steps in fostering IPR
Unit 1 Concept of Property 12

M eaning of Property, Kinds of property: M ovable and Immovable property; Tangible and Intangible property;
Intellectual property; Private and Public property. Possession and ownership.
 Explain the meaning of property and kinds of properties (L1)
 Able to distinguish between different types of properties (L4)
Unit 2 Intellectual Property Rights 12

Introduction and the need for Intellectual Property Rights (IPR), IPR in India – Genesis and Development, Forms
of Intellectual Property- Copyright, Trademarks, Patents, Designs, Geographical Indicators, M erchandise,
Franchise and Forms of Unfair Competition. Competing rationales of the legal regimes for the protection of
Intellectual Property.
 To get awareness of need for Intellectual Property Rights (IPR) (L1)
 To acquire knowledge in different forms of Intellectual Property- Copyright, Trademarks,
Patents, Designs and Geographical Indicators (L2)
Unit 3 Copyrights & Trademarks 14

Copy Right: M eaning of Copyright, Copyright in literary, dramatic, musical work and cinematograph films
Ownership, Assignment, Author‘s special rights, Importation and infringement, Fair use provisions. Trademarks:
Definition; conception of trademarks, Registration, Distinction between trademark and property mark, Standards of
proof in passing off action.
 understand the meaning of Copyright and infringement (L1)
 find the importance of Trademarks and its registration(L1)
Unit 4 Patents, Designs and Geographical Indicators 14

Conception of Patent, Patentable Inventions, Process of obtaining a Patent: application, examination, opposition
and sealing of patents; Rights and obligations of a Patentee, International Patents, Transfer of technology, know-
how and problems of self-reliant development. Basic provisions related to Designs, Geographical Indicators.
 understand the role of patent in innovation and Process of obtaining a Patent (L1)
 acquire knowledge about basic provisions related to Designs and Geographical Indicators (L2)
141
Unit 5 International Instruments Concerning intellectual Property Rights 10
The Berne Convention, Universal Copyright Convention, The Paris Union, The World Intellectual Property Rights
Organization (WIPO), UNESCO, TRIPS, TRIMS, and WTO.
 become familiar with international instruments concerning intellectual property (L2)
 Able to understand role of The World Intellectual Property Rights Organization (WIPO) and
WTO in promoting IPRs(L2)
1. Intellectual Property Rights: Basic Concepts, MMS Karki, Atlantic, 2009.
2. Intellectual Property Rights, Pandey, Neeraj, Dharani, Khushdeep.
Reference Books:
1. Intellectual Property Rights in India: General Isuues and Implications, Dr. Prankrishna Pal, Regal
Series.
2. Intellectual Property, W.R. Cornish, Sweet & M axwell, London, 2012.
3. Principles of Intellectual Property, N.S. Gopalakrishnan & T.G. Agitha, Eastern BookCompany,
Lucknow, 2009.
Course Outcomes:
1. Gain awareness about Intellectual Property Rights (IPRs). L2
2. Acquire adequate knowledge in the kinds of Intellectual Property Rights
L1
(IPRs)
3. learn the process of patent filing and registration in India L3
4. Learn the basic concepts of relating to copy rights, trademarks, geographical
L2
indications and others Intellectual properties.
5. Gain more insights into the regulatory aspects of Intellectual Property Rights (IPRs).
L2
in India
CO-PO Mapping:
PO10
PO11
PO12
PS01
PS02
PS03
PO1
PO2
PO3
PO4
PO5
PO6
PO7
PO8
PO9
CO
20AE5BT.1 1 1 - - 1 - - - - - - - - - -
20AE5BT.2 2 - 2 - 2 - 2 - 2 - - 1 - - -
20AE5BT.3 - 2 - - - 2 1 3 - 2 1 - - - -
20AE5BT.4 1 - 2 - - - - 1 - - - - - - -
20AE5BT.5 - 1 - 2 - - - 2 - - 2 - - - -
142
Title of the Course IC Engines

Category PEC
Course Code 20A35AT
Year III B. Tech

Semester I Semester
Branch ME

3 0 0 3
Course Objectives:
 To provide the basic concept of engines and its operation cycles
 To understand the combustion phenomenon in internal combustion engines and its important systems
 To acquaint with the various methods for measurement of engine performance
 To provide insight into the harmful effects of engine pollutants and its control
Classification - Working principles, Valve and Port Timing Diagrams, Engine systems – Fuel, Simple Carburetor,
Fuel Injection System – Air Injection system, Solid Injection system and Electronic Injection system. Ignition –
Battery ignition system and M agneto ignition system, Cooling – Air cooling (Cooling Fins) and liquid cooing system
– Thermo syphon system and Forced Circulation system and Lubrication - Importance - M ist Lubrication System,
Wet sump Lubrication system and Dry sump Lubrication system.
Actual Cycles And Their Analysis: Introduction, Comparison of Air Standard and Actual Cycles, Time Loss
Factor, Heat Loss Factor, Exhaust Blow down - Loss due to Gas exchange process, Volumetric Efficiency. Loss
due to Rubbing Friction, Actual and Fuel-Air Cycles of CI Engines.
 Gain the knowledge on basic information of engines. (L1)
 Know about air standard cycle, fuel air cycle and Actual cycle. (L2)
Unit 2 Combustion in SI, Fuel Supply and Ignition System Engines 12

Combustion In S.I. Engines: Normal Combustion and abnormal combustion – Importance of flame speed and
effect of engine variables – Type of Abnormal combustion, pre-ignition and knocking (explanation) – Fuel
requirements and fuel rating, combustion chamber – requirements, types.
 Understand the concept of working and combustion phenomenon in SI engine. (L2)
Unit 3 Combustion in CI Engines and Fuel Supply System 12

Combustion In C.I. Engines: Four stages of combustion – Delay period and its importance – Effect of engine
variables – Diesel Knock– Need for air movement, suction, compression and combustion induced turbulence –
open and divided combustion chambers and nozzles used – fuel requirements and fuel rating.
 Understand the concept of working and combustion phenomenon in CI engine. (L2)
Unit 4 Engine Testing and Performance 08

Parameters of performance - measurement of cylinder pressure, fuel consumption, air intake, exhaust gas
composition, Brake power – Determination of frictional losses and indicated power – Performance test – Heat
balance sheet.
 Understand the measurements of performance of an engine. (L2)
 Know about the distribution of heat in IC engines
143
Unit 5 Engine Exhaust Emission and its control and Alternative Fuels for IC Engines 06
Engine Exhaust Emission and its control Formation of NOx, HC, CO and particulate emissions, M ethods of
controlling emissions; Two way and three way Catalytic convertors, Exhaust Gas Recirculation. EURO and
BHARAT norms
Alternative Fuels: Alcohol, Hydrogen, and Liquefied Petroleum Gas, Biodiesel, M erits and Demerits as fuels.
 Know about emissions standards. (L2)
 Analyze emission formation I engines. (L3)
 Know about the methods of controlling emissions. (L2)

1. V. Ganesan, I.C. Engines. TM H.6th edition, 2018. ISBN: 9781259006197
2. B.P. Pundir, IC Engines:Combustion and Emissions, Narosa, 2014. ISBN: 978-81-8487-087-9
3. Heywood, I.C. Engines. M cGrawHill. 2nd edition, 2018. ISBN: 9781260116113, 1260116115
Reference Books:
1. M athur& Sharma, IC Engines. DhanpathRai& Sons, 2016. ISBN: 9788170237440, 8170237440
2. Pulkrabek, Engineering fundamentals of IC Engines. Pearson, PHI, 4th edition, 2013. ISBN:9781292054971
3. Rajput, Thermal Engineering. Lakshmi Publications. 8th edition, 2010. ISBN: 9788131808047
4. R.S. Khurmi&J.K.Gupta, Thermal Engineering. S.Chand, 16th edition, 2016. ISBN: 9788121925730
5. Omkar Singh, Applied thermodynamics, 4th edition, New age Int.pub, 2015. ISBN: 9788122417630
6. Ramalingam K. K., IC Engines, Scitech Publications (India) Pvt Ltd,2018, ISBN: 9788183716734
Course Outcomes:
1. Gain the knowledge on type of application of various engine systems used in I.C L1, L2
engines.
2. Understand the concept of combustion in SI engine. L2
3. Understand the concept of combustion in CI engine L2
4. Conduct the performance test & estimating the performance of an I.C engines. L2, L3
5. Show their ability to Justify Engine Exhaust Emission and its Control in IC L1, L2
Engine by Choosing Alternative Fuels.
CO-PO Mapping:
PSO1
PSO2
PSO3
PO10
PO11
PO12
PO1
PO2
PO3
PO4
PO5
PO6
PO7
PO8
PO9
CO
20A35AT.1 3 3 3 3 - - - - - - - - - - -
20A35AT.2 3 3 3 3 - - 1 - - - - - - 2 -
20A35AT.3 3 3 3 - - - - - - - - 3 - 2 -
20A35AT.4 3 3 3 3 - - - - - 1 - 3 - 2 -
20A35AT.5 3 3 3 3 - 1 - - - - - 3 - 2 -
144
Department of MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
Title of the Course Design of Transmission System

Category PEC
Course Code 20A35BT
Year III B. Tech

Semester I Semester
Branch ME

3 0 0 3
Course Objectives:
 To gain knowledge on the principles and procedure for the design of M echanical power Transmission
components.
 To understand the standard procedure available for Design of Transmission of M echanical elements
 To learn to use standard data and catalogues (Use of P S G Design Data Book permitted)
Unit 1 Design of Flexible Elements 11

Design of Flat belts and pulleys – Selection of V belts and pulleys – Selection of hoisting wire ropes and pulleys –
Design of Transmission chains and Sprockets.
 Learn the basics of Flat belts and pulleys(L2)
 Design of Flat belts and pulleys (L6)
 Design of Transmission chains and Sprockets (L6)
Unit 2 Design of Spur gear and Helical gear 10

Speed ratios and number of teeth-Force analysis -Tooth stresses – Dynamic effects – Fatigue strength – Factor of
safety – Gear materials – Design of straight tooth spur & helical gears based on strength and wear considerations
- Equivalent number of teeth-forces for helical gears.
 analyze the forces induced in the gears (L4)
Unit 3 Design of Bevel and Worm Gears 14

Straight bevel gear: Tooth terminology, tooth forces and stresses, equivalent number of teeth. Design of bevel
gears.
Worm Gear: worm gear – terminology – forces – efficiency – thermal capacity and efficiency – merits and demerits
 analyze the forces and stresses induced in the gears (L4)
Unit 4 Design of Gear Boxes 8

Gear boxes – introduction – different types of gear boxes – speed selection - Geometric progression –– Ray
diagram, -Design of sliding mesh gear box – Design of multi speed gear box .
 Learn the basics of gear box(L2)
 design procedure for gear box (L6)
Unit 5 Design of Clutches and Brakes 8

Design of plate clutches –axial clutches-cone clutches-internal expanding rim clutches- Electromagnetic clutches.
145
Band and Block brakes – external shoe brakes – Internal expanding shoe brake
 Gain knowledge on Clutches and Brakes. (L1)
 Design procedure for clutches. (L6)
 Design procedure for Brakes. (L6)
Text Books:
1. Bhandari V, ―Design of M achine Elements‖, 4th Edition, Tata M cGraw-Hill Book Co, 2017 ISBN
9780070611412.
2. Joseph Shigley, Charles M ischke, Richard Budynas and Keith Nisbett ―M echanical Engineering Design‖, 8th
Edition, Tata M cGraw-Hill, 2008. ISBN: 9780070668614
Reference Books:
1. Sundararaja moorthy T. V, Shanmugam .N, "M achine Design", Anuradha Publications, Chennai, 2003. ISBN:
978-81-7409-190-1
2. Shigley J.E and M ischke C. R., ―M echanical Engineering Design‖, Sixth Edition, Tata M cGraw - Hill , 2003.
ISBN-13 ‫‏‬:‎978-0070494626
3. Data Books: (i) Balaveera reddy and M ahadevan
Tables/Codes: Design data books are to be supplied in examination
Course Outcomes:
1. Learn and design the belts, chains and rope drives. L2 & L6
2. Learn, analyze and design the spur & helical gears. L2, L4 & L6
3. Learn, analyze and design the worm and bevel gears. L2, L4 & L6
4. Learn and design the gear boxes. L2 & L6
5. Gain knowledge and design to cams, brakes and clutches L1 & L6
CO-PO Mapping:
PSO1
PSO2
PSO3
PO10
PO11
PO12
PO1
PO2
PO3
PO4
PO5
PO6
PO7
PO8
PO9
CO
20A35BT.1 3 3 3 3 - - 3 - - - 2 - - - -
20A35BT.2 3 3 3 3 - - 2 - - - - - - - -
20A35BT.3 3 3 3 3 - - 2 - - - - - - - -
20A35BT.4 3 3 3 3 - - 3 2 2 - - - 3 - -
20A35BT.5 3 3 3 3 - - 3 2 2 - - - 3 - -
146
Title of the Course Industrial M anagement

Category PEC
Course Code 20A35CT
Year III B. Tech

Semester I Semester
Branch ME

3 0 0 3
Course Objectives:
 To create awareness to learn principles, concepts, and functions of management and also to design
organizational structures.
 To Gain knowledge on plant location, layouts, and materials management concepts in organizational context.
 To familiarize the students regarding work study and marketing
 To analyze concepts of network techniques.
 To get awareness on Strategic M anagement & Human Resource M anagement and its functions
Unit 1 Management and Organization 10

Concepts of M anagement and Organization – Functions of M anagement – Evolution of M anagement Thought:
Taylor‘s Scientific M anagement, Fayol‘s Principles of M anagement - M aslow‗s Theory of Human Needs, Douglas
McGregor‗s Theory X and Theory Y, Social responsibilities of M anagement
Basic concepts related to Organization - Departmentation and Decentralization, Types of organization, Line
organization, Line and staff organization, functional organization, Committee organization, matrix organization and
their merits and demerits
 explain concepts of management (L3)
 differentiate leadership styles (L4)
 explain Taylor‘s Scientific M anagement Theory (L3)
Unit 2 Plant Location & Materials Management 8

Plant location, definition, factors affecting the plant location, comparison of rural and urban sites-methods for
selection of plant. Plant Layout – definition, objectives, types of production, types of plant layout
EOQ, ABC Analysis, Purchase Procedure and Stores M anagement. Inventory — functions. Types, inventory
classification techniques
 explain the concept of Plant location (L3)
 define EOQ (L2)
 explain functions of inventory management (L3)
Unit 3 Work Study& Marketing 8

Definition, objectives, M ethod study - definition, objectives, steps involved- various types of associated charts-
Work measurement- definition, time study, steps involved-equipment, different methods of performance rating-
allowances, standard time calculation. Work Sampling – definition, steps involved, standard time calculations,
differences with time study- Applications. Predetermined motion time study – M ethod time measurement (M TM)
M arketing: Functions of M arketing, M arketing M ix, and M arketing Strategies based on Product Life Cycle,
Channels of distribution.
 explain the concept of work-study(L2)
 differentiate between method study and time study(L3)
 discuss 4Ps of M arketing (L3)
147
Unit 4 Project Management 9
Network Analysis, Programme Evaluation and Review Technique (PERT), Critical Path M ethod (CPM ), Identifying
critical path, Probability of Completing the project within given time, Project Cost Analysis, Project Crashing.
 define CPM (L1)
 explain the concept of PERT (L4)
 Demonstrate Project Crashing. (L5)
Unit 5 Human Resource Management & Strategic Management 10

Functions of HRM , Job Evaluation, different types of evaluation methods. Job description, M erit Rating- difference
with job evaluation, different methods of merit ratings, wage incentives, different types of wage incentive schemes.
Strategic M anagement: Vision, M ission, Goals, Objectives, Policy, Strategy, Programmes, Elements of Corporate
Planning Process, Environmental Scanning, Value Chain Analysis, SWOT Analysis, Steps in Strategy Formulation
and Implementation
 explain the concept of HRM (L2)
 distinguish between Personnel M anagement and HRM (L3)
 discuss steps in strategy formulation and implementation (L2)
 differentiate between Vision and M ission (L3)
1. Armine, M anufacturing Organization and M anagement. Pearson, 2009, 6thed. ISBN-10: 8177582755
2. O.P. Khanna, Industrial Engineering and M anagement., DhanpatRai, 2018,17thed, ISBN-10: 818992835X
3. Stoner, Freeman, Gilbert, M anagement, Pearson Edu., 2007, 6th Ed., ISBN: 9788131707043
4. Pannerselvam, Production and Operations M anagement. PHI, 2010,ISBN-10: 9788120345553
Reference Books:
1. Ralph M Barnes, M otion and Time Studies. John Wiley and Sons, 2007, ISBN: 978-0-471-05905-9
2. Chase, Jacobs, Aquilano, Operations M anagement. TM H, 2007, 10th Ed, ISBN-10: 0071215557
3. L.S. Srinath, PERT/CPM . East-West Press, 2005, ISBN 10: 8185336202
4. James Arthur Finch Stoner, R. Edward Freeman, Daniel R. Gilbert, M anagement, 6/e, Prentice Hall, 2010
Course Outcomes:
1. Discuss the principles and functions of management & decide the competitive L3 & L4
strategy that works best for the organization
2. Understand the importance of plant locations and Learn the concepts of material L3 & L4
management and apply the knowledge of inventory management
3. Understand the concept of work study, method study and types of associated L3& L4
charts, the work measurement, work sampling and marketing strategies in work
setting
4. Develop effective project management techniques L5
5. Discuss the importance of various sub systems of HRM &Strategic M anagement L3
CO-PO Mapping:
PSO1
PSO2
PSO3
PO10
PO11
PO12
PO1
PO2
PO3
PO4
PO5
PO6
PO7
PO8
PO9
CO
20A35CT.1 3 - - - - - - - 3 3 3 - - -
20A35CT.2 3 3 - 3 - - - - - - 3 - - - -
20A35CT.3 3 3 - 3 - - - - 3 3 - 3 - - -
20A35CT.4 3 3 - 3 - - - - - - 3 - - 2 -
20A35CT.5 3 - - - - - - 2 3 3 - - - - -
148
Title of the Course Optimization Techniques

Category PEC
Course Code 20A35DT
Year III B. Tech

Semester I Semester
Branch ME

3 0 0 3
Course Objectives:
 To Introduce basics of M ATLAB
 To Familiarize the fundamentals of optimization
 To Explain single variable optimization using various methods
 To Implement multi variable optimization using various methods
 To Train various evolutionary algorithms.
Unit 1 Introduction to MAT LAB 8

Overview, MATLAB Preliminaries, Basics of M ATLAB, Beyond the Basics of M ATLAB, Popular Functions and
Commands, Plotting using M ATLAB, Optimization with M ATLAB.
 Write simple codes in M ATLAB. (L4)
 Plot the data using MATLAB. (L4)
 Implement optimization models in M ATLAB. (L4)
Unit 2 Introduction to Optimization 8

Statement of an optimization problem, Classifications of optimization Problems: Single variable optimization, M ulti
variable optimization with no constraints, M ulti variable optimization with equality constraints, M ulti variable
optimization with inequality constraints, Convex and Concave programming.
 Build optimization problem. (L3)
 Solve various optimization problems. (L3)
 Compare convex and concave programming. (L3)
Unit 3 Single Variable Optimization 8

Finite difference method, Central difference method, Runge - Kutta method, interval halving method, golden
section method with M ATLAB code.
 Understand various methods involving single variable optimization. (L3)
 Develop codes in M ATLAB for different methods. (L3)
 Identify methods for solving a single variable optimization problem. (L3)
Unit 4 Multi Variable Optimization 8

Conjugate gradient method, Newton's method, Powell's method, Flectcher- Reeves method, Hook and Jeeves
method, interior penalty function with M ATLAB code.
 Apply various methods involving multi variable optimization. (L5)
 Develop codes in M ATLAB for solving various multi variable optimization problems. (L5)
 Choose methods for solving a multi variable optimization problem. (L4)
149
Unit 5 Evolutionary Algorithms 8
Overview, Genetic Algorithms: Basics of Genetic Algorithms, Options in MATLAB, Multi Objective Optimization
using Genetic Algorithms, Ant Colony Optimization, Simulated Annealing, Particle Swarm Optimization.
 Apply different types of genetic algorithms. (L4)
 M odel optimization problems using genetic algorithms in M ATLAB. (L4)
 Compare different genetic algorithms for performance. (L4)

1. Rao V.Dukkipati, M ATLAB: An Introduction with Applications, Anshan, 2010. ISBN-10:9781848290433
2. AchilleM essac, Optimization in practice with M ATLAB, Cambridge University Press, 2015.
ISBN:9781107109186
3. Jasbir S Arora, Introduction to optimum design, 2/e. Elsevier, 2004. ISBN: 9780120641550
Reference Books:
1. Cesar Perez Lopez, M ATLAB Optimization Techniques, Academic press, Springer publications, 2014. ISBN:
978-1-4842-0292-0.
2. Steven C.Chapra, Applied Numerical M ethods with M ATLAB for Engineers and scientists, 4/e, M cGraw-Hill
Education, 2018. ISBN: 978-0-07-339796-2
Course Outcomes:
1. use optimization terminology and concepts, and understand how to classify an L4
optimization problem
2. apply optimization methods to engineering problems L3
3. Implement optimization algorithms. L3
4. Compare different genetic algorithms. L4 & L5
5. Solve multivariable optimization problems L4
CO-PO Mapping:
PSO1
PSO2
PSO3
PO10
PO11
PO12
PO1
PO2
PO3
PO4
PO5
PO6
PO7
PO8
PO9
CO
20A35DT.1 3 2 2 3 2 2 - - 2 - 3 2 2 2 2
20A35DT.2 3 2 2 3 2 2 - - 2 - 3 2 2 2 2
20A35DT.3 3 2 2 3 2 2 - - 2 - 3 2 2 2 2
20A35DT.4 3 2 2 3 2 2 - - 2 - 3 2 2 2 2
20A35DT.5 3 2 2 2 2 2 - - 2 - 3 2 2 2 2
150
Title of the Course Thermal Engineering Lab
Category PCC
Course Code 20A351L
Year III B. Tech
Semester I Semester
Branch ME
0 0 3 1.5
Course Objectives:
 To recognize various engine components and demonstrate assemble / disassemble the IC engine.
 To illustrate the concept of valves / ports actuating mechanism.
 To evaluate the performance characteristics of I.C engine, Vapour compression Refrigeration system and
reciprocating air compressor.
 To evaluate and the energy dissipation and importance of heat balance sheet in IC engine.
 To describe the working principle of various boilers used for power generation.
1. Disassembly/assembly of given engine.
2. Performance test on air compressor test rig.
3. Load test on 4-stroke diesel engine
4. Load test on 2-stroke petrol engine
5. Heat balance sheet on 4-stroke diesel engine.
6. Heat balance sheet on 2-stroke petrol engine.
7. M otoring test on 2- stroke petrol engine.
8. Demonstration of boiler
9. (a) valve timing diagram (vtd)
(b) port timing diagram (ptd)
10. (a) Flash and fire point by clevel and (open) cup apparatus.
(b) Calorific value of fuel using bomb calorimeter.
11. Viscosity of the oil through saybolt viscometer apparatus.
12. Performance test on refrigeration test rig.
Course Outcomes:
1. Evaluate the performance, heat balance sheet and morse test on I.C engines. L5
2. Demonstrate Components of I.C engine for assemble / disassemble. L3
3. Demonstrate various boilers used for power generation. L3
4. Describe the working principle of Vapour compression Refrigeration system and L2 & L5
evaluate the Coefficient of performance.
5. Examine the fossil fuel properties. L4
CO-PO Mapping:
PSO1
PSO2
PSO3
PO10
PO11
PO12
PO1
PO2
PO3
PO4
PO5
PO6
PO7
PO8
PO9
CO
20A351L.1 3 3 1 3 2 1 1 - 3 2 1 1 2 1 -
20A351L.2 2 - 2 3 3 - - - - - - - 2 2 -
20A351L.3 3 3 1 3 3 2 2 - 3 2 1 1 2 1 -
20A351L.4 3 3 3 3 - 1 2 - - - - 2 1 2 -
20A351L.5 - - 1 3 - - - - - - - - 2 1 -
151
Title of the Course M achine Tools Lab

Category PCC
Course Code 20A352L
Year III B. Tech

Semester I Semester
Branch ME

0 0 3 1.5
Course Objectives:
 To demonstrate the usage of metrology lab equipment.. To learn the Step turning and taper turning and
thread cutting on lathe machine
 To learn the operations of Drilling, Tapping, Shaping, Slotting and milling.
1. Demonstration of construction & operations of general purpose machines: Lathe, Drilling machine, M illing
machine, Shaper, Planning machine, Slotting machine, Cylindrical Grinder, Surface grinder and Tool & cutter
grinder
2. Job on Step turning and taper turning on lathe machine
3. Job on Thread cutting and knurling on -lathe machine.
4. Job on Drilling and Tapping
5. Job on Shaping and Planning
6. Job on Slotting
7. Job on M illing Job on Cylindrical Surface Grinding
8. Job on Grinding of Tool angles.
Course Outcomes:
1. Apply the procedures to measure length, width, depth, bore diameters, external L5
tapers, tool angles, and surface roughness by using different instruments.
2. M easure the angle and taper using Bevel protractor and Sine bar L4
3. Conduct different machine alignment tests L4
CO-PO Mapping:
PSO1
PSO2
PSO3
PO10
PO11
PO12
PO1
PO2
PO3
PO4
PO5
PO6
PO7
PO8
PO9
CO
20A352L.1 3 3 - 3 3 - - - 3 - - - 3 1 -
20A352L.2 3 - - - 3 - - - 3 - - - 1 3 -
20A352L.3 3 - - - 3 - - - 3 - - - 1 2 3
152
Title of the Course Professional Communication

Category SC
Course Code 20AC51L
Year III
Semester I Semester
Branch EEE, ECE, ME

1 0 2 2
Course Objectives:
 To understand various strategies of resume building
 To understand interview process and be prepared for facing it
 To learn group discussion techniques
 To learn about professional writing and presentations
 To be aware of managerial skills
Syllabus
Résumé preparation: Structure, formats and styles – planning - defining career objective - projecting one‘s
strengths and skills - creative self-marketing - sample résumés -cover letter.
Interview Skills: Concepts and process - pre-interview planning - preparation body language -answering
strategies - frequently asked questions - mock interviews - students taking up the roles of interviewer and
interviewee
Group Discussion: Communicating views and opinions - discussing - intervening - agreeing and disagreeing
– asking for and giving clarifications – substantiating - providing solutions on any given topics across a cross –
section of individuals - modulations of voice and clarity - body language - case study – observation of group
behaviors – social etiquette
Presentation Skills (Individual and Team): Collection of data from various sources - planning, preparation,
and practice - types of audience - attention-getting strategies – transitions - handling questions from audience
– dealing with difficult audience
Technical Report Writing: Types of formats and styles, subject matter, clarity, coherence and style, planning
– data collection and analysis, report preparation, preparation of figures and tables, references
Managerial skills: Personality traits such as integrity, accountability, assertiveness, adaptability, diplomacy
and dynamism - innovative strategies for dealing with different people in different contexts - showcasing live
examples, sharing anecdotes and inspiring quotes related to leadership qualities
Learning Resources: Soft Skills lab manual prepared by Dept. of H&S, AITS Rajampet
Course Outcomes: Bloom‘s
Upon successful completion of the course, students will be able to Level of
Learning
1. Express themselves fluently in social and professional contexts. L4
2. make presentations confidently L5
3. face interviews confidently and to participate in meetings effectively L4
4. participate in group discussions confidently L4
5. write technical reports L4
6. lead a team as a manager of the group L5
153
CO-PO Mapping:
PO10
PO11
PO12
PS01
PS02
PS03
PO1
PO2
PO3
PO4
PO5
PO6
PO7
PO8
PO9
COs
20AC51L.1 - - - - - - - - 3 - 3 - - -
20AC51L.2 - - - - - - - - - 3 - 3 - - -
20AC51L.3 - - - - - - - - - 3 - 3 - - -
20AC51L.4 - - - - - - - - - 3 - 3 - - -
20AC51L.5 - - - - - - - - - 3 - 3 - - -
20AC51L.6 - - - - - - - - - 3 - 3 - - -
154
Title of the Course Constitution of India

Category MC
Course Code 20AC52T
Year III
Semester I Semester
Branch EEE, ECE, ME

3 0 0 0
Course Objectives:
 To understand the importance of the constitution
 To learn the structure of executive, legislature, and judiciary
 To understand the philosophy of fundamental rights and duties
 To learn the autonomous nature of constitutional bodies like the Supreme Court and High Court, Controller
and Auditor General of India and Election Commission of India.
 To understand the union and state financial and administrative relations
Unit1 8
IntroductiontoIndianConstitution:Constitution,meaningoftheterm,IndianConstitution-Sourcesand
Constitutional history, Features Citizenship, Preamble, Fundamental Rights and Duties, Directive Principles of
State Policy.
 Understand the necessity of framed rules of constitution
 Understand the process of citizenship
 Distinguish fundamental rules from fundamental duties
12
Unit2
Union Government and its Administration Structure of the Indian Union: Federalism, Centre – State relationship,
President: Role, power and position, PM and Council of ministers, Cabinet and Central Secretariat, LokSabha,
Rajya Sabha, The Supreme Court and High Court: Powers and Functions
 Understand administrative structure of union government
 Understand the federal nature of Indian Union
 Understand judicial structure at various levels
10
Unit3
State Government and its Administration – Governor – Role and Position – CM and Council of ministers, State
Secretariat: Organization, Structure and Functions
 Understand the administrative structure of state government
 Know the power distribution between CM and Governor
8
155
Unit4
Local Administration – District Administration Head – Role and Importance, M unicipalities – M ayor and role of
Elected Representative – CEO of M unicipal Corporation Panchayati Raj: Functions PRI: Zila Panchayat, Elected
officials and their roles, CEO Zila Panchayat: Block level Organization all Hierarchy - (Different departments),
Village level – Role of Elected and Appointed officials – Importance of grass root democracy.
 Understand district administrative structure
 Understand various kinds of local governance in practice
 Know the relevance of local administration in accomplishing grass-root democracy
10
Unit5
Election Commission: Election Commission – Role of Chief Election Commissioner and Election Commissionerate
State Election Commission: Functions of Commissions for the welfare of SC/ST/OBC and women
 Understand the autonomous role of ECI in conducting free and fair elections
 Need of various National commissions in the uplift of weaker sections
1. Durga Das Basu, Introduction to the Constitution of India, Prentice-Hall of India Pvt. Ltd. New Delhi
2. Subash Kashyap, Indian Constitution, National Book Trust
ReferenceBooks
1. J.A.Siwach, Dynamics of Indian Government & Politics
2. D.C.Gupta, Indian Government and Politics
3. M .V.Pylee, India‘s Constitution
Course Outcomes:
Upon successful completion of the course, student will be able to Blooms Level of Learning
1. Understand the historical background of the constitution making and its importance L2
for building a democratic India.
2. Understand the functioning of three wings of the government, i.e., executive, L2
legislative and judiciary.
3. Understand the value of the fundamental rights and duties for becoming good L2
citizens of India.
4. Understand the decentralization of power between union, state and local self - L2
government.
5. Understand the operation of constitutional institutions like CAG, Election L2
Commission and UPSC for sustaining democracy
CO-PO Mapping:
PO10
PO11
PO12
PS01
PS02
PS03
PO1
PO2
PO3
PO4
PO5
PO6
PO7
PO8
PO9
COs
20AC52T.1 - - - - - - - - - - - 2 - - -
20AC52T.2 - - - - - - - - - - - 3 - - -
20AC52T.3 - - - - - - - - - - - 3 - - -
20AC52T.4 - - - - - - - - - - - 2 - - -
20AC52T.5 - - - - - - - - - - - 3 - - -
156
Title of the Course Heat Transfer

Category PCC
Course Code 20A361T
Year III B. Tech

Branch ME

3 0 0 3
Course Objectives:
 To impart the basic laws of conduction, convection, radiation heat transfer and their applications
 To provide knowledge about heat flow in various systems.
 To familiarize the convective heat transfer concepts.
 To understand the principles of phase change processes and radiation heat transfer.
 To make conversant about heat transfer in various heat exchangers
Unit 1 Introduction to conduction heat transfer 6

Introduction: M odes and mechanisms of heat transfer – Basic laws of heat transfer –General applications of heat
transfer. Conduction Heat Transfer: Fourier heat transfer equation – General heat conduction equation in
Cartesian, Cylindrical and Spherical coordinates. Simplification and forms of the field equation – steady, unsteady
and periodic heat transfer – boundary and Initial conditions.
 Identify the different modes of Heat Transfer. (L2)
 Applying Basic Governing Equation of different modes of Heat Transfer. (L3)
Unit 2 One dimensional steady state & transient heat conduction 12

One Dimensional Steady State Heat Conduction: In homogeneous slabs, hollow cylinders and spheres – overall
heat transfer coefficient – electrical analogy – Critical radius/thickness of insulation–System with internal heat
generation (elementary treatment-Plane Wall-Uniform). Extended surface (fins) Heat Transfer – Long Fin, Fin with
insulated tip and Short Fin, Application to error measurement of Temperature. One Dimensional Transient Heat
Conduction: Systems with negligible internal resistance – Significance of Biot and Fourier Numbers - Chart
solutions of transient conduction systems- Problems on semi-infinite body.
 Gain the knowledge on one Dimensional Steady state heat conduction in slabs, hollow cylinder and
Spheres. (L2)
 Apply the Knowledge on different types of Fins And their Efficiency. (L3)
 Gain knowledge on Transient Heat Conduction. (L2)
Unit 3 Convective heat transfer 10

Convective Heat Transfer: Forced Convection: External Flows-Concepts of hydrodynamic and thermal boundary
layer and use of empirical correlations for flow over-flat plates, cylinders. Internal Flows:-Division of internal flow
through concepts of Hydrodynamic and Thermal entry lengths – Use of empirical relations for horizontal pipe flow,
annular flow. Free Convection: -Development of Hydrodynamic and thermal boundary layer along a vertical plate –
Use of empirical relations for plates and cylinders in horizontal and vertical orientation. Dimensional a nalysis
Buckingham π Theorem- examples- Free & Forced convection.
 Gain knowledge on Natural and Forced Convections and their applying skills for Solving Problems. (L3)
 Gain knowledge on Dimensional analysis for in Solving Problems. (L3)
157
Unit 4 Heat transfer with phase change & Radiation 12
Heat Transfer with Phase Change: Boiling- Pool boiling – Regimes, determination of heat transfer coefficient in
Nucleate boiling, Critical Heat flux and Film boiling. Condensation: -Film wise and drop wise condensation.
Radiation Heat Transfer: Emission characteristics and laws of black-body radiation – Irradiation – Total and
M onochromatic quantities– Laws of Planck, Wien, Kirchoff, Lambert, Stefan and Boltzmann– Heat exchange
between two black bodies – Concepts of shape factor – Emissivity –Heat exchange between gray bodies –
Radiation shields– Electrical analogy for radiation networks.
 Gain the knowledge on Heat Transfer with Phase Change. (L2)
 Gain the knowledge on radiation and Radiation shields. (L2)
Unit 5 Heat Exchangers 8

Heat Exchangers: Classification of heat exchangers – Overall heat transfer Coefficient and fouling factor –
Concepts of LM TD and NTU methods - Problems using LM TD and NTU methods.
 Gain knowledge on different types of Heat exchangers and their Application. (L2)
 Gain the Basic knowledge on Heat Exchanger Design.(L2)

1. R.C. Sachdeva, Fundamentals of Engg. Heat and M ass Transfer. New Age International, 5th Ed.2017,
ISBN13: 978-1781831038.
2. P.K.Nag, Heat Transfer. TM H, 3rd Ed. 2011, ISBN-13: 978-0070702530
3. J.P.Holman, Heat Transfer. TM H, 10th Ed. 2010, ISBN-13: 978-0073529363.
Reference Books:
1. Incropera, Fundamentals of Heat and M ass transfer. Wiley India, 8th Ed,2017 ISBN: 978-1-119-35388-1.
2. M . Thirumaleswar, Fundamentals of Heat and M ass Transfer. Pearson Edu. 2006 ISBN 13: 9788177585193.
3. Arora and Domkunduwar/ A course in Heat and M ass transfer /Dhanpathrai and sons.2007, ISBN-13: 978-
8177000290
4. C.P.kothandaraman & S.Subramanyam, Heat and M ass transfer data hand book, New Age Publications,
2014, ISBN-13: 978-8122435955.
Course Outcomes:
1. Identify different modes of heat transfer and apply Basic Governing Equation of L2 & L3
different modes.
2. Apply the knowledge of conduction and transient Heat Conduction heat transfer L2 & L3
for different phenomenon.
3. Interpret forced and free convection heat transfer and dimensional analysis L3
4. Recognize the heat transfer rates in phase change process and radiation. L2
5. Recognize the heat exchanger performance for a given application L2
CO-PO Mapping:
PSO1
PSO2
PSO3
PO10
PO11
PO12
PO1
PO2
PO3
PO4
PO5
PO6
PO7
PO8
PO9
CO
20A361T.1 3 3 - - - - 1 - - - - 2 1 - -
20A361T.2 3 3 1 - - - 1 - - - - 2 1 - -
20A361T.3 3 3 2 - - - 1 - - - - 2 1 - -
20A361T.4 3 3 2 - - 1 2 - - - - 2 1 - -
20A361T.5 3 3 3 - - 1 1 - - - - 2 1 - -
158
Title of the Course M etrology & M easurements

Category PCC
Course Code 20A362T
Year III B. Tech.

Branch ME

3 0 0 3
Course Objectives:
 To understand the principles of Limits, Fits, Tolerances and Gauges to design the machine elements and to
check the dimensional accuracy of machine components.
 To understand the principles of linear measurements and angular measurements to measure the dimensional
accuracy of machine components.
 To understand the principles of roughness of surface, and also learn about the screw thread and gear
measuring methods.
 To understand the principles of various transducers to measure displacement like Piezoelectric, Inductive,
capacitance, resistance, ionization and Photoelectric transducers and also learn about measurement of speed
using various types of tachometers.
 To understand the principles of various sensors and instruments to measure the temperature, pressure, force,
torque and power.
Unit 1 9
Limits, Fits And Tolerances: Introduction, Definitions, fits and their types –unilateral and bilateral tolerance system,
hole and shaft basis systems – interchangeability and selective assembly. Indian standard system – International
Standard organization system for plain work.
Limit Gauges And Gauge Design: Plug, Ring, Snap, Gap, Taper gauges. Taylor‘s principle. Design of Go and No
Go gauges.
Blooms
 learn about providing the tolerances to the assembling machined components (L1)
 learn about checking the tolerances of machined components using Gauges (L2)
Unit 2 8
Linear M easurement: Length standard, line and end & wave length standards, slip gauges – calibration of the slip
gauges, Dial indicator, micrometers, vernier height gauges.
M easurement Of Angles And Tapers: Different methods – Bevel protractor –angle gauges – spirit levels – sine bar
– Sine plate, rollers and spheres used to determine the tapers.
 Learn about various linear measurement instruments (L1).
 Learn about various methods to measure the angles and tapers (L2).
Unit 3 11
Surface Roughness M easurement: Differences between surface roughness and surface waviness- Numerical
assessment of surface finish – CLA, R.M .S Values –Ra, Rzvalues, M ethods of measurement of surface finish -
profilograph, Talysurf, BIS symbols for indication of surface finish.
Screw Thread M easurement: Elements of measurement – errors in screw threads – measurement of effective
diameter, angle of thread and thread pitch- profile thread gauges.
Gear measurement: Gear measuring instruments, Gear tooth profile measurement. M easurement of diameter,
pitch, pressure angle and tooth thickness.
159
 Learn about, how to measure the surface roughness parameters. (L1)
 Learn about, how to measure the various parameters of Screw and Gear components. (L2)
Unit 4 8
M easurement Of Displacement: Theory and construction of various transducers to measure displacement -
Piezoelectric, Inductive, capacitance, resistance, ionization and Photo electric transducers, Calibration
procedures.
M easurement Of Speed: M echanical Tachometers – Electrical tachometers -Stroboscope, Non contact type of
tachometer.
 Learn about various displacements measurement transducers. (L1)
 Learn about various speeds measurement principles of various Tachometers. (L2)
Unit 5 12
M easurement Of Temperature: Standards and calibration, thermal expansion methods, thermoelectric sensors
(thermocouples), Electrical Resistance sensors, Junction semiconductor sensors, Digital thermometers, Radiation
methods.
M easurement Of Pressure: Standards and calibration, basic methods of pressure measurement, deadweight
gauges and manometers, Elastic transducers, High and low pressure measurement.
M easurement Of Force, Torque, Power: Standards and calibration, Basic methods of Force M easurement, Torque
measurement on rotating shafts, shaft power measurement (dynamometers), Vibrating wire force transducers
 Learn about various temperature and pressure measurement techniques. (L1)
 Learn about the various instruments principles to measure the Force, Torque and Power parameters.(L2)
1. Engineering M etrology, R.K. Jain, Khanna Publishers, 20th edition, 2013
2. Engineering M etrology, M ahajan, DhanpatRai, 2nd edition, 2013.
3. D.S. Kumar, M echanical M easurements and Control. M etropolitan Books, New Delhi, 2015.
4. Beckwith and Buck, M echanical M easurements. Narosa Publication.2012
5. S. Ghosh, Control Systems – Theory & Applications. Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2012.
Reference Books:
1. M etrology & M easurement by Anand K Bewoor, vinay A kulkarni, M c Graw Hill, 2013.
2. Fundamentals of Dimensional M etrology, Connie Dotson , 4e, Thomson
3. B.S.M anke, Linear Control Systems. Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 2009.
4. Nagarathan and Gopal, Control System Engineering, Narosa Publishers.
5. Naresh K. Sinha, Control Systems, NAI Publishers, New Delhi, 2008
Course Outcomes:
1. Understand the principles of Limits, Fits, Tolerance and gauges to check the
dimensions of machine elements. He will be in a position to use this knowledge L1,L2,L3
in design and understanding the drawings of machine elements.
2. Understand the different types of linear and angular measuring instruments
working principles. He will be in a position to use this knowledge in production L1 & L2
industry to measure the dimensional accuracy of machine components.
3. Understand the various methods of surface roughness measurement, Screw
thread elements and measuring methods, Gear tooth profile measurement. He
will be in a position to use this knowledge in production industry to check the L1 & L2
surface roughness of component, to check the accuracy of screw threads and
gears.
4. Understand the working of various instruments used for measuring for
displacement and speed. He will be in a position to use this knowledge in L1 & L2
production industry to check the displacement and speed.
160
5. Understand the working of various instruments used for measuring
temperature, pressure, force, torque and power. He will be in a position to use L1 & L2
this knowledge in production industry to evaluate the performance of machines.
CO-PO Mapping:
PSO1
PSO2
PSO3
PO10
PO11
PO12
PO1
PO2
PO3
PO4
PO5
PO6
PO7
PO8
PO9
CO
20A362T.1 1 3 3 2 2 1 1 - - - - - 1 3 1
20A362T.2 2 3 3 2 2 1 1 - - - - - 1 1 -
20A362T.3 3 3 3 2 2 1 1 - - - - - 1 1 -
20A362T.4 4 3 3 2 2 1 1 - - - - - 1 1 -
20A362T.5 5 3 3 2 2 1 1 - - - - - 1 1 -
161
Title of the Course CAD/CAM

Category PCC
Course Code 20A363T
Year III B. Tech

Branch ME

3 0 0 3
Course Objectives:
 To understand the basic concepts of CAD/CAM and Transformations.
 To understand the different geometric modeling techniques like solid modeling, surface modeling, feature
based modeling etc. and to visualize how the components look like before its manufacturing or fabrication
 To Develop NC and CNC programs to manufacture industrial Components.
 To Understand the importance of Group Technology and Flexible M anufacturing System
 To Understand the elements of an automated manufacturing environment
Unit 1 Introduction to Computer Graphics 10

Introduction: Introduction to CAD and CAM - Elements of CAD-Computers in Industrial Engineering-Product Cycle-
CAD/CAM Hardware-Basic Structure of CPU-Input and Output Devices-Display Devices (CRT and DVST)-Raster
Scan Graphics Coordinate System-Representation of Line and Circles, Database Structure for Graphics M odeling-
Transformation -2D and 3D
 Apply CAD/CAM concepts to product design and manufacturing (L3)
 Describe the basic structure of CAD workstations, input devices and output devices etc (L2)
Unit 2 Curve Representation 10

Geometric M odeling-Classification of wireframe entities, Curve representation methods, Parametric representation
of analytic curves: line, circle, arc, conics, Parametric representation of synthetic curves: Hermite cubic curve,
Bezier curve, B-Spleen curve-Representation of surface modelling, -Hermite bicubic surface patch-Bezier and B-
spline Surfaces, Solid modelling techniques, CSG and B-rep.
 Develop a mathematical model to represent curves. (L6)
 Develop different types of surfaces with the help of different curves (L6)
Unit 3 Numerical Control 10

NC, NC modes, NC elements, NC machine tools, structure of CNC machine tools, features of M achining center,
turning center, CNC Part Programming: fundamentals, manual part programming methods, Computer Aided Part
Programming.
 Explain the basic concepts of CNC programming and machining (L2)
 Understand the concepts of M achining centers. (L2)
Unit 4 Group Technology And Flexible Manufacturing System 10

Group Technology: Part family, coding and classification, production flow analysis, advantages and limitations,
Computer Aided Processes Planning, Retrieval type and Generative type.
Flexible M anufacturing System: Introduction to FM S – M aterial Handling System – Computer Control Systems –
Human Labor in M anufacturing system – Applications – Advantages and Limitations
 Design and Analyze the layouts of manufacturing system (L6)
162
 Design material handling for a typical production system (L6)
Unit 5 Computer Integrated Production Planning And Computer Aided Quality Control 10
Computer Aided Quality Control (CAQC): Capacity planning, shop floor control, M RP-I, M RP-II, CIMS benefits, JIT
approach. Terminology in quality control, the computer in QC, contact inspection methods, non-contact inspection
methods-optical and non-optical, computer aided testing, integration of CAQC with CAD/CAM .
 Describe the automation inspection systems. (L2)
 Understand the role of computers in quality systems. (L2)

1. P N Rao, CAD/CAM – Principle and Applications
2. A Zimmer & P Groover, CAD/CAM. PE,PHI
3. RadhaKrishnan and Subramaniah, CAD/CAM /CIM . New Age
Reference Books:
1. Groover, P.E, Automation, Production systems & Computer integrated M anufacturing
2. Farid Amirouche, Principles of Computer Aided Design and M anufacturing. Pearson
3. CSP Rao, A text book of CAD/CAM , Hitech Publ.
Course Outcomes:
1. Identify the importance of CAD/CAM in modern manufacturing systems and L1 & L2
explain the hardware used for CAD/CAM systems.
2. Understand and develop the M athematical representations of curves. L2
3. Find the difference between conventional and NC techniques and to develop a L3
simple program.
4. Describe the use of GT and CAPP for the product development. L3
5. Identify the various elements involved in the computer aided manufacturing L4
system
CO-PO Mapping: PSO1
PSO2
PSO3
PO10
PO11
PO12
PO1
PO2
PO3
PO4
PO5
PO6
PO7
PO8
PO9
CO
20A363T.1 2 - - - - - - - 3 - - - - - -
20A363T.2 2 2 3 2 - - - - 3 - - - - - -
20A363T.3 - - 3 2 1 - - - 3 - - - - - -
20A363T.4 - 2 3 - - - - - 3 - - - - - -
20A363T.5 - - 3 - - - - - 3 - - - - - -
163
Title of the Course Automobile Engineering

Category PEC
Course Code 20A36AT
Year III B. Tech

Branch ME

3 0 0 3
Course Objectives:
 To gain the basic knowledge on automobile components and its electrical systems.
 To understand various emission control techniques.
 To obtain knowledge on power transmission systems used in automobiles.
 To get the basic idea on steering, suspension, and braking systems employed in automobiles.
 To gain knowledge on Safety Systems used in automobiles.
Introduction: Components of a four wheeler automobile – chassis and body – power unit –power transmission –
rear wheel drive, front wheel drive, 4 wheel drive – types of automobile engines, engine construction, turbo
charging and super charging – oil filters, oil pumps – crank case ventilation.
Electrical System :Charging circuit, generator, current – voltage regulator – starting system, Bendix drive,
mechanism of Solenoid switch, Lighting systems, Horn, wiper, Fuel gauge – oil pressure gauge, Engine
temperature indicator.
 Understand the basic lay-out of an automobile. (L2)
 Understand the basic concepts of electrical systems. (L2)
Unit 2 Transmission System 9

Transmission System: Clutches- Principle- types: cone clutch, single plate clutch, multi plate clutch, magnetic and
centrifugal clutches, fluid fly wheel – gear box- types: sliding mesh, constant mesh, synchromesh, epi-cyclic, over
drive, torque converter. Propeller shaft – Hotch – Kiss drive, Torque tube drive, universal joint, differential, rear
axles.
 Understand the function and components of clutches. (L2)
 Understand the types of gear boxes and transmission systems. (L2)
Unit 3 Steering System, Suspension System and Braking System 10

Steering System: Steering geometry – camber, castor, king pin rake, combined angle toe-in, center point
steering. Steering gears – types, steering linkages.
Suspension System: Objects of suspension systems – rigid axle suspension system, torsion bar, shock
absorber, Independent suspension system.
Braking System: M echanical brake system, Hydraulic brake system, Pneumatic and vacuum brake systems.
 Understand the steering geometry. (L2)
 Understand the different types of suspension systems. (L2)
 Understand the importance of braking systems. (L2)
164
Unit 4 Safety System 8
Safety System: Antilock braking system, air bag restraint system, voice warming system, seat belt system, road
navigating system, anti-theft system.
 Understand the different types of Safety System. (L2)
 Understand the anti-theft system. (L2)
Unit 5 Introduction to Electric Vehicles (EV) 9

National and International emission standards role in controlling the Automobile emissions. History of hybrid and
electric vehicles, social and environmental importance of hybrid and electric vehicles. Components of electric
vehicle. General layout of EV. Advantages and disadvantages of EV compared to ICE vehicles.
 Understand the concepts of Pollution standards National and international (L2)
 Know the concept of to Electrical Vehicles (L2)

1. Kirpal Singh, Automobile Engineering –Vol.1&Vol.2., standard publisher‘s distributors, 13th Ed.2013 & 2014.
ISBN: 9788180141966, 818014196.
2. Iqbal Hussein, "Electric and Hybrid vehicles: Design fundamentals", CRC Press, 3 rd Ed.2021. ISBN
9780367693930.
3. John Heywood, Internal combustion engine fundamentals, M cGraw-Hill 2nd Ed 2018. ISBN: 9781260116106.
Reference Books:
1. James Larminie, John Lowry, "Electric Vehicle Technology Explained", Wiley, 2nd Ed.2012. ISBN: 978-1-119-
94273-3.
2. G.B.S. Narang, Automobile Engineering, Khanna Publishers.2009. ISBN. 8174092823.
3. S. Srinivasan, Automotive M echanics, 2nd Ed., Tata M cGraw Hill 2003. ISBN 13: 9780070494916, ISBN 10:
0070494916.
4. R.B. Gupta, Automobile Engineering, Tech India Publications.2016.ISBN NO.:81-7684-821-2.
Course Outcomes:
1. Gain the knowledge on components and electrical system on four wheeler L2
automobile.
2. Acquire knowledge on transmission system of an automobile. L2
3. Understand purpose of steering system, suspension system, braking system L2
and their identification.
4. Show their ability to identify different safety system used in automobile. L2
5. Enrich the knowledge on role in controlling the Automobile emissions and L2
concept of electrical vehicles.
CO-PO Mapping:
PSO1
PSO2
PSO3
PO10
PO11
PO12
CO
PO1
PO2
PO3
PO4
PO5
PO6
PO7
PO8
PO9
20A36AT .1 - - 3 - 3 - - - - - - 3 - - -
20A36AT .2 - - 3 - 3 - - - - - - 3 - - -
20A36AT .3 - - 3 - 3 - - - - 1 - 3 - - -
20A36AT .4 - - - - - 1 - - - - - 3 - - -
20A36AT .5 - - 3 - 3 - - - - - - 3 - - -
165
Department of Mechanical engineering
Title of the Course Design for manufacturing

Category PEC
Course Code 20A36BT
Year III B. Tech

Branch ME

3 0 0 3
Course Objectives:
 To explain the product development cycle and manufacturing issues to be considered in design.
 To familiarize manufacturing consideration in cast, forged, and weld components.
 To describe the manufacture of sheet metal components.
 To impart knowledge plastics as substitution to metallic parts.
Introduction: Design philosophy-steps in design process-general design rules for manufacturability-basic
principles of designing for economical production-creativity in design.
Materials: Selection of materials for design-developments in material technology-criteria for material selection-
material selection interrelationship with process selection.
 Understand the design mechanical components with economical consideration. (L2)
 Select the materials for design – developments for material selection. (L2)
Unit 2 Machining processes 9

Machining processes: Overview of various machining processes-general design rules for machining-dimensional
tolerance and surface roughness-Design for machining – ease –redesigning of components for machining ease
with suitable examples. General design recommendations for machined part.
 Describe various machining processes and designs for machining with suitable examples. (L2)
Unit 3 Metal casting and Metal joining 12

Metal casting: Appraisal of various casting processes, selection of casting process,-general design
considerations for casting-casting tolerance-use of solidification, simulation in casting design-product design rules
for sand casting.
Metal joining: Appraisal of various welding processes, factors in design of weldments – general design
guidelines-pre and post treatment of welds-effects of thermal stresses in weld joints-design of brazed joints.
 Understand the various casting processes and casting tolerance for product design. (L2)
 Understand the various welding processes and general design guide lines for treatment on welds. (L2)
Unit 4 Forging, Extrusion & Sheet metal work 8

Forging: Design factors for forging – closed die forging design – parting lines of dies – drop forging die design –
general design recommendations.
Extrusion & Sheet metal work: Design guide lines extruded sections-design principles for punching, blanking,
bending, and deep drawing-Keeler Goodman forging line diagram – component design for blanking.
 Identify the design factors for forging and its types. (L2)
 Understand the design guide lines and principles for various extrusion and sheet metal work. (L2)
166
Unit 5 Plastics 10
Plastics: Visco elastic and creep behavior in plastics-design guidelines for plastic components-design
considerations for injection moulding – design guidelines for machining and joining of plastics.
 Design plastic parts with manufacturing considerations. (L6)

1. George E Dieter and Linda Schmidt, Engineering Design, 4th Edition, M cGraw Hill (2015) ISBN:
9780073398143
2. A.K.Chitale and R.C.Gupta, Product Design and M anufacturing, 5th Edition, PHI Learning (2011). ISBN-10:
8120342828
3. David M Anderson, Design for M anufacturability, CRC Press (2013). ISBN: 9781482204926
Reference Books:
1. James G Bralla, Design For M anufacturability Handbook, 2nd Edition, M cGraw Hill (2004). ISBN:
9780070071391
2. Dr. P.C.Sharma, Production Technology, S.Chand& Company (2009). ISBN-10 : 8121911141
Course Outcomes:
1. Design mechanical components with economical consideration and Select the L2
materials for design – developments for material selection.
2. Describe various machining processes and designs for machining with suitable L2
examples.
3. Understand the various casting processes, casting tolerance for product design L2
and various welding processes, general design guide lines for treatment on
welds.
4. Identify the design factors and Understand the design guide lines and principles L2
for various extrusion and sheet metal work
5. Design plastic parts with manufacturing considerations L6
CO-PO Mapping:
PSO1
PSO2
PSO3
PO10
PO11
PO12
PO1
PO2
PO3
PO4
PO5
PO6
PO7
PO8
PO9
CO
20A36BT.1 1 - 3 1 - - - 1 - - - - 1 2 -
20A36BT.2 1 - 2 1 1 - - 1 - - - - 1 2 -
20A36BT.3 1 - 2 1 - - - 1 - - - - 1 2 3
20A36BT.4 1 - 2 1 1 - - - - - - - 1 - 3
20A36BT.5 1 - 3 - - - - - - - - - 1 - -
167
Title of the Course Non-Destructive Testing

Category PEC
Course Code 20A36CT
Year III B. Tech

Branch ME

3 0 0 3
Course Objectives: This course will able to

 Introduce basic concepts of nondestructive testing.
 Familiarize with characteristics of ultrasonic test, transducers, rejection and effectiveness.
 Describe concept of liquid Penetrant, eddy current and magnetic particle tests, its applications and limitations.
 Explain the principles of infrared and thermal testing, applications and honey comb and sandwich structures
case studies.
 Impart NDE and its applications in pressure vessels, casting and welded constructions
Unit 1 Introduction to non-destructive testing 6

Radiographic test, Sources of X and Gamma Rays and their interaction with M atter, Radiographic equipment,
Radiographic Techniques, Safety Aspects of Industrial Radiography.
 explain nondestructive testing techniques & radiographic techniques (L2)
 Discuss the safety aspects of industrial radiography. ( L4)
 outline the concepts of sources of X and Gamma Rays ( L2)
Unit 2 Ultrasonic Testing 10

Principle of Wave Propagation, Reflection, Refraction, Diffraction, M ode Conversion and Attenuation, Sound Field,
Piezo-electric Effect, Ultrasonic Transducers and their Characteristics, Ultrasonic Equipment and Variables
Affecting Ultrasonic Test, Ultrasonic Testing, Interpretations and Guidelines for Acceptance, Rejection -
Effectiveness and Limitations of Ultrasonic Testing.
 Explain the principle of ultrasonic test. ( L2)
 Discuss the characteristics of ultrasonic transducers. (L4)
 Analyze the performance of wave propagation, reflection, refraction, diffraction and sound field in
ultrasonic test. (L4 )
Unit 3 Liquid Penetrant, Eddy Current & Magnetic Particle Testing 12

Liquid Penetrant Test, Basic Concepts, Liquid Penetrant System, Test Procedure, Effectiveness and Limitations of
Liquid Penetrant Testing. Principle of Eddy Current, Eddy Current Test System, Applications of Eddy Current-
Testing Effectiveness of Eddy Current Testing. M agnetic M aterials, M agnetization of M aterials, Demagnetization
of M aterials, Principle of M agnetic Particle Test, M agnetic Particle Test Equipment, M agnetic Particle Test
Procedure, Standardization and Calibration, Interpretation and Evaluation, Effective Applications and Limitations
of the M agnetic Particle Test.
 Illustrate the procedure of Liquid Penetrant, eddy current and magnetic particle tests. ( L2)
 Outline the limitations of Penetrant, eddy current and magnetic particle tests. (L2 )
 Explain the effectiveness of Penetrant, eddy current and magnetic particle tests. ( L2)
Unit 4 Infrared and Thermal Testing 10

Introduction and fundamentals to infrared and thermal testing–Heat transfer –Active and passive techniques –Lock
168
in and pulse thermography–Contact and non-contact thermal inspection methods–Heat sensitive paints –Heat
sensitive papers –-thermally quenched phosphors liquid crystals –techniques for applying liquid crystals –other
temperature sensitive coatings –Inspection methods –Infrared radiation and infrared detectors–thermo mechanical
behavior of materials–IR imaging in aerospace applications, electronic components, Honey comb and sandwich
structures–Case studies.
 illustrate thermal inspection methods & outline the limitations of thermal testing ( L2)
 Discuss the fundamentals of thermal testing. (L6 )
 Explain the techniques of liquid crystals, active and passive. (L2)
Unit 5 Industrial Applications of NDE 8

Span of NDE Activities Railways, Nuclear, Non-nuclear and Chemical Industries, Aircraft and Aerospace
Industries, Automotive Industries, Offshore Gas and Petroleum Projects, Coal M ining Industry, NDE of pressure
vessels, castings, welded constructions
 Illustrate applications of NDE. ( L2)
 Outline the limitations and disadvantages of NDE. (L2 )
 Explain the applications of Railways, Nuclear and chemical industries. (L2)

1. J Prasad, GCK Nair , Nondestructive test and evaluation of M aterials, Tata mcgraw-Hill Education Publishers,
2008 , ISBN:9780070620841
2. Josef Krautkrämer, Herbert Krautkrämer, Ultrasonic testing of materials, 3/e, Springer-Verlag, 1983, ISBN
978-3-662-10680-8
3. X. P. V. M aldague, Non destructive evaluation of materials by infrared thermography, 1/e, Springer-Verlag,
1993, ISBN 978-1-4471-1995-1
Reference Books:
1. Gary L. Workman, Patrick O. M oore, Doron Kishoni, Non-destructive, Hand Book, Ultrasonic Testing, 3/e,
Amer Society for Nondestructive, 2007, ISBN-10: 1571171630
2. ASTM Standards, Vol 3.01, M etals and alloys, 2020, ISBN 978-1-6822-1620-0
Course Outcomes:
1. Gain knowledge of the basic principles, techniques, applications and limitations L2, L4
of basic NDT methods.
2. Understand the basic principles of Ultrasonic Testing. L2, L4
3. Apply relevant non-destructive testing method different applications L2
4. Explain various methods of Infrared and Thermal testing. L2, L6
5. Outline the applications, limitations and disadvantages of NDE L2
CO-PO Mapping:
PSO1
PSO2
PSO3
PO10
PO11
PO12
PO1
PO2
PO3
PO4
PO5
PO6
PO7
PO8
PO9
CO
20A36CT.1 3 3 - - 3 3 - - - - - - - - -
20A36CT.2 3 3 - - 3 3 - - - - - - - - -
20A36CT.3 3 3 - - 3 3 - - - - - - - - -
20A36CT.4 3 3 - - 3 3 - - - - - - - - -
20A36CT.5 3 3 - - 3 3 - - - - - - - - -
169
Title of the Course Automation & Robotics

Category PEC
Course Code 20A36DT
Year III B. Tech

Branch ME

3 0 0 3
Course Objectives:
 To acquire basic knowledge on automation and automated flow lines in automatic manufacturing systems.
 To learn about the line balancing methods and automated assembly systems
 To learn about the robotics and fundamentals of robots with their needs in present trend.
 To understand robot kinematics, dynamics and to acquire knowledge on importance of trajectory planning in
robots.
 To learn about the sensors, actuators and robot programming methods used in robots.
Unit 1 Automation & Automated flow lines 7

Introduction to Automation , Need, automation principles, automation strategies, Types, Basic elements of an
automated system, levels of automation, hardware components for automation and process control,.
Automated flow lines: Part transfer methods and mechanisms, types of Flow lines, flow line with/without buffer
storage
 Understand the need and types of automation. (L2)
 Learn the strategies and principles of automation. (L1)
 Apply the concept of an automated flow lines in an automated manufacturing industry. (L3)
Unit 2 Assembly Systems and Line Balancing 8

The Assembly Process, Assembly Systems, M anual Assembly Lines, The Line Balancing Problem, M ethods of
Line Balancing, Other ways to improve the Line Balancing, Flexible M anual Assembly Lines.
 Understand the importance of Line balancing in Assembly systems. (L2)
 Solve problems on the concepts of line balancing method (L3)
Unit 3 Introduction to Industrial Robots 7

Need for robots in Present customization, Classification, laws of robots. Robot configurations, Functional line
diagram, Degrees of Freedom, Components, common types of arms, joints, grippers.
 Understand the fundamentals of robots. (L2)
 Recall the functional line diagrams and configurations of robots. (L1)
 Remember about the robot end effectors. (L1)
Unit 4 Manipulator Kinematics, Dynamics & Trajectory Planning 8

M anipulator Kinematics: Homogeneous transformations as applicable to rotation and translation –
D-H notation, Forward and inverse kinematics
M anipulator dynamics: Differential transformation, Jacobians. Lagrange – Euler
Trajectory Planning: Trajectory planning and avoidance of obstacles, path planning, Skew motion, joint integrated
motion – straight line motion.
 Understand and apply Robot Kinematics. (L2)
170
 Understand the concepts of manipulator dynamics. (L2)
 Solve problems by applying the concept of trajectory planning. (L3)
Unit 5 Robot- Actuators, Sensors, Programming 7

Actuators: Pneumatic, Hydraulic actuators, electric & stepper motors, comparison Position sensors –
potentiometers, resolvers, encoders – Velocity sensors, tactile sensors, Proximity sensors. Robot Programming:
Types – features of languages and software packages. Robot applications- Assembly, Spray painting, Loading
&unloading, Inspection and material handling.
 Understand the concept of Robot actuators and sensors. (L2)
 M emorize the Robot programming languages. (L1)
 Understand the applications of Robot in different sectors. (L2)

1. M .P.Groover, Automation, Production systems and CIM . Pearson Edu 2004. ISBN-10: 9789332572492,
ISBN-13: 978-9332572492
2. Niku Saeed B., Introduction to Robotics: Analysis, systems, Applications, PHI New Delhi. ISBN-10:
0130613096
3. M .P. Groover, Industrial Robotics. TM H 2003. ISBN-10 : 007024989X
Reference Books:
1. Fu KS, Robotics. M cGraw Hill. 2014. ISBN: 9780071822282
2. Richard D. Klafter, Robotics Engineering. Prentice Hall. 1989. ISBN-10 : 0134687523
3. Ashitave Ghosal, Robotics, fundamental Concepts and analysis. Oxford Press, 2006. ISBN-10 : 0195673913
4. Saha, S.K., Introduction to Robtics, Second Edition M cGraw Hill New Edition 2014. ISBN: 9789332902800.
5. John J. Craig, Introduction to Robotics. Pearson Edu 2017. ISBN: 0133489795
Course Outcomes:
1. Understand and apply the knowledge on automation and the automated flow L2 & L3
lines in real working environment.
2. Learn the importance of line balancing methods and are able to solve problems L2 & L3
of the assembly work stations in industrial assembly plants.
3. Understand the robotics and the fundamental concepts of robots. L1 & L2
4. learn concept of robot kinematics, dynamics and trajectory planning methods L2 & L3
and are able to apply this concept in academic research
5. Understand the sensors, actuators and robot programming methods used in L1 & L2
robots and can memorize the Programming languages.
CO-PO Mapping:
PSO1
PSO2
PSO3
PO10
PO11
PO12
PO1
PO2
PO3
PO4
PO5
PO6
PO7
PO8
PO9
CO
20A36DT.1 3 3 - - - - - - - - - 3 - - 3
20A36DT.2 3 3 2 - 2 - - - - - - 3 2 2 3
20A36DT.3 3 3 - - - - - - - - - 3 - - 3
20A36DT.4 3 3 2 - 2 - - - - - - 3 2 2 3
20A36DT.5 3 3 - - - - 1 - - - - 3 1 1 3
171
Title of the Course Heat Transfer Lab

Category PCC
Course Code 20A361L
Year III B. Tech

Branch ME

0 0 3 1.5
Course Objectives:
 To acquire Knowledge of the principle of mode of heat transfer
 To design and applications of heat exchanger
 To gain knowledge transient heat conduction and heat pipe
 To provide practical knowledge to determine heat transfer coefficient in boiling and condensation.
List of experiments
1. Thermal Conductivity of metal (conductor)
2. Thermal conductivity of insulating powder through Concentric Sphere
3. Overall heat transfer co-efficient through Composite Slab
4. Heat transfer coefficient in natural convection
5. Heat transfer coefficient in forced convection
6. Heat transfer from pin-fin
7. Emissivity of a gray body through Emissivity apparatus
8. Stefan Boltzman constant determination.
9. Parallel and counter flow heat exchanger
10. Critical heat flux determination in pool boiling process.
11. Thermal conductivity of insulating material through lagged pipe apparatus
12. Transient Heat Conduction
13. Heat transfer in drop and film wise condensation
14. Heat pipe demonstration
Note: Consider any 12 experiments out of 14.
Course Outcomes:
1. Determine thermal conductivity in metal bars, insulating powder, lagged pipe L3
and composite slab.
2. Evaluate the fin efficiency and fin effectiveness. L1 & L3
3. Evaluate convective het transfer coefficient by performing experiments in free L3
and forced convections.
4. Determine Stefan Boltzmann constant and emissivity of gray body. L2
5. Demonstrate practical understanding on unsteady state heat conduction, Heat L1
pipe and two phase flow.
6. Determine convective het transfer coefficient in drop and film wise condensation L2
on various materials
7. Determine Critical heat flux for pool boiling L2
8. Analyze the performance of heat exchanger L1 & L3
172
CO-PO Mapping:
PSO1
PSO2
PSO3
PO10
PO11
PO12
PO1
PO2
PO3
PO4
PO5
PO6
PO7
PO8
PO9
CO
20A361L.1 3 2 2 2 - - - - - - - - - 2 -
20A361L.2 3 3 3 2 - - - - - - - - - 2 -
20A361L.3 3 3 3 2 - - - - - - - - - 2 -
20A361L.4 3 3 3 - - - - - - - - - - 2 -
20A361L.5 3 3 3 - - - - - - - - - - - -
20A361L.6 3 3 3 - - - - - - - - - - 2 -
20A361L.7 3 2 2 - - - - - - - - - 2 - -
20A361L.8 3 3 3 2 - - - - - - - - - - 2
173
Title of the Course M etrology & M easurements Lab

Category PCC
Course Code 20A362L
Year III B. Tech

Branch ME

0 0 3 1.5
Course Objectives:
 To demonstrate the usage of metrology lab equipment.
 To know the working principles of different instruments.
 To learn the measurement of the Angle and taper s by Bevel protractor, Sine bar, etc.
 To understand the working of pressure gauge, LVDT, Strain gauge, transducers and anemometer.
 To calibrate different types of thermocouple.
Contents: Metrology Lab

1. M easurement of lengths, heights, diameters by Vernier calipers, micrometers etc.
2. M easurement of bores by internal micrometers and dial bore indicators.
3. Use of gear teeth, Vernier calipers and checking the chordal addendum and chordal height of spur gear.
4. Alignment test on the lathe.
5. Alignment test on milling machine.
6. Study of Tool makers microscope and its application
7. Angle and taper measurements by Bevel protractor, Sine bars, etc.
8. Use of spirit level in finding the flatness of surface plate.
9. Thread measurement by two wire/ three wire method.
10. Surface roughness measurement by Talysurf instrument.
Contents: Measurements Lab

1. Calibration of Pressure Gauges.
2. Calibration of Transducer for Temperature measurement.
3. Study and Calibration of LVDT Transducer for Displacement M easurement.
4. Calibration of Strain Gauge for the measurement of Strain.
5. Calibration of Thermocouple for Temperature M easurement.
6. Calibration of Capacitive Transducer for Angular M easurement.
7. Calibration of Resistance Temperature Detector for Temperature M easurement.
8. Study and Calibration of a Rotometer for flow measurement.
9. Study and Calibration of Photo and M agnetic Speed Pickups for the measurement of speed.
10. Study of anemometer.
Course Outcomes:
1. Apply the procedures to measure length, width, depth, bore diameters, external L5
tapers, tool angles, and surface roughness by using different instruments.
2. M easure the angle and taper using Bevel protractor and Sine bar. L4
3. Conduct different machine alignment tests. L4
4. Examine and test on different types of instruments and transducers. L4
5. Learn and remember the working principle of different types of transducers L1
174
CO-PO Mapping:
PSO1
PSO2
PSO3
PO10
PO11
PO12
PO1
PO2
PO3
PO4
PO5
PO6
PO7
PO8
PO9
CO
20A362L.1 3 3 - 3 3 - - - 3 - - - 3 1 -
20A362L.2 3 - - - 3 - - - 3 - - - 1 3 -
20A362L.3 3 - - - 3 - - - 3 - - - 1 2 3
20A362L.4 3 3 - 3 3 - - - - - - - - 2 -
20A362L.5 3 3 - 3 3 - - - - - - - - 2 -
175
Title of the Course CAD/CAM Lab.

Category PCC
Course Code 20A363L
Year III B. Tech

Branch ME

0 0 3 1.5
Course Objectives:
 To introduce the basics in modeling software.
 To get the knowledge on Analysis Package
 To enable the student to develop and to write the part programs for CNC M achines.
Part 1: Modelling
1. Sketcher
2. Part M odelling
 Develop 2 dimensional sketches. (L6)
 Prepare 3 dimensional models. (L3)
Part 2: Analysis
1. Structural analysis
2. Thermal analysis
 Analyses of different models. (L4)
Part 3: CAM
1. Development of G – code and M – code files for CNC Turning M achine.
2. Development of G – code and M – code files for CNC M illing M achine.
3. Developing CNC code by using CAM package
 Develop G and M codes based part programs from different 3 dimensional models. (L6)
Course Outcomes:
1. Develop a part model to visualize the components. L3 & L6
2. Analyze the Structural and Thermal analysis on the various engineering L4
structures or components.
3. Create NC code and automated tool paths for a given engineering component L6
and machine the components
CO-PO Mapping:
PSO1
PSO2
PSO3
PO10
PO11
PO12
PO1
PO2
PO3
PO4
PO5
PO6
PO7
PO8
PO9
CO
20A363L.1 3 3 3 3 3 3 - - 3 3 - 3 - - 2
20A363L.2 3 3 3 3 3 3 - - 3 3 - 3 - - 2
20A363L.3 3 3 3 - 3 - - - 3 3 - 3 - - 2
176
Department of Computer Science Engineering
Title of the Course Java Programming

Category SC
Course Code 20A564L
Year III B. Tech.

Branch EEE, ME, and ECE

1 0 2 2
Course Objectives: This course will be able to

 Understand the basic concepts of java programming.
 Analyze and apply concepts like packages, interfaces, and exception handling.
 Implement the multi-threading and GUI applications developed using JAVA.

What is Java? Install Java & Java IDE, First Java Program, Variables and Data Types in Java, Operators in
Java, Flow Control Statements in Java, functions in java, arrays in java, Strings in java
 Understand the data types, operators and control statements in Java (L2)
 Know the importance of functions, arrays and strings in Java Programming (L2)

Object-Oriented Programming, Classes and Objects, Encapsulation, Abstraction, Inheritance, polymorphism
 Demonstrate the importance of object oriented programming (L3)
 Define object oriented concepts (L2)

Packages and Interfaces: Packages, Defining a Package, A Short Package Example, Access Protection, an
Access Example, Importing Packages.
Abstract keyword, Interfaces: Defining an Interface, Implementing Interfaces, Nested Interfaces, Applying
Interfaces, Variables in Interfaces, Interfaces Can Be Extended
 Apply packages in the java programs (L3)
 Differentiate abstract class and interfaces (L3)

Exception Handling: Exception-Handling Fundamentals, Exception Types, Uncaught Exceptions, Using try and
catch, Displaying a Description of an Exception, M ultiple catch Clauses, Nested try Statements, throw, throws,
finally, Built-in Exceptions
M ultithreaded Programming: The Java Thread M odel, Thread Priorities, Synchronization, M essaging, The
Thread Class and the Runnable Interface, The M ain Thread, Creating a Thread, Implementing Runnable,
Extending Thread, Choosing an Approach, Creating M ultiple Threads
 Acquire knowledge on multithreading, exception handling and apply the same in developing real time
177
java based applications (L1)
 Construct and classify error and exception handling (L4)

Generics: What Are Generics, Generics Work Only with Reference Types, A Generic Class with Two Type
Parameters, The General Form of a Generic Class
JavaFX Basic Concepts, Using Image and Image View, Button, Radio Button, CheckBox, TextField
 Articulate the generics in java programming (L3)
 Implement JavaFX Basic Concepts in java programs (L5)

1. Herbert Schildt. Java. The complete reference, TM H, 9th Edition.
Reference Books:
1. J.Nino and F.A. Hosch, An Introduction to programming and OO design using Java, John Wiley&sons.
2. Y. Daniel Liang, Introduction to Java programming, Pearson Education. 6th Edition
3. R.A. Johnson- Thomson, An introduction to Java programming and object oriented application
development,
Course Outcomes:
1. Understand the importance of datatypes, operators, functions, arrays and strings L2
in Java Programming.
2. apply reusability concepts like Inheritance, interfaces and packages in real time L3
applications developed using JAVA
3. relate the abstract class and interfaces in java programming L3
4. Construct and classify error and exception handling L4
5. Implement genetics and JavaFX basic concepts in java programs. L5
CO-PO Mapping:
PSO1
PSO2
PSO3
PO10
PO11
PO12
PO1
PO2
PO3
PO4
PO5
PO6
PO7
PO8
PO9
CO
20A564L.1 3 3 - - - - - - - - - - - - -
20A564L.2 - 3 3 2 - - - - - - - - - - -
20A564L.3 3 3 3 2 - - - - - - 3 3 - - -
20A564L.4 3 3 3 - - - - - - - 3 3 - - -
20A564L.5 3 3 3 - - - - - - - 3 3 - - -
178
Title of the Course Essence of Indian Traditional Knowledge

Category MC
Course Code 20AC63T
Year III Year

Branch EEE, ECE, ME

3 0 0 0
Course Objectives:
 To learn basic principles of thought process, reasoning and inferencing. Sustainability is at the core of Indian
Traditional Knowledge Systems connecting society and nature.
 To understand Holistic life style of Yogic-science and wisdom capsules in Sanskrit literature in modern society
with rapid technological advancements and societal disruptions.
 To understand Indian Knowledge System, Indian perspective of modern scientific world-view and basic principles
of Yoga and holistic health care system.
 To understand Indian philosophical traditions, Indian linguistic Tradition, and Indian artistic tradition.
Unit 1 10
Indian Tradition: Fundamental unity of India, India‘s heroic role in world civilization, The Indian way of life, Introduction to
Indian tradition, The Scientific Outlook and Human Values.
 Appreciate incorporated traditions in Indian culture
 Understand the value of culture and traditions in leading peaceful life
 Understand the hidden scientific outlook and imbibed human values in the Indian way of life
Unit 2 10
Basic structure of Indian Knowledge System: Indian Traditional Scriptures, Exposure to 4-Vedas (the Rigveda, the
Yajurveda, the Samaveda and the Atharvaveda) , 4-Upvedas (Ayurveda, Dhanurveda, Gandharvaveda, Sthapatya etc.),
6-Vedangas (Shiksha, Kalp, Nirukta, Vyakaran, Jyotish), 6-Upangas (Dharmashastra, M eemansa, Puranas,
Tarkashastra/Logic) etc.
 Grasp basic structure of Indian knowledge system
 Understand the essence of Vedas and their value
 Understand the systematic classification of holy scriptures
Unit 3 10
Indian Knowledge System and M odern Science: Relevance of Science and Spirituality, Science and Technology in
Ancient India, Superior intelligence of Indian sages and scientists.
Indian Traditional Health Care: Importance and Practice of Yoga, Pranayama and other prevailing health care
techniques.
 Establish connection between Indian knowledge system and M odern science
 Understand spirituality in relation to science
 Appreciate the superior intelligence of Indian saints and scientists
179
Unit 4 8
Indian Artistic Tradition: Introduction and overview of significant art forms in ancient India such as painting, sculpture,
Civil Engineering, Architecture, M usic, Dance, Literature etc.
Indian Linguistic Tradition: Ancient Indian languages and literary Heritages, Phonology, M orphology, Syntax and
Semantics.
 Get an overview of significant art forms of ancient India
 Understand pioneering efforts of ancient civil engineering technology
 Trace the basic Indian linguistic tradition
Unit 5 10
Indian Philosophical Tradition: (Sarvadarshan)- Nyaya, Viaisheshiika, Sankhya, Yoga, M eemansa, Brief understanding
of Philosophy of Charvaka, Bhagwan M ahaveer Jain, Bhagwan Buddha, Kabeer, Guru Nanak Dev and other eminent
ancient Indian Philosophers.
Activities: Activities will consist of one assignment on each module, group discussions, presentations,case study on
various topics based on above curriculum
 Find the essence of Indian philosophical tradition
 Assimilate the philosophical speculations of different sects and the preachings of eminent philosophers of
ancient days
Prescribed Text Books

1. Ajwani L.H., Immortal India, Vora & Co. Publishers, 1997.
2. Swami Jitmananda, M odern Physics and Vedanta, Bharatiya Vidya Bhavan, 2004.
3. Krishnamurthy,V. Science and Spirituality- A Vedanta Perception,Bharatiya Vidya Bhavan, 2002.
4. Sharma D.S., The Upanishads- An Anthology, Bharatiya Vidya Bhavan, 1989.
5. Raman V.V.,Glimpses of Indian Heritage, Popular Prakashan,1993.
Reference Books:
1. Sivaramakrishnan, V., Cultural Heritage of India- Course M aterial, Bharatiya Vidya Bhavan, M umbai, 5 th Edition,
2014.
2. Capra F., Tao of Physics, Shambhala, 2010.
3. Chaterjee S.C. and Datta D.M ., An Introduction to Indian Philosophy, University of Calcutta, 1984.
4. Krishna Chaitanya, Arts of India, Abhinav Publications, 1987.
5. Jha V.N., Language, Thought and Reality.
Course Outcomes: Upon successful completion of the course, student will be able to Bloom‘s Level of Learning
1. Explain basics of Indian tradition and Indian traditional knowledge systems. L3
2. Describe basics of Indian traditional health care, technologies and its scientific L3
perspectives.
3. Explain basics of Indian artistic, linguistic and philosophical tradition. L3
4. co-relate the Indian traditional knowledge in modern scientific perspective. L4
CO-PO Mapping:
PSO1
PSO2
PSO3
PO10
PO11
PO12
PO1
PO2
PO3
PO4
PO5
PO6
PO7
PO8
PO9
CO
20AC63T.1 - - - - - - - - - - - 3 - - -
20AC63T.2 - - - - - - - - - - - 3 - - -
20AC63T.3 - - - - - - - - - - - 3 - - -
20AC63T.4 - - - - - - - - - - - 3 - - -
180
Title of the Course Operations Research

Category PEC
Course Code 20A37AT
Year IV B. Tech
Semester I Semester
Branch ME

3 0 0 3
Course Objectives:
 To enable the students to the nature and scope of various decision making situations within business
contexts, understand and apply operations research techniques to industrial applications.
 To learn the fundamental techniques of Operations Research and to choose a suitable OR technique to
solve problem.
Unit 1 10
Development – Definition– Characteristics and Phases – Types of operation and Research models– applications.
Linear Programming Problem Formulation – Graphical solution – Simplex method –Artificial variables techniques -
Two–phase method, Big-M method – Duality Principle.
 Formulate practical problems given in words into a mathematical model. (L6)
 Quantify OR models to solve optimization problems. (L5)
 Formulate linear programming problems and appreciate their limitations. (L6)
Unit 2 10
Transportation Problem: Formulation – Optimal solution, unbalanced transportation problem –Degeneracy.
Assignment Problem – Formulation – Optimal solution - Variants of Assignment Problem-Travelling Salesman
problem
 M odel linear programming problems like the transportation. (L3)
 Solve the problems of transportation from origins to destinations with minimum time and cost. (L6)
Unit 3 10
Replacement M odels: Introduction – Replacement of items that deteriorate with time – with change in money
value - without change in money value – Replacement of items that fail completely, group replacement.
Theory Of Games: Introduction – M inimax - M aximin – Criterion and optimal strategy – Solution of games with
saddle points – Rectangular games without saddle points – 2 X 2 games – m X 2, 2 X n & m x n games -Graphical
method, Dominance principle.
 Apply the concept of replacement model. (L3)
 Identify strategic situations and represent them as games. (L3)
 Solve simple games using various techniques. (L6)
Unit 4 10
Waiting Lines: Introduction – Single Channel – Poisson arrivals – exponential service times – with infinite queue
length models.
Simulation: Definition – Types of simulation models – phases of simulation– applications of simulation – Queuing
problems – Advantages and Disadvantages – Simulation Languages.
 Understand and will apply the fundamentals of waiting lines in real life situations. (L3)
 Simulate queuing models. (L3)
181
Unit 5 10
Inventory: Introduction – Single item – Deterministic models – Purchase inventory models with one price break
and multiple price breaks.
Dynamic Programming: Introduction – Bellman‘s Principle of optimality – Applications of dynamic programming-
shortest path problem – linear programming problem.
 Understand and will apply the fundamentals of inventory in real life situations. (L3)
 Have aware of applying Dynamic Programming technique to solve the complex problems by breaking
them into a series of sub- problems. (L3)
1. Operations Research, PS Gupta, DS Hira, S Chand Publications, 10th Edition, 2016, ISBN-13978-
8121902816.
2. Operations Research, S.D. Sharma, Kedarnath and Ramnath Publications, 2012, ISBN-135551234001596.
Reference Books:
1. Introduction to Operations Research. Taha, PHI, 10 th edition, 2016, ISBN-13978-0134444017.
2. Operations Research. R. Panneerselvam, PHI Publ, 2nd edition, 2004, ISBN: 9788120319233.
3. Operations Research: Theory and Applications,Sharma J.K., 4th Edition, Laxmi Publications, 2009.
Course Outcomes:
1. Create mathematical models of the real life situations and capable of obtaining L3
best solution using Graphical M ethod and Simplex M ethod, Big M method and
the student must be able to implement the theory of duality for simplifying the
solution procedure for certain LPPs.
2. Solve the special cases of LPP such as Transportation, Assignment and L3
Travelling Salesmen problems.
3. Find optimal replacement period of a machine or group of parts. L3
4. Have knowledge of choosing the best strategy out of the available strategies L3
which is an essential skill for any business manager to successfully face the
competition.
5. Understand and will apply the fundamentals of waiting lines in real life situations. L3
6. Simulate queuing models L3
7. Have aware of applying Dynamic Programming technique to solve the complex L3
problems by breaking them into a series of sub- problems.
8. Understand and will apply the fundamentals of inventory in real life situations. L3
CO-PO Mapping:
PSO1
PSO2
PSO3
PO10
PO11
PO12
PO1
PO2
PO3
PO4
PO5
PO6
PO7
PO8
PO9
CO
20A37AT.1 3 3 - 1 - - - - - - - - 2 - -
20A37AT .2 3 3 2 - - - 3 - - - - - 2 - -
20A37AT.3 3 3 2 - - - 3 - - - - - 2 - -
20A37AT.4 3 3 - - - - 3 - - - - - 2 - -
20A37AT.5 3 3 2 - - 1 3 - - - - - 2 - -
20A37AT.6 3 3 - - - 1 3 - - - - - 2 - -
20A37AT.7 3 3 - - - - 3 - - - - - 2 - -
20A37AT.8 3 3 - - 1 - 3 - - - - - 2 - -
182
Title of the Course Turbo M achinery

Category PEC
Course Code 20A37BT
Year IV B. Tech
Semester I Semester
Branch ME

3 0 0 3
Course Objectives:
 To impart the basic knowledge of turbo machinery
 To familiarize various power absorbing devices and its key parameters.
 To understand the flow characteristics of Centrifugal compressors
 To make conversant with the flow characteristics of axial compressors.
 To provide preliminary design on turbo machines.
Unit 1 Principles 8
Energy transfer between fluid and rotor, classification of fluid machinery, dimensionless parameters, specific
speed, applications, stage velocity triangles, work and efficiency for compressors and turbines
 Learn Classification of fluid machinery. (L2)
 Calculate the work and efficiency for compressors and turbines. (L3)
Unit 2 Centrifugal Fans and Blowers 7

Types, stage and design parameters, flow analysis in impeller blades, volute and diffusers, losses, characteristics
curves and selection, fan drives and fan noise.
 Calculate the stage & design parameters in centrifugal fans and blowers. (L3)
 Analyze the flow in impeller blades. (L4)
Unit 3 Centrifugal Compressor 8

Construction details, types, impeller flow losses, slip factor, diffuser analysis, losses and performance curves.
 Calculate air angle, pressure ratio and power required in centrifugal compressor. (L3)
 Understand the concept of losses and performance curves of centrifugal compressors. (L2)
 Analyze the construction details. (L4)
Unit 4 Axial Flow Compressor 7

Stage velocity triangles, enthalpy-entropy diagrams, stage losses and efficiency, work done factor, simple stage
design problems and performance characteristics.
 Calculate stage losses, stage efficiency and pressure ratio in axial flow compressor. (L3)
 Understand the concept of losses and performance curves of centrifugal compressors. (L2)
Unit 5 Axial and Radial Flow Turbines 8

Stage velocity diagrams, reaction stages, losses and coefficients blade design principles, testing and performance
characteristics.
 Able to draw velocity diagrams. (L3)
 Understands the concept of losses and coefficients blade design principles. (L2)
183
1. Turbines, Compressors & Fans, S. M . Yahya, Tata M cGraw Hill & Co. Ltd., 4th edition, 2010. ISBN 13:
9780070707023
2. V. Kadambi and M anohar Prasad, ―An Introduction to Energy Conversion, Volume III, Turbo machinery‖, New
Age International Publishers, reprint 2008. ISBN-13: 978-1781830086
3. Fundamentals of Turbo machinery: William W Perg, John Wiley & Sons, Inc. 2008. ISBN: 9780470124222
Reference Books:
1. S. L.Dixon, ―Fluid M echanics & Thermodynamics of Turbo machines‖, Elsevier (2005). ISBN-13: 978-
0124159549
2. Fundamentals of turbo machinery, B.K. Venkanna PHI, New Delhi 2009. ISBN 13: 9788120337756
3. M . S. Govindgouda and A. M .Nagaraj, ―A Text Book of Turbomachines‖, M . M. Publications, 10th Ed, 2014.
ISBN-135551234003189
4. Earl Logan, Jr. Publisher: CRC Press; 2 editions (1 M ay 2003) ISBN-13: 978-0824709952.
5. D. G. Shepherd, ―Principals of Turbo machines‖, the M acmillan Company (1964). ISBN-13: 978-0024096609
Course Outcomes:
1. Classify Turbo machines and Calculate the work and efficiency for compressors L2 & L3
and turbines
2. Explain various losses and calculate the stage & design parameters in L3 & L4
centrifugal fans and blowers
3. Assess air angle, pressure ratio and power required in centrifugal compressor L2, L3 & L4
and analyze the construction details.
4. Determine stage losses, stage efficiency and pressure ratio in axial flow L2 & L3
compressor
5. Evaluate the flow coefficient, loading coefficient and stage parameters in axial & L3 & L5
radial flow turbines
CO-PO Mapping:
PSO1
PSO2
PSO3
PO10
PO11
PO12
PO1
PO2
PO3
PO4
PO5
PO6
PO7
PO8
PO9
CO
20A37BT.1 3 3 1 - - 1 1 - - - - 2 1 - -
20A37BT.2 3 3 1 - - 1 1 - - - - 2 1 - -
20A37BT.3 3 3 2 3 - 1 1 - - - - 2 1 - -
20A37BT.4 3 3 2 3 - 1 1 - - - - 2 1 - -
20A37BT.5 3 3 2 3 - 1 1 - - - - 2 1 - -
184
Title of the Course Tribology

Category PEC
Course Code 20A37CT
Year IV B. Tech
Semester I Semester
Branch ME

3 0 0 3
Course Objectives:
 To understand the lubricant principles, types of lubricants and their properties
 To understand the mechanisms of friction and wear in materials
 To analyze the friction force and power loss in hydrodynamic and hydrostatic lubrication.
 To understand the preparation of bearing materials.
Unit 1 Introduction to Tribology: 8

Properties of oils and equation of flow: Viscosity, Newton‘s Law of viscosity, Hagen-Poiseuille Law, Flow between
parallel stationary planes, viscosity measuring apparatus. Purpose of lubrication, properties and characteristics of
lubricants, types of lubricants (oils, greases, solid lubricants), lubrication systems, Lubricant Additives.
 Illustrate the subject “Tribology‟ and its technological significance. (L3)
 Interpret the type of oils and its properties. (L3)
 Write the type of lubricants and its characteristics. (L3)
Unit 2 Friction and Wear 8

Friction: M aterial properties influencing friction, laws of friction, causes/theories of friction, Types of friction, Elastic
and Visco-elastic effects in friction, effects of friction.
Wear: Causes/sources of wear, types of wear (adhesive, abrasive, corrosive, erosive, fretting), wear of polymers,
wear of ceramic materials, effects of wear, steps for wear prevention/resistance, Wear measurement. Effects of
speed, temperature and pressure. Tribological measures, M aterial selection.
 Identify the type of friction and wear and its effects due to visco elastic. (L2)
 Compare the effects of wear on different materials. (L4)
Unit 3 Hydrodynamic Lubrication and Mechanism of Pressure Development 7

in an Oil Film:
Hydrodynamic Lubrication:: Friction forces and power loss in lightly loaded bearing, Petroff‘s law, Tower‘s
experiments, idealized full journal bearings.
M echanism of Pressure Development in an Oil Film: Reynold‘s investigations, Reynold‘s equation in two
dimensions. Partial journal bearings, end leakages in journal bearing, numerical problems.
 Use the Hydro dynamic lubrication. (L3)
 Illustrate the mechanism of pressure. (L3)
Unit 4 Slider / Pad Bearing with a Fixed and Pivoted Shoe 7

Pressure distribution, Load carrying capacity, coefficient of friction, frictional resistance in a pivoted shoe bearing,
influence of end leakage, numerical examples.
 Employ the pressure distribution. (L3)
185
Unit 5 Hydrostatic Lubrication and Bearing Materials 7
Hydrostatic Lubrication: Introduction to hydrostatic lubrication, hydrostatic step bearings, load carrying capacity
and oil flow through the hydrostatic step bearing..
Bearing M aterials: Commonly used bearings materials, properties of typical bearing materials.
 Examine the hydrostatic lubrication. (L4)
 Appraise the different types of material used in bearings. (L4)

1. Lubrication of Bearings – Theoretical Principles and Design by Redzimovskay E I., Oxford press company
2000.
2. Principles and Applications of Tribology by M oore, Pergamaon press 1998
Reference Books:
1. Fundamentals of Tribology by Basu S K., Sengupta A N., Ahuja B. B., , PHI 2006
2. Introduction to Tribology Bearings by M ujumdar B. C., S. Chand company pvt. Ltd 2008
Course Outcomes:
1. Illustrate the lubrication principles and interpret the mechanisms. L3
2. Identify the different friction and wear mechanism in tribological components. L2,L4
3. Interpret the friction surfaces and power losses in hydrodynamic lubrication. L3
4. Solve load carrying capacity in light and heavy loaded journal bearings. L3
5. Test the load carrying capacity in hydrostatic step bearing and examine the
L4
appropriate material for bearings based on the application.
CO-PO Mapping:
PSO1
PSO2
PSO3
PO10
PO11
PO12
PO1
PO2
PO3
PO4
PO5
PO6
PO7
PO8
PO9
CO
20A37CT.1 3 3 - - - - - - - - - - - - -
20A37CT.2 3 - 3 - - - - - - - - - - - -
20A37CT.3 3 3 3 - - - - - - - - - - - -
20A37CT.4 3 3 - - - - - - - - - - - - -
20A37CT.5 3 3 3 - - - - - - - - - - - -
186
Title of the Course Supply chain M anagement

Category PEC
Course Code 20A37DT
Year IV B. Tech
Semester I Semester
Branch ME

3 0 0 3
Course Objectives:
 To get the knowledge on basic concepts of supply chain management, decision phases, process view and its
strategies.
 To learn the concepts of distribution networks and supply chain network
 To acquire the skill of planning, managing safety stock in a supply chain, transportation.
 To know the concept of sourcing and pricing of products.
 To get the awareness on Bullwhip effect and Technology in the Supply Chain
Unit 1 Introduction to SCM 10

Fundamentals of supply chain, Objective of supply chain and importance, concepts and definitions, Supply chain
stages and decision phases, process view of a supply chain. Supply chain flows. Competitive and supply chain
strategies, strategic fit, Supply chain Drivers, Examples of supply chains
 Discuss the goal of a supply chain and explain the impact of supply chain decisions on the
Success of a firm. (L2)
 Identify the three key supply chain decision phases and explain the significance of each one, and
describe the cycle and push/pull views of a supply chain. (L2)
 Describe how a company achieves strategic fit between its supply chain strategy and its competitive
Strategy. (L2)
Unit 2 Designing the Supply Chain Network: 08
Distribution Networks (DN) – Role, Factors, Design of Distribution Networking, e-Business and the Distribution
Network.
Supply Chain Network (SCN) – Role, Factors, Framework for Design Decisions. M odels for facility location and
capacity allocation.
 Identify the key factors to be considered when designing a distribution network. (L2)
 Discuss the strengths and weaknesses of various distribution options. (L2)
 Understand how e-business has affected the design of distribution networks in different
 Industries. (L2)
Unit 3 Planning and Managing Inventory & Transportation Networks in a SCM: 10
The Role of cycle Inventory in a Supply Chain, M anaging M ulti-Echelon Cycle Inventory, Safety inventory
determination. Optimum level of product availability, M anagerial levers to improve supply chain profitability.
Transportation: Role of Transportation, Factors affecting transportation decisions. M odes of Transportation and
their performance characteristics.
 Balance the appropriate costs to choose the optimal amount of cycle inventory in a supply chain. (L2)
 Utilize managerial levers available to lower safety inventory and improve product availability. (L3)
 Understand the role of transportation in a supply chain, and evaluate the strengths and weaknesses of
different modes of transportation. (L2)
187
Unit 4 Sourcing Decisions and Revenue Management in Supply Chain: 08
Role of sourcing, supplier – scoring & assessment, selection and contracts. Design collaboration, procurement,
source planning and analysis.
Pricing and Revenue M anagement in SCM : Role of pricing and Revenue M anagement in the Supply Chain.
 Understand the role of sourcing in a supply chain, and Discuss factors that affect the decision to
outsource a supply chain function. (L2)
 Describe the impact of different contracts on supplier performance and information distortion. (L2)
 Understand the role of pricing and revenue management in a supply chain. (L2)
Unit 5 Bullwhip effect & Technology in the Supply Chain: 10

Co-ordination in a supply chain - Bullwhip effect. The Effect on performance of Lack of co-ordination, Obstacles to
coordination. M anagerial levers to achieve co-ordination.
Technology in the Supply Chain: The Role of IT supply Chain, The Supply Chain IT Framework, CRM , Internal
SCM , SRM . The role of E-Business in a supply chain.
 Describe supply chain coordination, the bullwhip effect, causes and obstacles to coordination in a supply
chain. (L2)
 Discuss managerial levers that help achieve coordination in a supply chain. (L2)
 Understand the major applications of supply chain information technology and the processes that they
enable. (L2)

1. Supply Chain M anagement-Strategy, Planning & Operation. Sunil Chopra & Peter M eindl, Pearson Edu. Asia,
2001, ISBN: 81-7808-272-1.
2. Supply Chain Redesign – Transforming Supply Chains into Integrated Value Systems. Robert B Handfield,
Ernest L Nichols, Jr., Pearson Edu. Inc, 2002, ISBN: 81-297-0113-8.
Reference Books:
1. M odelling the Supply Chain. Jeremy F Shapiro, Duxbury; Thomson Learning, 2002, ISBN 0-534-37363.
2. Designing & M anaging the Supply Chain.David Simchi Levi, Philip Kaminsky& Edith Simchi Levi; M cGraw Hill.
2007. ISBN-10 : 9780070666986
3. Going Backwards Reverse Logistics Trends and Practices. Dr. Dale S. Rogers, Dr. Ronald S. Tibben-
Lembke, University of Nevada, Reno, Center for Logistics M anagement. 1999. ISBN, 0967461901,
9780967461908
4. Supply chain logistics management. Donald J.Bowersox; Tata M cGraw – Hill, 2008, ISBN: 978-0-07-
066703-7
Course Outcomes:
1. Understanding to align the management of Supply Chain with corporate goals L2
and strategies.
2. Apply problem solving and decision making frame works that propose defensible L3
solutions to organizational opportunities, challenges, change and risk.
3. Understand the fundamental role of logistics as it relates to inventory and L4
transportation.
4. Design co-ordinate and collaborative processes and activities emerging L6
technologies.
5. Apply knowledge to evaluate and mange an effective supply chain information L3
systems.
188
CO-PO Mapping:
PSO1
PSO2
PSO3
PO10
PO11
PO12
PO1
PO2
PO3
PO4
PO5
PO6
PO7
PO8
PO9
CO
20A37DT.1 3 3 - - 3 - - 3 - 3 3 3 2 - -
20A37DT.2 3 - 3 3 3 - - 3 - 3 3 3 - - 3
20A37DT.3 3 3 - 3 3 - - 3 - 3 - 3 - 2 -
20A37DT.4 3 3 3 3 3 - - 3 - 3 3 3 - 2 -
20A37DT.5 - - 3 - 3 1 - - - - 3 3 - - 3
189
Title of the Course Non-Conventional Sources of Energy

Category PEC
Course Code 20A37ET
Year IV B. Tech
Semester I Semester
Branch ME

3 0 0 3
Course Objectives:
 To grasp the role and potential of new and renewable source
 To recognize the principle, storage and applications of solar energy
 To understand the sources and potentials of wind energy and also to comprehend the Principles of Bio-
Conversion of bio-mass and bio-gas uses.
 To explain the principle, working procedure and types of geothermal energy, ocean energy and tidal & wave
energy.
 To know the knowledge on direct energy conversion.
Unit 1 Principles Of Solar Radiation 9

Role and potential of new and renewable source, the solar energy option, Environmental impact of solar power,
the solar constant, extraterrestrial and terrestrial solar radiation, solar radiation on titled surface, instruments for
measuring solar radiation, potential in India
 Understand types of energy resources. (L2)
 Understand the different types of measuring instruments of solar radiation. (L2)
Unit 2 Solar Energy Collectors 9

Flat plate and concentrating collectors, classification of concentrating collectors, orientation and thermal analysis,
advanced collectors. Solar Energy Storage And Applications: Different methods, Sensible, latent heat and tratified
storage, solar ponds. Solar Applications solar heating/cooling technique, solar distillation and drying, photovoltaic
energy conversion, potential in India.
 Understand different types of solar collectors. (L2)
 Understand the different types of energy storage systems and applications. (L2)
Unit 3 Wind Energy 8

Sources and potential in India, horizontal and vertical axis wind mills, performance characteristics, Betz criteria.
Bio-M ass: Principles of Bio-Conversion, Anaerobic/aerobic digestion, types of Bio-gas digesters, gas yield,
combustion characteristics of bio-gas, utilization for cooking, and economic aspects, potential in India
 Understand the type of winds and windmills components. (L2)
 Understand the types of biomass conversion technologies and biogas digesters. (L2)
Unit 4 Geothermal Energy 10

Resources, types of wells, methods of harnessing the energy, potential in India.
Ocean Energy: OTEC, Principles utilization, setting of OTEC plants, thermodynamic cycles. Tidal and wave
energy: Potential and conversion techniques, mini-hydel power plants, and their economics, potential in India.
 Classify the Geothermal resources. (L2)
 Understand OTEC, wave and tidal energy extraction methods. (L2)
190
Unit 5 Direct Energy Conversion 9
Need for DEC, Carnot cycle, limitations, principles of DEC. Thermo-electric generators, Seebeck, Peltier and
Joule Thomson effects, materials, applications, M HD generators, principles, dissociation and ionization, hall effect,
M agnetic flux, M HD accelerator, M HD Engine, power generation systems, electron gas dynamic conversion,
economic aspects. Fuel cells, principles, faraday‟s law‟s, thermodynamic aspects, selection of fuels and operating
Conditions.
 Classify the Direct energy conversion techniques. (L2)
 Understand the concept and working of M HD generator and Fuel cells. (L2)

1. Tiwari and M K.Ghosal, Renewable energy resources: Basic principles and applications, Narosa publications
2005, ISBN 10: 1842651250 ISBN 13: 9781842651254
2. G.D. Rai, Non-Conventional Energy Sources, khanna publications, 2011, ISBN 10: 8174090738, ISBN 13:
9788174090737
Reference Books:
1. Twidell & Weir, Renewable Energy Sources, Routledge , 3rd Ed.2015,ISBN 9780367200756
2. Non Conventional Energy Resources, B.H.Khan, M cGrawHIll, 2015, ISBN 1259081397, 9781259081392
Course Outcomes:
1. Understand the types of energy resources and different types of measuring L2
instruments of solar radiation.
2. Understand different types of collectors and storage systems of solar energy and L2
their applications.
3. Understand the type of winds and windmills components and the types of L2
biomass conversion technologies and biogas digesters
4. Classify the Geothermal resources, Understand OTEC, wave and tidal energy L2
extraction methods
5. Classify the Geothermal resources and Understand the concept and working of L2
M HD generator and Fuel cells
CO-PO Mapping:
PSO1
PSO2
PSO3
PO10
PO11
PO12
PO1
PO2
PO3
PO4
PO5
PO6
PO7
PO8
PO9
CO
20A37ET.1 3 2 - - - 3 3 - - - - 3 - - -
20A37ET.2 3 3 - 1 3 3 - - - - - 3 - - -
20A37ET.3 3 2 3 - - 3 3 - - - - 3 - - -
20A37ET.4 3 3 - - 3 3 - - - - - 3 - - -
20A37ET.5 3 3 - - 3 3 - - - - - 3 - - -
191
Title of the Course Finite Element M ethods

Category PEC
Course Code 20A37FT
Year IV B. Tech
Semester I Semester
Branch ME

3 0 0 3
Course Objectives:
 To enable the students to understand fundamentals of finite element analysis
 To learn the principles involved in the discretization of domain with various elements, polynomial interpolation
and assembly of global arrays.
 To learn the application of FEM in various structural and non structural problems by incorporating boundary
conditions.
Unit 1 12
Introduction to finite element methods for solving field problems, Stress and equilibrium, Boundary conditions,
Strain-Displacement relations, Stress- strain relations for 2D and 3D Elastic problems, Potential energy and
equilibrium.
One dimensional problem: Finite element modeling coordinates and shape functions. Assembly of global
stiffness matrix and load vector. Finite element equations, Treatment of boundary conditions, solution for
displacements, reaction, stresses, temperature effects. Quadratic shape functions.
 Understand the numerical methods involved in Finite Element theory. (L2)
 Understand the general steps of finite element method. (L2)
 Understand the role and significance of shape functions in finite element formulation. (L2)
 Formulate and solve axially loaded bar problems. (L3)
Unit 2 8
Analysis of trusses: Stiffness M atrix for plane truss element. Stress Calculations and Problems.
Analysis of beams: Element Stiffness M atrix for two noded, two degrees of freedom per node beam element and
simple problems.
 Explain the use of the basic finite elements for structural applications using truss and beam. (L2)
 Formulate and analyze truss and beam problems. (L4)
Unit 3 8
Two dimensional problems: Finite element modeling of two dimensional stress analysis with constant strain
triangles and treatment of boundary conditions. Estimation of load Vector, Stresses. Finite element modeling of
Axi-symmetric solids subjected to axi-symmetric loading with tr iangular elements.
 Choose two – dimensional elements (Triangular Elements). (L3)
 Apply the formulation techniques to solve two – dimensional problems using triangle elements. (L3)
 Formulate and solve axis symmetric problems. (L3)
Unit 4 12
Iso-Parametric Formulation: Concepts, sub parametric, super parametric elements, 2 dimensional 4 noded iso-
parametric elements, and numerical integration.
Analysis of Shafts: Analysis of a uniform shaft subjected to torsion.
192
 Apply the formulation techniques to solve two – dimensional problems using quadrilateral elements. (L3)
 Formulate and solve torsion problems. (L3)
Unit 5 7
Dynamic analysis: Formulation of finite element model, element –mass matrices, evaluation of Eigen values and
Eigen vectors for a stepped bar and Beam.
Steady state heat transfer analysis: One dimensional analysis of slab and fin, analysis of heat generated in thin
plate, two dimensional analysis of thin plate.
 Understand problems involving dynamics using Finite Element M ethods. (L2)
 Analyze the Eigen values and Eigen Vectors for stepped bar. (L4)
 Apply Finite Element M ethods for heat transfer problems. (L3)

1. Introduction to Finite elements in Engineering- Tirupathi.R. Chandrupatla and Ashok D. Belegundu-Pearson
Education India -4th Edition 2015- ISBN-978-9332551824
2. Finite Element Analysis- Dr. S Senthil, R Paneerdhass – Lakshmi Publications-5th Edition 2013-ISBN-978-
9383103317
3. Finite Element Analysis in Engineering- S.M d. Jalaludeen- Anuradha Publications- 2016-ISBN-978-
8184722376
Reference Books:
1. J N Reddy- An introduction to the Finite Element M ethod, M cGraw – Hill- 4th Edition 2019-ISBN -978-
9390385270.
2. R D Cook, D S M alkus and M E Plesha- Concepts and Applications of Finite Element Analysis -John Wiley-4th
Edition 2001-ISBN-978-0471356059.
3. K J Bathe- Finite Element Procedures in Engineering Analysis- Prentice-Hall-1996-ISBN-978-8126529988.
Course Outcomes:
1. Identify mathematical model to solve common engineering problems by applying
L2 & L3
the finite element method and able to solve one dimensional problems like bars.
2. Derive element matrices to find stresses in beams and trusses. L2 & L4
3. Formulate FE characteristic equations for two dimensional elements and can
L3
solve plain stress, plain strain and axis-symmetric problems.
4. Formulate FE equations for iso-parametric elements and can solve iso-
L3
parametric & Torsion problems.
5. Solve dynamic problems where the effect of mass matters during the analysis
L2, L3 & L4
and heat transfer problems
CO-PO Mapping:
PSO1
PSO2
PSO3
PO10
PO11
PO12
PO1
PO2
PO3
PO4
PO5
PO6
PO7
PO8
PO9
CO
20A37FT.1 3 3 1 1 3 - - - 1 1 - 1 3 - 2
20A37FT.2 3 3 - - - - - - - - - - 2 - 2
20A37FT.3 3 3 1 1 3 - - - - - - - - - 3
20A37FT.4 3 3 - - - - - - - - - - - 2 -
20A37FT.5 3 3 - - - - - - - - - - 3 2 3
193
Title of the Course M odern M achining Processes

Category PEC
Course Code 20A37GT
Year IV B. Tech
Semester I Semester
Branch ME

3 0 0 3
Course Objectives:
 To provide students with an understanding of the latest technologies being used in manufacturing industries as
part of modernization of industries
 To understand and appreciate the importance of basic principles of M anufacturing Systems and also they will
know about the differences between conventional and un-conventional machining process with the help of
various advanced manufacturing techniques like USM , AJM , ECM, CM , EDM, PAM , EBM & LSB
Unit 1 UCMP – Introduction - Ultrasonic machining 10

Need for non-traditional machining methods- Classification of modern machining processes – considerations in
process selection. Importance of smart, HSTR and Composite materials in UCM P, Applications. Ultrasonic
machining – Elements of the process, mechanics of metal removal process parameters, economic considerations,
applications and limitations, recent development, Hybrid technologies used in UCM P.
 Understand the need for unconventional machining processes. (L2)
 Illustrate the working of USM can perform experiments on those processes. (L3)
Unit 2 Mechanical Processes 10

Abrasive jet machining, Water jet machining and abrasive water jet machining Basic principles, equipment‘s,
process variables, mechanics of metal removal, M RR, application and limitations. (AJM and WJM). Working
Principles – equipment used – Process parameters –M RR-Variation in techniques used – Applications.
 Understand the need for AJM , WAJM and WJM . (L2)
 Illustrate the working of AJM , WAJM and WJM can perform experiments on those processes. (L3)
Unit 3 Electro – Chemical Processes 8

Fundamentals of electro chemical machining, electrochemical grinding, electro chemical honing and deburring
process, metal removal rate in ECM , Tool design, Surface finish and accuracy economic aspects of ECM –
Fundamentals of chemical machining, advantages and applications.
 Understand the fundamental concepts of CM , ECM . (L2)
 Illustrate the working of CM , ECM can perform experiments on those processes. (L3)
Unit 4 Thermal Metal Removal Processes – I 10

General Principle and applications of Electric Discharge M achining, Electric Discharge Grinding and electric
discharge wire cutting processes – M echanics of metal removal in EDM , Process parameters, selection of tool
electrode and dielectric fluids, methods surface finish and machining accuracy, characteristics of spark eroded
surface and machine tool selection. Wire EDM , principle, applications.
194
 Understand the fundamental concepts of EDM and WEDM . (L2)
 Illustrate the working of CM , ECM can perform experiments on those processes. (L3)
Unit 5 Thermal Metal Removal Processes – II 10

Generation and control of electron beam for machining, theory of electron beam machining, comparison of
thermal and non-thermal processes –General Principle and application of laser beam machining – thermal
features, cutting speed and accuracy of cut. Application of plasma for machining, metal removal mechanism,
process parameters, accuracy and surface finish and other applications of plasma in manufacturing indus tries.
Chemical machining principle-maskants –etchants- applications. M agnetic abrasive finishing, Abrasive flow
finishing.
 Understand the fundamental concepts of LBM , PAM and other surface finish process. (L2)
 Illustrate the working LBM , PAM and other surface finish process can perform experiments on those
processes. (L3)

1. Vijay.K. Jain ―Advanced M achining Processes‖ Allied Publishers Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi(2002) ISBN 81-7764-
294-4.
2. Pandey P.C. and Shan H.S. ―M odern M achining Processes‖ Tata M cGraw- Hill, New Delhi (1980). ISBN:
0070965188, 9780070965188
Reference Books:
1. Benedict. G.F. ―Nontraditional M anufacturing Processes‖ M arcel Dekker Inc., New York (1987). ISBN,
0824773527
2. Mc Geough, ―Advanced M ethods of M achining‖ Chapman and Hall, London (1998) 42 Industrial Robotics 3.0,
ISBN 978-0-412-31970-9
Course Outcomes:
1. Understand the knowledge on need for unconventional machining process and L2 & L3
can perform experiments on USM process and are able to apply these concepts
in academic research.
2. Understand and Illustrate the working of AJM , WAJM and WJM , with this can L2 & L3
perform experiments on processes and can apply these concepts in academic
research.
3. Understand and Illustrate the fundamental concepts of CM , ECM with this can L2 & L3
perform experiments on processes and can apply these concepts in academic
research.
4. Understand and illustrate the fundamental concepts of EDM and WEDM ECM L2 & L3
with this can perform experiments on processes and can apply these concepts
in academic research.
5. Understand and illustrate the fundamental concepts of LBM , PAM and other L2 & L3
surface finish process with this can perform experiments on processes and can
apply these concepts in academic research.
CO-PO Mapping:
PSO1
PSO2
PSO3
PO10
PO11
PO12
PO1
PO2
PO3
PO4
PO5
PO6
PO7
PO8
PO9
CO
20A37GT.1 3 2 - 3 - - - - - - - - - 2 -
20A37GT.2 3 3 3 3 1 - - - - - - - - 2 -
20A37GT.3 3 2 - 3 - - - - - - - - - 2 -
20A37GT.4 3 3 3 3 1 - - - - - - - - 2 -
20A37GT.5 3 3 - 3 - - 3 - - - - - - 2 -
195
Title of the Course M echatronics

Category PEC
Course Code 20A37HT
Year IV B. Tech
Semester I Semester
Branch ME

3 0 0 3
Course Objectives:
 To Familiarize the technologies behind modern mechatronic systems
 To explain fundamentals for the development of fully automated system.
 To Develop a robotic or automated systems focusing on the hardware and software integration.
 To demonstrate the development of mechatronic system and MEMS.
Unit 1 INTRODUCTION 9
Definition of M echatronics, Need for M echatronics in Industry, Objectives of mechatronics, mechatronics design
process, M echatronics key elements, mechatronics applications–Computer numerical control(CNC) machines,
Tool monitoring systems, Flexible manufacturing system(FM S), Industrial Robots, Automatic packaging systems,
Automatic inspection systems.
 Explain the role of mechatronics in industry. (L2)
 Applications of mechatronics in automation industry. (L3)
Unit 2 Sensors 9
Static characteristics of sensors, Displacement, Position and Proximity sensors, Force and torque sensors,
Pressure sensors, Flow sensors, Temperature sensors, Acceleration sensors, Level sensors, Light sensors, Smart
material sensors, M icro and Nano sensors, Selection criteria for sensors.
 Classify the types of sensors and can describe their working principles. (L2)
Unit 3 Actuators 9
M echanical, Electrical, Hydraulic and Pneumatic Actuation systems, Characteristics and their limitations, Design of
Hydraulic and Pneumatic circuits, Piezo electric actuators, Shape memory alloys, Selection criteria for actuators.
 Classify the types of actuators and can explain them. (L2)
 Choose the selection criteria for different actuators. (L3)
Unit 4 Microprocessors, Micro controllers and Programmable Logic Controllers 9

Architecture of of M icroprocessor, M icro controller and Programmable Logic Controller, PLC Programming using
ladder diagrams, logics, latching, sequencing, timers relays and counters, data handling, Analog input/output,
selection of controllers.
 Understand the architecture of microprocessors, microcontrollers and PLC. (L2)
 Recognize the applications of microprocessors, microcontrollers and PLC in electronic
appliances. (L2)
Unit 5 Micro Electro Mechanical Systems(MEMS) 9

History, Effect of scaling, Fabrication Techniques: Oxidation, Physical Vapor disposition, Chemical Vapor
196
Deposition, Lithography, Etching, Wafer bonding, LIGA, DRIE, and Applications: Labon chip.
 Illustrate the different working principles of processes about M EMS in industry. (L3)

1. M echatronics Electronics Control Systems in M echanical and Electrical Engineering, W. Bolton, 3/e Pearson
Education Press, 2005. ISBN-10 : 0273742868; ISBN-13 : 978-0273742869
2. Devadas Shetty and Richard A Kolk, M echatronic System Design, 2/e, Cengage learning, 2010. ISBN-10: 1-
4390-6199-8
3. Clarence W. de Silva, M echatronics an Integrated Approach, CRC Press, 2005. ISBN 9780849312748
Reference Books:
1. James J Allen, M icro Electro M echanical Systems Design, CRC Press Taylor & Francis group, 2005. ISBN 0-
8247-5824-2
2. Ganesh S Hedge, M echatronics, Jones & Bartlett Learning, 2010. ISBN, 1934015296, 9781934015292
Course Outcomes:
1. Explain the role of mechatronics and its applications in automation industry. L2 & L3
2. Classify the types of sensors and can describe their working principles. L2
3. Classify the types of actuators and can choose the selection criteria for different L2 & L3
actuators
4. Understand the architecture of microprocessors, microcontrollers and PLC with L2
their applications in electronic appliances.
5. Illustrate the different working principles of processes about M EMS in industry. L1
CO-PO Mapping:
PSO1
PSO2
PSO3
PO10
PO11
PO12
PO1
PO2
PO3
PO4
PO5
PO6
PO7
PO8
PO9
CO
20A37HT.1 3 3 - - - - - - 3 - 3 - - - -
20A37HT.2 - - - - - - - - 1 - - - - - -
20A37HT.3 - - - - 2 - - - 2 - - - - - -
20A37HT.4 - - - - 1 - - - - - - - - - -
20A37HT.5 - 2 - - 2 - - - - - - - - - -
197
DEPARTMENT OF Mechanical Engineering
Title of the Course Power Plant Engineering

Category PEC
Course Code 20A37IT
Year IV B. Tech
Semester I Semester
Branch ME

3 0 0 3
Course Objectives:
 To understand the student present day energy demand.
 To understand the working and combustion phenomenon in steam power plant.
 To gain knowledge on the concept and the working of diesel power plants and gas turbines.
 To understand the function and operation of the basic components of a hydro-electric power plant & nuclear
power station.
 To learn the concept of non-conventional sources and factors affecting the site selection for a power plant and
concept of base load plant and peak load plant.
Introduction to the Sources of Energy – Resources and Development of Power in India.
Steam Power Plant: Plant Layout, Working of different Circuits, Fuel and handling equipment‘s, types of coals,
coal handling, choice of handling equipment, coal storage, Ash handling systems.
 Discuss the various sources of energy and functions of the components of power plant. (L2)
 Identify and explains the coal handling and ash handling units. (L2)
Unit 2 Steam Power Plant -Combustion Process 9
Properties of coal – overfeed and underfeed fuel beds, travelling grate stokers, spreader stokers, retort stokers,
pulverized fuel burning system and its components, combustion needs and draught system, cyclone furnace,
design and construction, Dust collectors, cooling towers and heat rejection. Corrosion and feed water treatment.
 Explain the various combustion processes. (L2)
 Identify the components of water treatment process. (L2)
Unit 3 Internal Combustion Engine Plant-Diesel Power Plant 9
Introduction – IC Engines, types, construction– Plant layout with auxiliaries – fuel supply system, air starting
equipment, super charging.
Gas Turbine Plant: Introduction – classification - construction – Layout with auxiliaries – Principles of working of
closed and open cycle gas turbines. Combined Cycle Power Plants and comparison.
 Describe the functions of the components of diesel power plant and concepts of fuel supply system. (L2)
 Classify and explain the functions of various gas turbine power plants. (L2)
Unit 4 Hydro Electric Power Plant 10
Hydro Electric Power Plant: Water power – Hydrological cycle / flow measurement – drainage area
characteristics – Hydrographs – storage and Pondage – classification of dams and spill ways.
Hydro Projects And Plant: Classification – Typical layouts – plant auxiliaries – plant operation pumped storage
plants.
Nuclear Power Station: Nuclear fuel – breeding and fertile materials – Nuclear reactor – reactor operation-
radioactive waste disposal.
Boiling water reactor - Pressurized water reactor - Gas cooled reactor - Fast breeder reactor - Liquid metal cooled
reactor-reactor materials - Radiation shielding.
198
 Demonstrate the functioning of Hydro-electric power plants and concepts of hydro projects. (L3)
 Describe the working principles of various nuclear reactors. (L2)
Unit 5 Power From Non-Conventional Sources 6

Power From Non-Conventional Sources: Utilization of Solar Collectors- Principle of Working, Wind Energy –
types – HAWT, VAWT - Tidal Energy.
Power Plant Economics And Environmental Considerations: Capital cost, investment of fixed charges,
operating costs, general arrangement of power distribution, Load curves, and load duration curve. Definitions of
connected load, M aximum demand, demand factor, average load, load factor, diversity factor – related exercises.
Effluents from power plants and Impact on environment – pollutants and pollution standards – M ethods of
Pollution control.
 Describe the concept of non-conventional sources of Solar, wind and tidal energy. (L2)
 Examine about power plant economics and the concept of pollutants and pollution standards. (L4)

1. P.K.Nag, Power Plant Engineering. TM H, 4 th Ed.2014.ISBN 10: 9339204042ISBN 13: 9789339204044.
2. P.C.Sharma, Power Plant Engineering. S.K.Kataria&sons, 2014. ISBN-10 ‫‏‬: ‫‏‬9350143844, ISBN-13 ‫‏‬: ‫‏‬978-
9350143841.
Reference Books:
1. Rajput. R.K., A Text Book of Power Plant Engineering. Laxmi Publications;, 2016, 5th Ed. ISBN-10 ‫ ‏‬:
‫‏‬8131802558ISBN-13 ‫‏‬: ‫‏‬978-8131802557.
2. Hegde R.K. Power Plant Engineering. ‫‏‬Pearson Education India, 2015. ISBN-10 ‫‏‬: ‫‏‬9332534101ISBN-13 ‫‏‬:
‫‏‬978-9332534100
3. Arora and S. Domkundwar.A Course in Power Plant Engineering Dhanpat Rai& Co. (P) Limited, 6th Ed. 2016.
ISBN-10 ‫‏‬: ‫‏‬8177001957, ISBN-13 ‫‏‬: ‫‏‬978-8177001952.
Course Outcomes:
1. Recognize the importance of power production suited to the demand, have an L2
idea of various power plants and can know the impact of power plants on the
environment.
2. Describe the latest high pressure boilers, concept of fluidized bed combustion L2
and its importance of handling. And also can be able to identify the components
of water treatment process.
3. Recognize the concepts of diesel power plant and gas turbine plants. And can L2
explain open cycle and closed cycle gas turbine cycles.
4. Demonstrate the layout and working principle of hydro power plant. And can L2 & L3
explain working principles of various nuclear reactors.
5. Describe the concept of non-conventional sources. Examine about power plant L3 & L4
economics and the concept of pollutants and pollution standards.
CO-PO Mapping:
PSO1
PSO2
PSO3
PO10
PO11
PO12
PO1
PO2
PO3
PO4
PO5
PO6
PO7
PO8
PO9
CO
20A37IT.1 3 2 - - - 3 2 - - - - 2 - - -
20A37IT.2 3 2 - - - 3 2 - - - - - - - -
20A37IT.3 3 - - - - 3 - - - - - - - - -
20A37IT.4 3 - - - - 3 - - - - - 2 - - -
20A37IT.5 3 2 - - - 3 - - - - 3 2 - - -
199
Title of the Course M echanical Vibrations

Category PEC
Course Code 20A37JT
Year IV B. Tech.
Semester I Semester
Branch ME

3 0 0 3
Course Objectives:
 To understand the un-damped and damped free vibrations to mechanical systems.
 To know the sources of forced vibrations and Also transmissibility& isolation of vibrations.
 To understand the natural frequencies and modes of forced vibrations.
 To analyze the formulation, model analysis of vibrations and critical speeds of shafts.
 To learn the various vibration transducers and its applications.
Unit 1 Single Degree Freedom Systems 9

Single Degree Freedom Systems: Un-damped free vibration - Classical method, Energy method, equivalent
systems, torsional systems. Damped free vibration - Viscous damping, under damping, critical damping, over
damping, Coulomb damping, equivalent damping coefficient. Simple problems.
 Evaluate the natural frequencies of free vibrations under single degree freedom.[L6]
 Analyze the frequency and coefficient of damped vibrations. [L4]
 Solve the problems of damped and undamped free vibrations with single degree freedom.[L3]
Unit 2 Forced Vibrations of Single Degree Freedom Systems 10

Forced Vibrations of Single Degree Freedom Systems: Steady state forced vibration, sources of excitation,
impressed harmonic force, resonance impressed force due to unbalance, motion excitation, transmissibility and
isolation, performance of different type of isolators, power absorbed by viscous damping.
 Judge the resonance due to forced vibrations under single degree freedom. [L6]
 Analyze the different sources of excitations in forced vibrations.[L4]
 Compare the performance of various isolators. [L4]
Unit 3 Two Degree Freedom Systems 9

Two Degree Freedom Systems: Formulation of Equation of motion, Natural frequencies and modes of vibration by
classical method, coupled pendulum, forced vibration, dynamic vibration absorber.
 Formulate the equations of motion for free vibrations under two degree freedom. [L5]
 Evaluate the natural frequencies and modes of free vibrations under two degree freedom.[L6]
Unit 4 Multi Degree Freedom Systems& Whirling of shafts 10

Multi Degree Freedom Systems: Lagrangian method for formulation of equation of motion, Influence coefficient
method, Lumped mass and distributed mass systems, Stodola method, Holzer's method, model analysis of free
and forced vibrations.
Whirling of shafts: Critical speed of shafts, Rayleigh's upper bound approximation, Dunkerley's lower bound
approximation, critical speed of shafts with damping.
200
 Formulate the equations of motion to the forced vibrations under multi degree freedom.[L5]
 Analyze the model analysis for free and forced vibrations under multi degree freedom. [L4]
 Apply the Dunkerly‘s and Rayleigh method for finding the critical speeds of shafts under multi degree
freedom. [L3]
Unit 5 Vibration measurement and Applications 10

Vibration measurement and Applications: Transducers - variable resistance transducers, Piezoelectric
transducers, electrodynamic transducers and linear variable differential transformer transducer, Vibration pickups -
vibrometer, accelerometer, velometer and phase distortion, Frequency-measuring instruments, Vibration exciters-
M echanical exciters and electrodynamic shaker.
 Select the suitable transducer for vibrations measurement. [L4]
 Experiment the usage of vibrations pickups for measuring the frequency of vibrations. [L5]
 Consider the importance of vibrations measurement to various applications. [L6]
1. Singrasu S. Rao, M echanical Vibrations, 6/e, Pearson Education, 2018,ISBN-13:9780132128193
2. G.K.Groover, M echanical Vibrations, 8/e, 2009, N. Chand & Bros, ISBN-13 :9788185240565
3. Rao.V.Dukkipati&J.Srinivas,PHI 2010, ISBN-13 :9788120345249
4. V.P.Singh, M echanical Vibrations,DhanapatRai&Co, ISBN-13:5551234002564
Reference Books:
1. William Thomson, Theory of Vibrations with Applications, CRS Press , ISBN-13:9780748743803
2. L. M eirovich, Elements of Vibrations Analysis, Tata M cGraw Hill, ISBN-13:9789339204716
3. S. Graham Kelly, M echanical Vibrations, Tata M cGraw Hill, 1996, ISBN-13:9781439062128
Course Outcomes:
1. Evaluate the natural frequencies and analyze the behaviour of the un-damped L4 & L6
single degree freedom systems with damping.
2. Solve vibration problems with forcing function and analyze the transmissibility & L3 & L4
isolation.
3. Analyze the natural frequencies and evaluate the modes of two degree freedom L4 & L6
systems with and without damping.
4. Analyze the multi degree freedom systems using Stodola method, Holzer‟s L4 & L5
method and M atrix iteration method also develops the natural frequencies with
Rayleigh‘s method and Dunkerly‘s method.
5. Identify various transducers to measure the vibrations and recommend the L4 & L6
different vibration pickups and exciters for mechanical vibrations.
CO-PO Mapping:
PSO1
PSO2
PSO3
PO10
PO11
PO12
PO1
PO2
PO3
PO4
PO5
PO6
PO7
PO8
PO9
CO
20A37JT.1 3 3 - - 2 - - - - - - - 3 - -
20A37JT.2 - - 3 3 - - - - - - - - - 2 -
20A37JT.3 - 3 2 - 3 - - - - - - - - 3 -
20A37JT.4 3 3 - - 3 - - - - - - - 2 3 -
20A37JT.5 - - - 3 - 3 - - - - - - - - 3
201
Title of the Course Production and Operations M anagement

Category PEC
Course Code 20A37KT
Year IV B. Tech
Semester I Semester
Branch ME

3 0 0 3
Course Objectives:
 To make the students understand the functions of production planning & control, goods and services, issues
in product design and to provide knowledge of determining the accurate demand forecasting.
 To provide the knowledge on facilities location, various types layouts, computerized layout planning, and
assembly line balancing techniques.
 To make the students understand the concepts of capacity planning and aggregate planning and their
planning strategies.
 To make the students understand the concepts of capacity planning and aggregate planning and their
planning strategies,
 To make knowledge on lean management, concepts of JIT, six sigma, quality control.
Unit 1 Production and Forecasting 8

Production – Products – types – design of goods & services – Functions of Production & Operations M anagement
– Production Vs Productivity – Productivity measurement – Product design & analysis – new product development
and its concepts.
Forecasting – Importance of forecasting – Types of forecasting, their uses– Forecasting techniques – qualitative
methods and quantitative methods – accuracy of forecasting methods.
 Understand production definition and can measure productivity. (L3)
 Describe new product development concepts. (L2)
 Analyse and apply forecasting and its techniques to determine the accurate demand forecasting. (L4)
Unit 2 Plant Layout 8

Factors affecting facilities location – Single facility location model – Types of facilities layouts: product layout
process layout, group technology layout – Assembly line balancing – Computerized layout planning algorithms:
ALDEP, CRAFT, and CORELAP.
 Understand the types of plant layouts and factors affecting the plant location. (L2)
 Solve assembly line balancing problems. (L3)
 Understand and demonstrate computerized layout planning algorithms. (L3)
Unit 3 : Capacity Planning and Aggregate Planning 10

Capacity Planning – Plant capacity – strategies of capacity planning – equipment selection.
Aggregate Planning – Strategies of aggregate planning – O.R. models in aggregate planning – chase planning –
expediting – controlling aspects.
M RP– Lot sizing techniques in M RP –Introduction to ERP – LOB (Line of Balance).
 Solve problems on capacity planning and equipment selection. (L3)
 Solve problems on aggregate planning using OR models. (L3)
 Define M RP, ERP and LOB concepts. (L1)
202
Unit 4 : Scheduling 8
Job Sequencing – Johnson‘s rule, extension of Johnson‘s rule, Palmer‘s rule, and Graphical method. Scheduling–
Techniques – flow shop and job shop Scheduling.
 Analyze and apply Johnson‘s rule, palmers rule and graphical methods for scheduling jobs. (L4)
 Apply flow shop and job shop scheduling techniques. (L3)
Unit 5 : Quality Management 8

Quality M anagement: Economics of quality assurance-Control charts for variables and for attributes-Acceptance
sampling plans - Lean management- philosophy and creation of lean enterprise - JIT concepts - Kanban system -
Total Quality M anagement-ISO 9000 series standards-Six sigma-concepts.
 Define quality management, control charts for variables and for attributes. (L1)
 Describe Lean management and its philosophy for creation of lean enterprise. (L2)
 Understand and explain JIT concept, Kanban system, TQM , ISO series standards and six sigma (L2)

1. S.N. Chary, Production and Operations Management. 5th edition McGraw Hill Edu. Pvt. Ltd, 2012. (ISBN 10:
1259005100ISBN 13: 9781259005107)
2. R. Panneerselvam, Production and Operation Management. PHI. 2012. (ISBN, 9788120345553.)
3. Operations M anagement: Theory and Practice: B.M ahadevan Pearson.( ISBN: 9788131730706)
Reference Books:
1. KanishkaBedi, Production & Operations M anagement. Oxford Univ. Press. ( ISBN: 9780195690873)
2. M artin K. Starr and David W. M iller. Inventory Control Theory and practice. (ISSN: 0925-5273)
3. Buffa and Sarin . M odern Production / Operations M anagement 8ed ,Wiley.. (ISSN: 1059-1478)
Course Outcomes:
1. Describe the basic concepts of production systems, productivity, and design L2, L3 & L4
process of new products including both goods and services, and determine the
future demands by using forecasting techniques.
2. Solve the facility location and layout planning problems using single facility L2 & L3
location model, Assembly line balancing, and computerized techniques like
CRAFT, CORELAP, and ALDEP.
3. Apply the strategies of capacity planning and aggregate planning while solving L1 & L3
O.R. models of production planning and Lot sizing techniques in M RP, and
recognize the importance of ERP and LOB.
4. Produce optimal job sequences; can prepare the schedules of flow shop, job L3 & L4
shop scheduling problems.
5. Create Lean enterprise with JIT, Kanban system, TQM elements ,Reliability and L1 & L2
Six-Sigma quality control.
CO-PO Mapping:
PSO1
PSO2
PSO3
PO10
PO11
PO12
PO1
PO2
PO3
PO4
PO5
PO6
PO7
PO8
PO9
CO
20A37KT.1 3 3 3 - 3 - - - 3 - 3 - 2 - -
20A37KT.2 3 3 3 - 3 - - - 3 - 3 - 2 - -
20A37KT.3 3 3 3 - - - - - 3 - 3 - 2 - -
20A37KT.4 3 3 3 1 3 - - - 3 - 3 - 2 2 -
20A37KT.5 - 3 3 - 3 1 1 - 3 1 3 - 2 2 -
203
Title of the Course CNC and Adaptive Control

Category PEC
Course Code 20A37LT
Year IV B. Tech
Semester I Semester
Branch ME

3 0 0 3
Course Objectives:
 To acquaint new technologies in machine tools.
 To explore features of NC/CNC machine tools.
 To impart knowledge on NC/CNC part programming.
 To explain interpolation algorithms for control loops.
 To cover latest developments in CNC system.
Unit 1 CNC Technology 8

An overview: Introduction to NC/CNC/DNC machine tools, Classification of NC /CNC machine tools, Advantage,
disadvantages of NC /CNC machine tools, Application of NC/CNC.DNC systems: Classifications, M erits, Demerits
and application.
 Learn advanced technologies to control different machine. (L2)
Unit 2 Design of CNC 8

Constructional features of NC/CNC machine tools, CNC tooling and fixturing system, Designation of axis in CNC
systems.
 Describe the design of CNC (L2)
Unit 3 Part programming 10

CNC programming and introduction, M anual part programming: Basic (M illing, turning etc...), Special part
programming, Advanced part programming, Computer aided part programming (APT).
 Develop part programs for different diagrams. (L6)
Unit 4 System drivers and devices 8

Hydraulic and pneumatic motors, and their features, Electrical motors AC/DC and their features.
Interpolators: Hardware Interpolators, Software Interpolators, NC/CNC controllers.
 Identify the importance of electronics in manufacturing processes. (L2)
Unit 5 Adaptive control system 6

Adaptive control with optimizations (ACO), Adaptive control with constraints (ACC).
Latest developments: M achining center, Turing center, Communication networking, recent developments of CNC
systems, Virtual NC systems.
 Enhance their knowledge on different control systems. (L2)

1. Yoram Koren, Computer Control of M anufacturing Systems, M cGraw Hill International, Singapore, 2006.
204
ISBN 0070607435
2. John Stenerson and Kelly Curran, Computer Numerical Control: Operation and Programming, PHI, New
Delhi, 2009. ISBN 0130119806
3. TC Chang, RA Wysk and HP Wang, Computer Aided M anufacturing, PHI, New Delhi, 2009. ISBN
0131429191
Reference Books:
1. P. Radhakrishnan, S. Subramanyan& V. Raju, CAD/CAM /CIM , 3/e, New Age International Publishers, 2008.
ISBN 9788122427110
2. M ikell P. Groover, Emory W. Zimmers , CAD/CAM, 5/e, Pearson Prentice Hall of India, Delhi, 2008. ISBN
8120304020
Course Outcomes:
1. Classify and distinguish NC, CNC and DNC systems L2
2. Recognize the advantage of CNC technology in machining L2
3. Prepare APT and part programs of different 2D sketches L6
4. Learn the use of electronics in advanced metal cutting processes L2
5. Identify different types of control systems used in CNC L2
CO-PO Mapping:
PSO1
PSO2
PSO3
PO10
PO11
PO12
PO1
PO2
PO3
PO4
PO5
PO6
PO7
PO8
PO9
CO
20A37LT.1 3 3 - 2 2 - - - - - - - - 3 -
20A37LT.2 3 3 - 2 2 - - - - - - - - 3 -
20A37LT.3 3 3 - 2 2 - - - - - - - - 3 -
20A37LT.4 3 3 - 2 2 - - - - - - - - 3 -
20A37LT.5 3 3 - 2 2 - - - - - - - - 3 -
205
Title of the Course Additive M anufacturing

Category OEC
Course Code 20A37M T
Year IV B. Tech
Semester I Semester
Branch ME

3 0 0 3
Course Objectives:
 To familiarize techniques for processing of CAD models for rapid prototyping
 To explain fundamentals of rapid prototyping techniques
 To demonstrate appropriate tooling for rapid prototyping process
 To focus Rapid prototyping techniques for reverse engineering
 To train Various Pre – Processing, Processing and Post Processing errors in RP Processes
Unit 1 Introduction to rapid prototyping 8

Introduction: Introduction to Prototyping, Traditional Prototyping Vs. Rapid Prototyping (RP), Need for time
compression in product development, Usage of RP parts, Generic RP process, Distinction between RP and CNC,
other related technologies, Classification of RP.
 Recognize rapid prototyping process. (L2)
 Classify different rapid prototyping processes. (L2)
Unit 2 Solid and Liquid Based RP Systems 8
Stereolithography (SLA): Principle, Process, M aterials, Advantages, Limitations and Applications.
Solid Ground Curing (SGC): Principle, Process, M aterials, Advantages, Limitations, Applications.
Fusion Deposition M odeling (FDM ): Principle, Process, M aterials, Advantages, Limitations, Applications.
Laminated Object M anufacturing (LOM ): Principle, Process, M aterials, Advantages, Limitations, Applications.
 Explain the principles, advantages, limitations and applications of Solid and Liquid based AM systems. (L2)
 Identify the materials for Solid and Liquid based AM systems. (L2)
Unit 3 Powder Based RP Systems 8

Principle and Process of Selective Laser Sintering (SLS), Advantages, Limitations and Applications of SLS,
Principle and Process of Laser Engineered Net Shaping (LENS), Advantages, Limitations and Applications of
LENS, Principle and Process of Electron Beam M elting (EBM ), Advantages, Limitations and Applications of EBM .
Other RP Systems: Three-Dimensional Printing (3DP): Principle, Process, Advantages, Limitations and
Applications. Ballastic Particle M anufacturing (BPM ): Principle, Process, Advantages, Limitations, Applications.
Shape Deposition M anufacturing (SDM): Principle, Process, Advantages, Limitations, Applications.
 Explain the principles, advantages, limitations and applications of powder-based and other RP systems. (L2)
Unit 4 Rapid tooling and Reverse engineering 8

Rapid Tooling: Conventional Tooling Vs. Rapid Tooling, Classification of Rapid Tooling, Direct and Indirect Tooling
M ethods, Soft and Hard Tooling methods.
Reverse Engineering (RE): M eaning, Use, RE – The Generic Process, Phases of RE Scanning, Contact Scanners
and Noncontact Scanners, Point Processing, Application Geometric M odel, Development.
 Classify rapid Tooling methods. (L2)
206
 Explain the concepts of reverse engineering and scanning tools. (L2)
Unit 5 Errors in RP processes and RP applications 8

Errors in RP Processes: Pre-processing, processing, post-processing errors, Part building errors in SLA, SLS, etc.
RP Applications: Design, Engineering Analysis and planning applications, Rapid Tooling, Reverse Engineering,
M edical Applications of RP.
 Describe various Pre – Processing, Processing and Post – Processing errors in RP processes. (L2)
 Select suitable RP technique for engineering design analysis and medical applications. (L2)

1. Chua C.K., Leong K.F. and Lim C.S., Rapid Prototyping: Principles and Applications, 2/e, Edition, World
Scientific Publishers, 2003.
2. Ian Gibson, David W. Rosen, Brent Stucker, Additive M anufacturing Technologies: Rapid Prototyping to
Direct Digital M anufacturing, 1st Edition, Springer, 2010.
3. Rafiq Noorani, Rapid Prototyping: Principles and Applications in M anufacturing, John Wiley & Sons, 2006.
Reference Books:
1. Liou W. Liou, Frank W., Liou, Rapid Prototyping and Engineering Applications: A Tool Box for Prototype
Development, CRC Press, 2007.
2. Pham D.T. and Dimov S.S., Rapid M anufacturing; The Technologies and Application of RPT and Rapid
tooling, Springer, London 2001.
3. Gebhardt A., Rapid prototyping, Hanser Gardener Publications, 2003.
4. Hilton P.D. and Jacobs P.F., Rapid Tooling: Technologies and Industrial Applications, CRC Press, 2005.
Course Outcomes:
1. Identify different types of rapid prototyping processes. L2
2. Discuss fundamentals of rapid prototyping techniques. L2
3. Recognize appropriate tooling for rapid prototyping process. L2
4. Select suitable reverse engineering method for different applications. L2
5. Understand Various Pre – Processing, Processing and Post Processing errors in L2
RP processes and its applications.
CO-PO Mapping:
PSO1
PSO2
PSO3
PO10
PO11
PO12
PO1
PO2
PO3
PO4
PO5
PO6
PO7
PO8
PO9
CO
20A37M T.1 3 3 3 2 2 - - - - - - - - 3 -
20A37M T.2 3 3 3 2 2 - - - - - - - - 3 -
20A37M T.3 3 3 3 2 2 - - - - - - - - 3 -
20A37M T.4 3 3 3 2 2 - - - - - - - - 3 -
20A37M T.5 3 3 3 2 2 - - - - - - - - 3 -
207
Title of the Course Entrepreneurship Development

Category OEC
Course Code 20A37NT
Year IV B. Tech
Semester I Semester
Branch ME

3 0 0 3
Course Objectives:
 To impart conceptual and managerial skills to students.
 To create awareness among the students about the various institutions, which supports entrepreneurship.
 To impart knowledge on the basics of entrepreneurial skills and competencies to provide the participants with
necessary inputs for creation of new ventures.
 To explore new vistas of entrepreneurship in 21st century environment to generate innovative business ideas.
 To impart conceptual and managerial skills to students.
Unit 1 Entrepre neurs hip 9

Entrepreneur–M eaning and concept of entrepreneurship, role of entrepreneurship in economic development,
Myths about entrepreneurs, agencies in entrepreneurship management and future of entrepreneurship types of
entrepreneurs.
 Develop awareness about entrepreneurship and successful entrepreneurs. (L6)
 Develop an entrepreneurial mind-set by learning key skills such as design, personal selling, and
communication. (L6)
Unit 2 Motivation 9
M ajor Motives Influencing an Entrepreneur – Achievement M otivation Training, Self - Rating, Business Games,
Thematic Apperception Test – Stress M anagement, Entrepreneurship Development Programs – Need, Objectives.
 Develop awareness about Entrepreneur – Achievement M otivation Training. (L6)
 Explain business games, stress management and Entrepreneurship Development Programs. (L2)
Unit 3 Busi ness 9

Small Enterprises – Definition, Classification – Characteristics, Ownership Structures – Project Formulation –
Steps involved in setting up a Business – Identification of business opportunities; Steps involved in starting a small
Enterprise-Financial, technical, social, legal and managerial feasibilities of the project
 Create innovative and establish a foundation of confidence in the skills necessary to establish an
enterprise. (L6)
 Explain the importance of business networking and the strategies in overcoming the business challenges.
(L2)
Unit 4 Financing and Accounting 9

Need – Sources of Finance, Term Loans, Capital Structure, Financial Institution, M anagement of working Capital,
Costing, Break Even Analysis, Taxation – Income Tax, Excise Duty – Sales Tax.
 Create innovative and establish a foundation of confidence in the skills necessary to establish an
enterprise and its financial aspects. (L6)
208
Unit 5 Support to Entrepreneurs 11
Sickness in small Business – Concept, M agnitude, Causes and Consequences, Corrective M easures – Business
Incubators – Government Policy for Small Scale Enterprises – Growth Strategies in small industry – Expansion,
Women Entrepreneurship Development, Entrepreneurship Development in rural areas,
 Describe an insight on how to make business proposal and also analysis of the same. (L2)

1. Khanka.S.S., ―Entrepreneurial Development‖ S.Chand&Co.Ltd.,RamNagar,NewDelhi,2013.ISBN:81-219-
1801-4
2. Donald F Kuratko, ―Entrepreneurship– Theory, Process and Practice‖, 9th Edition, Cengage Learning, 2014.
ISBN-10:1285051750
Reference Books:
1. HisrichRD,PetersMP,―Entrepreneurship‖8thEdition,TataM cGraw-Hill,2013.ISBN1843769964
2. M athewJM animala,"Enterprenuershiptheoryatcrossroads:paradigmsandpraxis‖2ndEditionDreamtech,2005.ISBN81-
297-0260-6
3. RajeevRoy,"Entrepreneurship"2ndEdition,OxfordUniversityPress,2011.ISBN10:0198072635
4. EDII―FaultyandExternalExperts–AHandBookforNewEntrepreneursPublishers:Entrepreneurship
Course Outcomes:
1. Develop awareness and create entrepreneurial mind-set by learning key skills L6
such as design, personal selling, and communication.
2. Develop awareness about Entrepreneur – Achievement M otivation Training and L2 & L6
Explain business games, stress management with Entrepreneurship
Development Programs.
3. Create foundation of confidence in the skills necessary to establish an enterprise L2 & L6
and skills needed to run a business successfully.
4. Create innovative and establish a foundation of confidence in the skills L6
necessary to establish an enterprise and its financial aspects.
5. Describe an insight on how to make business proposal and also analysis of the L2
same.
CO-PO Mapping:
PSO1
PSO2
PSO3
PO10
PO11
PO12
PO1
PO2
PO3
PO4
PO5
PO6
PO7
PO8
PO9
CO
20A37NT.1 3 - - - - - - - 3 3 - 2 - - -
20A37NT.2 3 - - - - - - - - 3 - - - 2 -
20A37NT.3 3 - - - - 2 - 2 2 3 - 3 - - -
20A37NT.4 3 3 - - - - - - 3 3 - - - - -
20A37NT.5 3 - - - - - - - 3 3 - - - - -
209
Title of the Course Total Quality M anagement

Category OEC
Course Code 20A37OT
Year IV B. Tech.
Semester I Semester
Branch ME

3 0 0 3
Course Objectives:
 To introduce the students, the basic concepts of Total Quality M anagement.
 To expose with various quality issues in Inspection.
 To gain Knowledge on quality control and its applications to real time.
 To know the extent of customer satisfaction by the application of various quality concepts.
 To understand the importance of Quality standards in Produc tion.
Unit 1 Introduction to TQM 10

Definition of Quality, Dimensions of Quality, Definition of Total quality management, Quality Planning, Quality
costs – Analysis, Techniques for Quality costs, and Basic concepts of Total Quality M anagement.
 Define quality; explain the principles of Quality Planning and techniques of quality costs. (L2)
 Interpret the concepts of TQM and contrast the present quality issues with the past. (L2)
Unit 2 Historical Review of TQM 9

Quality council, Quality statements, Strategic Planning, Deming Philosophy, Barriers of TQM Implementation,
Benefits of TQM , Characteristics of successful quality leader, Contributions of Gurus of TQM , Case studies.
 Apply Deming philosophy and strategic planning to achieve quality in production. (L3)
 Explain the characteristics of quality leader with case studies. (L2)
 Outline the contributions of TQM Gurus. (L2)
Unit 3 TQM Principles 8

Customer Satisfaction – Customer Perception of Quality, Customer Complaints, Service Quality, Customer
Retention, Employee Involvement – M otivation, Empowerment teams, Continuous Process Improvement – Juran
Trilogy, PDSA Cycle, Kaizen, Supplier Partnership – Partnering, sourcing, Supplier Selection, Supplier Rating,
Relationship Development, Performance M easures – Basic Concepts, Strategy, Performance M easure Case
studies
 Identify customer perception of quality and explain customer satisfaction for retention. (L4)
 Apply the principles of motivation and Empowerment. (L3)
 Examine and measure performance using quality principles. (L4)
Unit 4 TQM Tools 9

Benchmarking – Reasons to Benchmark, Benchmarking Process, Quality Function Deployment (QFD) – House of
Quality, QFD Process, Benefits, Taguchi Quality Loss Function.
Total Productive M aintenance (TPM ) – Concept, Improvement Needs, FM EA – Stages of FMEA, The seven tools
of quality, Process capability, Concept of Six Sigma, New Seven management tools, Case studies.
 Solve problems on Taguchi loss function and quality function deployment. (L3)
210
 Illustrate TPM seven tools, Concept of Six Sigma and new seven management tools of TQM . (L3)
Unit 5 Quality Systems 8

Need for ISO 9000 and Other Quality Systems, ISO 9000: 2000 Quality System – Elements, Implementation of
Quality System, Documentation, Quality Auditing, QS 9000, ISO 14000 – Concept, Requirements and Benefits,
Case Studies
 Describe the quality systems concepts and their elements. (L2)
 Discuss the need of ISO9000 and Other Quality systems. (L2)
1. Dale H Besterfield, Total Quality M anagement, Fourth Edition, Pearson Education, 2018, ISBN:
9789332534452
2. Subburaj Ramaswamy, Total Quality M anagement, Tata M cgraw Hill Education., 2012, ISBN: 1259001415,
9781259001413
3. Joel E.Ross , Total Quality M anagement, Third Eition, CRC Press, 2017, ISBN: 9781351407786
Reference Books:
1. Narayana V and Sreenivasan N.S, Quality M anagement – Concepts and Tasks, NewAge International, 1996,
ISBN-10: 8122416802.
2. Robert L.Flood, Beyond TQM , First Edition, John Wiley & Sons Ltd, 1993, ISBN: 9780471939672.
3. Richard S. Leavenworth & Eugene Lodewick Grant, Statistical Quality Control, Seventh Edition, Tata M cgraw
Hill, 2015, ISBN, 0070241147, 9780070241145.
4. Samuel Ho , TQM – An Integrated Approach, Kogan Page Ltd, USA, 1995, ISBN: 9780749415617.
Course Outcomes:
1. Develop an understanding on quality M anagement philosophies and frameworks. L2
2. Adopt TQM methodologies for continuous improvement of quality. L3 & L2
3. M easure the cost of poor quality, process effectiveness and efficiency to identify L3 & L4
areas for improvement.
4. Apply benchmarking and business process reengineering to improve L3
management processes.
5. Determine the set of indications to evaluate performance excellence of an L2
organization.
CO-PO Mapping:
PSO1
PSO2
PSO3
PO10
PO11
PO12
PO1
PO2
PO3
PO4
PO5
PO6
PO7
PO8
PO9
CO
20A37OT.1 2 - - - - 2 2 - - - 2 1 - - -
20A37OT.2 2 2 - 2 - 2 - - - 1 2 1 - - -
20A37OT.3 1 2 - 2 - - - 1 1 1 2 1 - - -
20A37OT.4 1 - - - - 1 - - - - 2 1 - - -
20A37OT.5 1 - - - - - - - - - 2 2 - - -
211
Title of the Course Produce Design and Development

Category OEC
Course Code 20A37PT
Year IV B. Tech
Semester I Semester
Branch ME

3 0 0 3
Course Objectives:
 To apply the principles of generic development process; conduct customer need analysis; and set product
specification for new product design and development.
 To generate, select, screen, and test concepts for new product design and development.
 To apply the principles of product architecture and industrial design to design and develop new products.
 To apply the principles of DFMA and Prototyping to design and develop new product.
 To apply the concepts of economics principles sustainable product development and life cycle assessment.
Unit 1 Introduction & Product Specifications 9

Introduction – A Generic Development Process – Adapting the Generic Product Development Process - Product
Development Process Flows- Digital tools for product design– Identifying Customer Needs.
Product Specifications: Establishing Target Specifications; Setting the Final Specifications.
Learning Outcomes: At the end of the unit, the student will be able to,
 Apply the principles of generic development process. (L3)
 Conduct customer need analysis. (L3)
 Set product specification for new product design and development. (L3)
Unit 2 Concept Generation 9

Concept Generation: The Activity of Concept Generation - Concept Selection: Concept Screening; Concept
Scoring – Concept Testing – Concept innovation using TRI.
 Select, screen, and test concepts for new product design and development. (L3)
Unit 3 Product Architecture 9

Implications of the Architecture: Establishing the Architecture; Delayed Differentiation; Platform Planning;
Related System-Level Design Issues – Industrial Design: Assessing the Need for Industrial Design; Impact of
Industrial Design; The Industrial Design Process; M anagement of the Industrial Design Process; Assessing the
Quality of Industrial Design.
 Apply the principles of product architecture. (L3)
 Apply industrial design to design and develop new products. (L3)
Unit 4 DFM and Prototyping 9

Design for Manufacturing: Estimate the M anufacturing Costs; Reduce the Costs of Components; Reduce the
Costs of Assembly; Reduce the Costs of Supporting Production; Consider the Impact of DFMA
Prototyping: Type; Uses; Principles; Technologies; Planning for Prototypes.
212
 Apply the principles of DFMA. (L3)
 Apply Prototyping to design and develop new product. (L3)
Unit 5 Product Development Economics 9

Elements of Economic Analysis; Economic Analysis Process – sustainable product development: framework and
metrics – life cycle assessment of a product: stages and impact.
 Apply the concepts of economics principles sustainable product development. (L3)
 Apply life cycle assessment of a product. (L3)

1. Introduction to Product Design and Development for Engineers, Jamnia, A., , CRC Press, 2018.
2. Product Design and Development, Karl, T. Ulrich and Steven, D. Eppinger,‖, M cGraw Hill, 2003.
Reference Books:
1. Belz A., 36-Hour Course: ―Product Development‖ M cGraw-Hill, 2010.
2. Chitale, A. K. and Gupta, R. C., Product Design and M anufacturing, PHI Learning, 2013
3. Pugh S., ―Total Design – Integrated M ethods for successful Product Engineering‖, Addison Wesley
Publishing, 1991.
Course Outcomes:
1. Apply the principles of generic development process; conduct customer need
L3
analysis; and set product specification for new product design and development.
2. Select, screen, and test concepts for new product design and development. L3
3. Apply the principles of product architecture and industrial design to design and
L3
develop new products.
4. Apply the principles of DFMA and Prototyping to design and develop new product. L3
5. Apply the concepts of economics principles sustainable product development and
L3
life cycle assessment.
CO-PO Mapping:
PSO1
PSO2
PSO3
PO10
PO11
PO12
CO
PO1
PO2
PO3
PO4
PO5
PO6
PO7
PO8
PO9
20A37PT.1 3 3 3 3 - - - - - - - 3 - 2 -
20A37PT.2 3 3 3 3 - - - - - - - 3 - 2 -
20A37PT.3 3 3 3 3 - - - - - - - 3 - 2 -
20A37PT.4 3 3 3 3 - - - - - - - 3 - 2 -
20A37PT.5 3 3 3 3 - - - - - - - 3 - 2 -
213
(Can also be handled by the faculty members of other departments who underwent FDP on UHV conducted by AICTE, New Delhi)
Title of the Course Universal Human Values - II

Category HSM C
Course Code 20AC71T
Year IV B. Tech
Semester I Semester
Branch Common to all

3 0 0 3
Course Objectives:
 Development of a holistic perspective based on self-exploration about themselves (human being), family,
society and nature/existence.
 Understanding (or developing clarity) of the harmony in the human being, family, society and nature/existence
 Strengthening of self-reflection
 Development of commitment and courage to act
Unit 1 Course Introduction - Need, Basic Guidelines, Content and Process for Value Education 6
 Purpose and motivation for the course, recapitulation from Universal Human Values-I
 Self-Exploration–what is it? - Its content and process;
 ‗Natural Acceptance‘ and Experiential Validation- as the process for self-exploration
 Continuous Happiness and Prosperity- A look at basic Human Aspirations
 Right understanding, Relationship and Physical Facility- the basic requirements for fulfillment of aspirations of
every human being with their correct priority
 Understanding Happiness and Prosperity correctly- A critical appraisal of the current scenario
 M ethod to fulfill the above human aspirations: understanding and living in harmony at various levels.
Include practice sessions to discuss natural acceptance in human being as the innate acceptance for living with
responsibility (living in relationship, harmony and co-existence) rather than as arbitrariness in choice based on
liking-disliking.
Un it 2 Understanding Harmony in the Human Being - Harmony in Myself! 6

 Understanding human being as a co-existence of the sentient ‗I‘ and the material ‗Body‘
 Understanding the needs of Self (‗I‘) and ‗Body‘ - happiness and physical facility
 Understanding the Body as an instrument of ‗I‘ (I being the doer, seer and enjoyer)
 Understanding the characteristics and activities of ‗I‘ and harmony in ‗I‘
 Understanding the harmony of I with the Body
 Sanyam and Health; correct appraisal of Physical needs, meaning of Prosperity in detail
 Programs to ensure Sanyam and Health.
Include practice sessions to discuss the role others have played in making material goods available to me.
Identifying from one‘s own life. Differentiate between prosperity and accumulation. Discuss programs for ensuring
health vs dealing with disease.
Unit 3 Understanding Harmony in the Family and Society- Harmony in Human – 6

Human Relation ship
 Understanding values in human-human relationship; meaning of Justice (nine universal values in
relationships) and program for its fulfillment to ensure mutual happiness; Trust and Respect as the
214
foundational values of relationship
 Understanding the meaning of Trust; Difference between intention and competence
 Understanding the meaning of Respect, Difference between respect and differentiation; the other salient
values in relationship
 Understanding the harmony in the society (society being an extension of family): Resolution, Prosperity,
fearlessness (trust) and co-existence as comprehensive Human Goals
 Visualizing a universal harmonious order in society- Undivided Society, Universal Order- from family to world
family.
Include practice sessions to reflect on relationships in family, hostel and institute as extended family, real life
examples, teacher-student relationship, goal of education, etc. Gratitude as a universal value in relationships.
Discuss with scenarios. Elicit examples from students‘ lives.
Unit 4 Understanding Harmony in the Nature and Existence -Whole existence as Coexistence 6
 Understanding the harmony in the Nature
 Interconnectedness and mutual fulfillment among the four orders of nature recyclability and self-regulation in
nature
 Understanding Existence as Co-existence of mutually interacting units in all pervasive space
 Holistic perception of harmony at all levels of existence.
Include practice sessions to discuss human being as cause of imbalance in nature (film ―Home‖ can be used),
pollution, depletion of resources and role of technology, etc.
Unit 5 Implications of the above Holistic Understanding of Harmony on Professional Ethics 6

 Natural acceptance of human values
 Definitiveness of Ethical Human Conduct
 Basis for Humanistic Education, Humanistic Constitution and Humanistic Universal Order
 Competence in professional ethics: a). Ability to utilize the professional competence for augmenting universal
human order b). Ability to identify the scope and characteristics of people friendly and eco-friendly production
systems, c). Ability to identify and develop appropriate technologies and management patterns for the above
production systems.
 Case studies of typical holistic technologies, management models and production systems
 Strategy for transition from the present state to Universal Human Order: a). At the level of individual: as
socially and ecologically responsible engineers, technologists and managers b). At the level of society: as
mutually enriching institutions and organizations
 Summing up.
Include practice Exercises and Case Studies (tutorial) Sessions e.g., to discuss the conduct of an engineer or a
scientist, etc.
Prescribed Textbooks
1. R R Gaur, R Asthana, G P Bagaria, ―A Foundation Course in Human Values and Professional Ethics‖, 2nd
Revised Edition, Excel Books, New Delhi, 2019. ISBN 978-93-87034-47-1
2. R R Gaur, R Asthana, G P Bagaria, ―Teachers‘ M anual for A Foundation Course in Human Values and
Professional Ethics‖, 2nd Revised Edition, Excel Books, New Delhi, 2019. ISBN 978-93-87034-53-2
Reference Books
1. Jeevan Vidya: EkParichaya, A Nagaraj, Jeevan Vidya Prakashan, Amar Kantak, 1999.
2. N. Tripathi, Human Values‖, New Age Intl. Publishers, New Delhi, 2004.
3. The Story of Stuff (Book).
4. M ohandas Karamchand Gandhi. The Story of M y Experiments with Truth
5. E. FSchumacher. Small is Beautiful
6. Cecile Andrews, Slow is Beautiful
7. J C Kumarappa. Economy of Permanence
8. Pandit Sunderlal. Bharat M ein AngrejiRaj
9. Dharampal, Rediscovering India.
215
10. M ohandas K. Gandhi, ―Hind Swaraj or Indian Home Rule‖
11. M aulana Abdul Kalam Azad. India Wins Freedom
12. Romain Rolland. Vivekananda (English)
13. Romain Rolland. Gandhi (English)
14. Jawaharlal Nehru. Rediscovery of India
Course Outcomes:
Upon successful completion of the course, student will Blooms Level of Learning
1. become more aware of themselves, and their surroundings (family, society, nature) L2
2. Become more responsible in life, and in handling problems with sustainable
L2
solutions, while keeping human relationships and human nature in mind.
3. Have better critical ability. L3
4. Become sensitive to their commitment towards what they have understood (human
L3
values, human relationship and human society).
5. Apply what they have learnt to their own self in different day-to-day settings in real
L4
life, at least a beginning would be made in this direction.
CO-PO Mapping:
PSO1
PSO2
PSO3
PO10
PO11
PO12
PO1
PO2
PO3
PO4
PO5
PO6
PO7
PO8
PO9
COs
20AC71T.1 - - - - - - - - - - - 3 - - -
20AC71T.2 - - - - - - - - - - - 3 - - -
20AC71T.3 - - - - - - - - - - - 3 - - -
20AC71T.4 - - - - - - - - - - - 3 - - -
20AC71T.5 - - - - - - - - - - - 3 - - -
Assessment pattern for UHV-2

The Assessment Pattern for Universal Human Values-II course is described hereunder.
UHV-2 course carries two credits. The assessment is to provide a fair state of development of the student, so
participation in classroom discussions, self-assessment, peer assessment etc. will be used in evaluation.
A student has to secure 40% marks out of 100 in the CIE and SEE together to qualify for the award of the degree. The
distribution shall be 50 marks for continuous internal assessment and 50 marks for semester end examination.
Internal evaluation shall be conducted for the course during semester and shall be evaluated for 50 marks and
distributions of marks as follows:
 Assessment by faculty mentor: 10 marks
 Self-assessment: 10 marks
 Assessment by peers: 10 marks
 Socially relevant project/Group Activities/Assignments: 20 marks
Semester End examination is conducted for 50 marks and is of 2 hours duration. The question paper shall be of
subjective type with 5 questions, one question from each unit, with internal choice. All the questions carry equal marks of
10 each.
216
Title of the Course Refrigeration and Air Conditioning

Category SC
Course Code 20A371L
Year IV B. Tech.
Semester I Semester
Branch ME

1 0 2 2
Course Objectives:
 To understand the principles of vapor compression refrigeration system.
 To understand the various components of vapor compression refrigeration system and its thermodynamic
cycle.
 To understand the properties of various refrigerants used in the commercial refrigeration and air conditioning
units and their effect on environment.
 To understand the principle of Air-conditioning system andusage of Psychometric Chart.
 To understand human com fort conditions and estimate the effect ofvarious cooling and heating loads in an
air-conditioning system.
Theory Sessions – 1
Module – 1
Lab Sessions – 1
Introduction to Refrigeration: - Necessity and applications–Unit of refrigeration and C.O.P.– Vapor Compression
Refrigeration system.
Experiment-1: Study of various components of Vapor compression refrigeration system cut models.
 Learn about units of refrigeration and basic refrigeration cycle principle. (L1)
Module – 2
Lab Sessions – 2
Description of various components of Simple Vapour compression refrigeration cycle –Representation of cycle on
T-S and p-h charts.
Experiment-2: Study of various components of Domestic Refrigerator in working condition.
Experiment-3: Trouble shooting of the Domestic refrigerator like leakage of refrigerant, failure of thermostat,
failure of compressor motor, failure of insulation, etc.,
 Learns about various components of refrigeration cycle. (L1)
Module – 3
Lab Sessions – 3
Refrigerants–Desirable properties –common refrigerants used –Nomenclature–Ozone Depletion–Global Warming
Experiment-4: Study of various refrigerants used in the various refrigeration and air conditioning units.
Experiment-5: Study of refrigerant filling procedure in various refrigeration and air conditioning units used
commercially.
Experiment-6: Knowing the quantity of refrigerants filled in the domestic refrigeration and air conditioning units.
Knowing the price of refrigerants and their suppliers details
 Learns about the various refrigerants properties and their effect on Ozone depletion. (L1, L2 & L3)
217
Module – 4
Lab Sessions – 2
Introduction to Air-Conditioning, Basic Definition, Applications of Air-Conditioning, Psychometric - Air-water vapor
mixtures, Psychometric Properties, Psychometric or Air-Conditioning processes, Psychometric Chart.
Experiment-7: Study of various components of Domestic Split Air-conditioner in working condition.
Experiment-8: Trouble shooting of the Domestic Split Air-conditioner like leakage of refrigerant, failure of
thermostat, failure of compressor motor, failure of condenser fan, failure of evaporator blower, failure of air filtering
element, etc.,
 Know about the Air Conditioning process, Psychometric properties and their use in comfort air
conditioning process. (L1,L2 &L3)
Module – 5 Lab Sessions – 2
Conceptofhumancomfortandeffectivetemperature–ComfortAirconditioning–
IndustrialairconditioningandRequirements–AirconditioningLoadCalculations.
Experiment-9: Estimation of cooling loads for a room based on the area of room, no. of occupants in the room
and no. of electrical Gadgets present in the room.
Experiment-10: Determining the tonnage of air conditioner.
 Estimate the cooling loads of the air conditioning systems. L1,L2 &L3
1. Refrigeration and Airconditioning/CPArora/M cGrawHill
2. Basic Refrigeration and Air-Conditioning/Ananthanarayanan/M cGrawHill
Course Outcomes:
1. Use and apply the principles of vapor compression refrigeration system. L1,L2 &L3
2. Demonstrate and fix the various components of vapor compression refrigeration
L1,L2 &L3
system and its thermodynamic cycle.
3. Explain and apply the properties of various refrigerants used in the commercial
L1,L2 &L3
refrigeration and air conditioning units and their effect on environment.
4. Explain and apply the principle of Air-conditioning system and usage of
L1,L2 &L3
Psychometric Chart.
5. Estimate and apply human comfort conditions and estimate the effect of various
L1,L2 &L3
cooling and heating loads in an air-conditioning system.
CO-PO Mapping:
PSO1
PSO2
PSO3
PO10
PO11
PO12
PO1
PO2
PO3
PO4
PO5
PO6
PO7
PO8
PO9
CO
20A371L.1 3 3 3 2 2 1 2 - - - - 2 2 1 2
20A371L.2 3 3 3 3 2 1 2 - - - - 2 2 1 2
20A371L.3 2 2 2 2 - 1 2 - - - - 2 2 1 2
20A371L.4 3 3 2 3 3 1 2 - - - 1 2 2 1 2
20A371L.5 3 3 3 3 3 1 2 - - - 1 2 2 1 2
218

ME Min1

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

ME Min1

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

ME Min1

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

ANNAMACHARYA INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY AND SCIENCES RAJAMPET

ANNAMACHARYA INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY AND SCIENCES

ACADEMIC REGULATIONS (R20), COURSE STRUCTURE AND SYLLABI

VISION AND MISSION OF THE INSTITUTION

ACADEMIC RULES AND REGULATIONS OF FOUR-YEAR B. TECH

11. Curricular Framework for Minor Programme

7. COURSES AND CREDIT STRUCTURE

Course offering Department Code

Engineering Sciences ESC 24

7.1.1 Foundation Courses

7.1.2 Professional Core Courses

The following guidelines are pertaining to Open Elective Courses.

7.1.8 Universal Human Values (UHV) Courses

Marks obtained in I Internal examination: 19

Marks obtained in II Internal examination: 10

Final Internal Marks: (19x0.8) + (10x0.2) = 17.2

Marks obtained in first Internal: 0 (Absent); Marks obtained in second Internal: 18

Final Internal Marks: (18x0.8) + (0x0.2) = 14.4

8.1.6 Evaluation of Skill oriented / Skill advanced / Soft Skills course

(i) There shall be one question from each unit

(i) Five questions with internal choice will be given

8.2.2 Lab End Examination

 Of the 20 additional Credits to be acquired, 16 credits shall be earned by undergoing specified

= Number of credits allotted to a particular curse ‗i‘

= Number of credits allotted to a particular semester ‘j’

= Grade point corresponding to the letter grade awarded to the semester j

,2,….m represent the number of semester of the entire programme.

14.3 Grade Card

Therefore, SGPA= 8.75

Example Illustration of CGPA

18. Minimum Instruction Days for a Semester

Appendix-I: Internship Guidelines

Step 5: Students will submit training report after completion of internship.

Step 6: Training Certificate to be obtained from industry.

For more details refer:

Appendix II: Norms and Procedures for Challenge Evaluation/Revaluation/Recounting

Activities (Non-Credit) as per AICTE Guidelines

STUDENT INDUCTION PROGRAMME (Zero Semester)

COURSE STRUCTURE FOR B.TECH MECHANICAL ENGINEERING R20 REGULATIONS

Semester I (First year)

Semester II (First year)

COURSE STRUCTURE FOR B.TECH MECHANICAL ENGINEERING R20 REGULATIONS

Semester III (Second year)

Semester IV (Second year)

COURSE STRUCTURE FOR B.TECH MECHANICAL ENGINEERING R20 REGULATIONS

Semester V (Third year)

COURSE STRUCTURE FOR B.TECH MECHANICAL ENGINEERING R20 REGULATIONS

Semester VI (Third year)

COURSE STRUCTURE FOR B.TECH MECHANICAL ENGINEERING R20 REGULATIONS

Semester VII (Fourth year)

Semester VIII (Fourth year)

COURSE STRUCTURE FOR B.TECH MECHANICAL ENGINEERING R20 REGULATIONS

Semester I (First year) - Service Subjects by ME

Semester II (First year) - Service Subjects by ME

Semester V (Third year) - OEC offered to CE, EEE & ECE by ME

Semester VII (Fourth year) - OEC offered to CSE & AIDS by ME

Title of the Course Algebra and Calculus

Lecture Hours Tutorial Hours Practice Hours Credits

Unit 2 Quadratic forms of matrices 8